Home

3500i User Manual - Acu-Rite

1. 3 Unit Inch N Dwell D Dwell time in seconds Required SO Tt DOLL mN E 7 Call sub program s Feedrate F Feedrate _ LLL G code format G82 Peck Drill Cycle The peck drilling cycle is generally used for peck drilling relatively hutoa 10 shallow holes It feeds from the R plane to the first peck depth o calculated so that all pecks are equal and do not exceed the ra maximum peck distance programmed in word Then rapid retracts to R plane to clear chip rapids down to previous depth less 02 and continues this loop until it reaches the final hole depth It then rapid retracts to the P dimension Field Code Description 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 286 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 287 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 ZDepth Z Absolute hole depth Required a Soman ee a 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 AD eee ee ate se ee 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 StartHgt R Initial Z start point in rapid Required J A RetumHgt P Zretumpointafterhole depth in rapid HE ls Hiss S is Ss e Peck Maximum peck distance positive dimension Required Feedrate F Feedrate G code format G83 ACU RITE 35001 151 Tapping Cycle Manual Data System 0 se A 16 08am to The machine must be equipped with spindle M functions l FWD REV OFF to use this c
2. 2 ad en ban amm Model Software and Features This manual describes functions and features provided by 3500i as of the following NC software numbers CNC model NC software number ACU RITE 35001 CNC Software 689 871 01 The machine tool builder adapts the usable features of the CNC to his machine by setting machine parameters Some of the functions described in this manual may therefore not be among the features provided by the CNC on your machine tool CNC functions that may not be available on your machine include Tool measurement with touch probes The machine tool builder representative can assist with becoming familiar with the features of the machine Many machine manufacturers as well as HEIDENHAIN Corp offer programming courses for the CNC We recommend these courses as an effective way of improving your programming skill and sharing information and ideas with other CNC users Intended place of operation The CNC is intended for use primarily in industrially zoned areas Refer to the respective installation manual for additional information vi New Functions of Software 689 871 01 02 CAM now includes a Save button to allow quickly saving progress Ctrl S can now be used as well CAM geometry creation dialogs now support copying and pasting between dialogs ARC Help Forms now support all planes As such X Y and Z parameters are all available and indicated a
3. e y Delete Find A Edit Preview oo nme ae at see eden ett mt 373 Dd I E O LL 0 q q G Functions o ns T The G Code functions have the following functional groups 1G Code Assist All G Codes including user defined are listed 5 6 Functions O Basic Modal Functions e oil LL Multi Segment Blocks M Basic Modal Functions Mm Multi Segment Blocks Arcs A Arcs Drilling Cycles Drilling Cycles Pocket Cycles _ Pocket Cycles Milling and Profiles Milling and Profiles e Rotation Scaling and Mirroring 3Spindle Probing Tool Probing Tool Probing _ Tool Radius Compensation Tool Radius Compensation Other G Functions Other G functions a 1M Functions Rotation Scaling and Mirroring Spindle Probing A Detailed descriptions of G Codes are on page 366 M Codes can be found on page 370 374 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Basic Modal Functions The Basic Modal Functions enables Multi Segment Blocks The Multi Segment Blocks enables ACU RITE 35001 G code Description GO Gl G17 G18 ALS G59 G60 G70 IET G90 G91 CEE 4 Rapid Move EndPoint Feed Move EndPoint XY Plane XZ Plane YZ Plane Modal Radius Chamfer Cancel Modal Radius or Chamfer Inch MM Absolute Incremental Feedrate I E O LL 0 q q gt Abrev gt AAEP ACAEP ARAEP gt ATA gt ATL
4. 8 Drawing Programs Starting Draw Draw Simulation Mode is started from the Program Manager You O me EEA tol can make some changes from the buttons while a simulation is ee running In Draw Simulation Mode the 35001 does not hold the operation of the program for Dwells and tool mounts and other machine related features gt de A 00 BlockForm G 120 must be defined in the program that is using Draw and a tool with a diameter defined must be active in the program for Draw to work y Any button that is grayed out indicates that feature is not available in the selected view In the Program Manager highlight a program and touch the Draw button on the bottom menu bar The Draw graphic screen activates 7 and the program simulation starts oe Es Ee ae Function Run Drawruns the program and starts the Draw Simulation Mode Run Draw Press Edit to edit the program Edit Pressing Stop will stop the program Stop Single Single Step executes the program one block at a time press Run Draw after each block Adjust Adjust View provides a new button menu with bate options for altering the graphic view characteristics Options opens the Options dialogue Options Show Hide dashboard Toggles the graphic view area to display the program and the position dashboard in addition to the graphic view Sim Tools displays the Simulation Tools table The
5. 7 E Ji AAA AAA ATA UA AAA LIA LAO AAA AAA AAA AAA LA AAA EUA St ALI UA 1 0 1 l 2 3 4 5 6 7 Shape E View Adjust ToolPath Create Ea las e ACU RITE 35001 299 Pattern tab The Pattern tab must have the appropriate data filled in to use the Pattern option in the Drill Location selection X Holes Enter the number of holes in X axis Te al Y Holes Enter the number of holes in Y axis Example One dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 2 145 Y 0 605 00 00 03 f Drillin Style Choose to use matrix pattern or perimeter pattern LA mn IM Pater X Start Enter the start position in the X axis 3 O Y Start Enter the start position in the Y axis PPerinet Y Increment Enter the increment between holes in X axis X Increment Enter the increment between holes in Y axis Angle Enter the angle to rotate the hole pattern O Sen O O u A lt O a og E E 1 0 1 3 4 5 6 7 Shape A View Adjust ToolPath Create Comment tab To add a comment if needed that will be placed in program to assist the operator Typical to most dialogues 300 10 CAM Programming Mill Cycle The Mill Cycle tool path is used to generate a milling cycle from a Manual Data no na defined shape The cycle rapids to the X Start Y Start point rapids to Lo er the Start Height and then feeds to the Z Depth using the Z Feed and mills the selected shape The cycle is comp
6. Sen O O u A lt O a The lines that will be kept will appear as dashed yellow lines O Data Input Touch on an empty area in the graphics area to accept the selection s E The geometry will now appear as two circles with two outside y tangent lines between them T 318 10 CAM Programming Finalizing the geometry Unwanted lines now need to be trimmed from the final shape Select the geometry Trim button from the Modifying Toolbar to y gt complete the geometry See Moditying Tools Buttons on page 309 Select the Trim button from the Modifying Toolbar in the main Toolbar J Ox ts The Prompt bar will ask that the objects to be trimmed should be selected Select the two circles The Prompt bar will ask what geometry the objects should be trimmed against Select the two lines The Prompt bar will ask what objects to keep Select the two outside radius Available pieces of geometry highlight as the cursor hovers over It Now touch in an open area in the display Both inside radius will be removed O ve O O Sa A lt O E The geometry will now appear as one continuous line radius at each aac Teran ta Progra gran mun ete e Shutdown 21 230n E end cam test dxf Layer DefaultLayer E Y 0 051 00 00 03 This geometry can now be used to create a shape which can then gt be used in a tool path f
7. When a program has been restored from the Recycle Bin A it s contents must be verified Selecting Restore should restore the program and it should now be available in the folder list in its original folder USB Access 5 2 Program Manager Functions Within the Program Manager the operator can access a USB device by inserting the USB device into the USB port of the control Manual Data Input Program To Run System A slant L 6am ie Showing 9 G M Free 228 2 MB Sort by Name M4 o ei 2 Documents ant oa gs e 31Kpcms 3Mail 1 Conv e Mail 2 Help eMail 3 EPS F e Mail 4 Trans 3Mail 5 Docum e JMail_x_foldei J MSOCache NVIDIA Program File SolidWorks B 3Spicer622 3 Tempchm ea TIS Toolbox Part v New Unplug Recycle SS fo T As soon as the USB device is inserted the Program Manager will automatically display the contents of the USB device within the folder list window From here the operator can modify copy delete etc any of the programs or folders on the USB device To get back to the previous folder list the operator can press the Back navigation menu key or open up the directory tree from the Utility Functions menu and navigating to the desired location No preview available To properly remove the USB device the operator should press the Unplug USB menu button before removing the device 4
8. li fun ld include MM Mill k maybenew M My Slot Prog la Sample1 t Sample2 Sample3 ls Sample4 Sample_ArcEn AR 3 g End program M2 cH 120 X 100000000 0000 Y 100000000 0000 Z 100000000 0000 I100 89 c E a O O hom a e O c os O S A m LO Utility Function Buttons In the Program screen the vertical side bar menu displays the following Utility buttons Manual Data Input Program To Run AR 3 g System TUAR CER cl Showing 9 GM Free 159 1 GB Sort by Name 12 AR 3 g M 3500i Button Function 120 X 100000000 0000 Y 100000000 0000 Z 100000000 0000 1100 End program Mo progr is 3500iSlot M 3500iSlot ls AR 3 l cam test li Chapter 6 le DAN_C_ Tool Preview toggles open or close the preview window sl example 2 Example One Folders toggles open or close the Explorer window Touch and hold for two seconds and the new folder dialogue opens h fun ld include fe ba M_Mill ltd maybenew lM My Slot Prog el Samplel k Sample2 Sample3 Details toggles on or off program size and date created information a Sample4 ld Sample_ArcEn Mark Provides selection of multiple programs Touch and hold o
9. Adjust Teach uses the current machine position for the selected tool Teach Use opens the dialogue Use Feature which asks if you would like the current selected tool or Fixture Offset if in Fixture Offset mode to be activated Touch the next menu button to activate the next button bar Exit closes the Tool Table 62 4 Tool Management Second Menu Bar The following is a description the lower menu bar page two buttons that are also available Button Find Clear Line Clear Table N Teach Program i Clear Feature N es aa a Copy To SIM Copy From N H when y Function Touch Find to locate a line in the tool table or find the tool or offset according to the value Clear Line clears the current line where the cursor is located Clear Table clears the complete table Touch Teach Program to use the program position for the selected tool Touch Clear Feature to clear the selected tool or fixture offset depending on the mode of the table Touch to return to the previous menu Copy To SIM copies the current Tool and Fixture Offset tables to the Simulation Tool and Fixture Offset tables and overwrites all data Copy From SIM copies from the Simulation Tool and Fixture Offset tables and overwrites the current data The Sim Tool and Sim Offset tables are only accessible the feature is enabled in the configuration See Simulation Tool
10. Field Code Description DistinY B The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to find the top of the part The default is the current probe position Optional X This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the coordinate entered relative to the current active work coordinate before finding the Boss Hole center YN Q gt O O O pe A m N Optional Y J Same as only for the Y axis Optional Z K Same as only for the Zaxis Optional Offset W Work Coordinate to update with the center location in X and Y axes If set work coordinate is updated Work coordinate register is not updated if not set and a warning message tells the operator no update has taken place if W is not set Optional Repeat R If set to 1 the cycle does a preliminary Meas measure in the X axis to get on center before measuring the Y axis making a total of 6 touches If set to 0 the cycle only measures X once for a total of 4 touches Default is O Optional To use the Inside Outside Boss Hole Finding Cycle Place the probe in the spindle with Its tool number active and the tool type set to Touch Probe Manually jog the probe stylus the approximate center in X amp Y within 0 1 2 54 mm If H 1 the Z axis should be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part otherwise the Z axis should be at the side picking depth Type G144 On Xn Yn Wn If this is run from inside a program this line needs
11. me Y ed gt c Q T Milling Feature Buttons When the Milling Button is selected the bottom menu bar changes to provide the following features to add or edit the milling requirements of the program Button Entry Move Rapid Line Exit Move Tool Repeat Sub Programs BIBI 10 18010 106 Function RPM opens the Spindle RPM dialogue so that the spindle RPM speed can be set Entry Move opens the Entry move dialogue to input data for how the cutting tool will enter into the part Rapid opens the Rapid move dialogue to enter data to the EndPoint destination Line opens the Line dialogue to enter data to mill a line to an EndPoint destination Arc opens the Arc dialogue to enter data to mill an arc to an EndPoint destination Exit Move opens the Exit move dialogue to input data for how the cutting tool will exit the part Tool opens the Tool dialogue to enter the Tool number and dimensions to be used Repeat opens the Repeat dialogue to select a set of blocks in the program Sub Programs opens the menu list to choose what type of sub program is to be used e g Sub EndSub Closes the bottom bar menu and returns to the main bottom bar menu 6 Conversational Editing More Milling Button a Select the More Milling button to display the more milling button features in the pop up menu More Milling Offset Dwel SetZero MCode Home BlockForm Plane Pat
12. DAN_C_Tool example 2 Example One e g92 test G Arcs G_Drill G_Mill ll G_Pockets gSample hinge plate 1 Slinclude iM M Cycles MM Drill M_Mill M_Mi11 mMM Pockets ti maybenew My Slot Prog el temp M TEMPLATE TestEng_full XXX iH xxx xao e 0 62 T New Unplug A Recycle Program To Run Program To Run 3500i m Manual Data Program System i IM 1 Basic template conversational 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Plane XY 5 BlockForm XMax 1 YMax 1 ZMax 0 0 6 Tool 1 MCode 6 7 Offset Fixture 1 8 RPM 1000 9 MCode 3 18 MCode 8 11 eek ENTER NEW PROGRAM C 12 13 MCode 9 44 Codiad E Block Search 5 Program Management Using custom program templates When creating new programs the 35001 uses a default template to Program Run y ey Shutdown 9 50an fol automatically insert some common blocks that most programs will TA TED eek ee ECT typically utilize If desired custom template files can be created that 5 ee oar teuplate 2 will allow customization of which blocks are inserted into new Z lt nc guide cis ee service programs when they are created template user Recycle bin To create custom program templates i In Program Management press the Folder button to view the file system tree 2 90 G90 ABSOLUTE a INCREMENTAL y E PLANE XY 7 Gt G18 PLANE XZ G19 PLANE YZ oe we Navigate to V templat
13. FC gt FR LTA gt MPCC gt MPCR gt MPRC gt MPRR 4 Description Feed Ang Ang and End Feed Ang Cha Ang and End Feed Ang Rad Ang and End Arc to Tangent Arc Arc to Tangent Line Feed Moves with Chamfer Feed Moves with Radius Line to Tangent Arc Feed MulPts Cha and Cha Feed MulPts Cha and Rad Feed MulPts Rad and Cha Feed MulPtst Rad and Rad gt 375 I O LL a q q Arcs G code Description The Arcs enables Refer to Chapter 7 7 2 Canned Cycles on page G2 Arc CW Radius and EndPoint 149 for more information regarding arc cycles G3 Arc CCW Radius and EndPoint 4 gt Drilling Cycles G code Description The Drilling Cycles enables Refer to Chapter 7 7 2 Canned Cycles Drill Bolt Hole Cycle on page 149 for more information regarding drilling cycles Drilling Off Basic Drill Cycle CounterBore Drill Cycle Peck Drill Cycle Tapping Cycle Bi Directional Boring Cycle Uni Directional Boring Cycle Chip Break Cycle Flat Bottom Boring Cycle Drill Pattern Cycle 376 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Pocket Cycles The Pocket Cycles enables Refer to Chapter 7 7 2 Canned Cycles on page 149 for more information regarding pocket cycles Milling and Profiles The Milling and Profiles enables Refer to Chapter 7 7 2 Canned Cycles on page 149 for more information regarding milling cycles ACU RITE 35001 G code Description G
14. Q N N Drill Bolt Hole Cycle Use the drill bolt hole cycle to drill a partial or full bolt circle A drill cycle must be programmed prior to the bolt hole cycle You can move around the pattern clockwise or counterclockwise either point to point or along a radius The cycle calculates the hole locations and uses the Polar Coordinate System for dimensions Field Code Diameter D StartAngle A Holes H XCenter X Index C Angle YCenter Y RadialPath R EndAngle B G code format G79 156 Description Diameter of bolt circle Tool normally moves from hole to hole in a CCW positive direction For CW direction D negative Required Angle of the first hole Required Number of holes in full bolt circle Required Absolute X center of the bolt circle Defaults to current position Rotates the Polar Coordinate System by entered angle Default O degrees 3 o clock CCW positive CW negative Absolute Y center of the bolt circle Defaults to current position Move from hole to hole on a radius Set to 1 0 to activate circular path between holes Defaults to straight line path between holes Angle of the last hole If there is no B value the CNC executes a full bolt hole circle Manual Data System z A Drill Bolt Hole Cycle Preview o 0000 0 0 A o E 17 ss a EZE 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 206 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 207 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0
15. Touch the Edit button in the bottom menu bar to enter the program edit mode a e 3 J S S a Select the Program Management button Management Select the program for editing example program shown xi AR 3 a Touch the Draw button in the bottom button Tool bar en to enter the draw program ri From the Draw Program touch the Edit button in the bottom menu bar to enter the Edit mode at any time 102 6 Conversational Editing Program Edit Screen The program edit screen provides the name of the program in the upper Status Bar and the program is displayed in numerical order in the main window The conversational edit buttons are available in the bottom menu bar Selecting a button for the machine operation that is to be performed will open a list of various types of machining options available Selecting the type of machining operation for a particular feature opens a dialogue and a graphic to illustrate the data that is being entered The bottom menu bar buttons pop up lists dialogues and graphics are explained in this chapter These operations are presented in a conversational format that allows the operator to enter data quickly and without the need to enter data in a g code format Each of the machining operations are described in detail see chapter 7 2 Canned Cycles on page 149 Use the scroll bars and buttons to navigate See Programming Sliders on page 14 for a full descrip
16. 0 2 O gt O O D Q N N known Field Diameter Ye O gt O O Q N N StartHgt ZDepth StepOver XCenter YCenter DepthCut FinStock SideStock 180 Code D Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle Use the plunge circular pocket cycle for carbide tooling when a multiple axis ramp in move is not possible The Z axis plunges single axis to programmed depths You must position the tool directly over the center of the pocket prior to the plunge circular pocket cycle block or use the X Y words Activate the tool prior to programming so the cutter diameter is Description Diameter of pocket in X and Y axes Required Z absolute starting height 0 1 or 2 mm above surface Executed in rapid Required Absolute depth of pocket Required The distance the tool steps over width of cut in the X and Y axes as It mills out the pocket Defaults to tool radius which is the max X coordinate of the pocket center point Defaults to current position Y coordinate of the pocket center point Defaults to current position The depth of each cut per pass Defaults to tool diameter Max is the full ZDepth in parameter Z less bottom finish stock A negative value will cause the finish pass to finish the side walls in steps down Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass This amount applies to the sides and bottom unless R SideStock is d
17. 101 151 111 2 CALCULATE NEW X LENGTH 102 152 111 2 CALCULATE NEW Y LENGTH X 101 MOVE AROUND SQUARE USING NEW SIDE LENGTHS Y 102 X 101 Y 102 END M99 The read only variables are set in Blocks N60 to N90 Then the sub program is called At Block N170 the first move is made along the X axis followed by a move along the Y axis At Blocks N190 and N200 the logical negative sign makes the axis move in the opposite direction The contents of the variables remain the same At Block N220 a loop which ends at Block N310 is set up The loop runs the number of times contained in variable 154 The first move in the loop is in the X and Y axes to the side of cut value in 153 In Block N240 111 decrements at each pass through the loop by the value of the side cut This value in turn is used to calculate a new length of cut for each side 408 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features User Macros G65 G66 G67 Use G66 when you want to use a modal macro sub program These groups of instructions can be special canned cycles made up by the user to simplify the programming of the particular part or master programs for similar part families programmed with variables rather than fixed dimensions Macros can contain automatic measuring sequences for sensors such as a probe for feedback to the 35001 Format Function G65 Pn Ln Non modal macro call Call macro n Execute macro at
18. 3 27pm al Im ta ve 0 0000 0 0000 lt 0 0000 Y 3 Drill Pocket Other G code 1 Introduction Machine function buttons Machine function buttons are always located on the right side of the ea ae al screen They remain constant and do not change regardless of the et __f_ current action the machine is performing They provide an easy way to perform supported machine functions The actual features available depend on the machine builder 8 Y Z Buttons 1 through 4 have a small marker in the lower right hand corner which indicates that more features or sub menus are available when this button is touched E Sub menus are dynamic and change according to the type of machine the 35001 is installed on Machine Menu Spindle Menu Tool Menu Draw Custom Cycle Menu NC Start same as the front panel NC Start key NC Stop same as the front panel NC Stop key Toggle on or off Optional Stop feature Toggle on or off Block Skip feature c n gt 2 O 2 gt N ON OO O11 PR WD ACU RITE 35001 11 Keyboard An on screen QWERTY keyboard will automatically pop up when you Program program un System shutdown 2 50pm 1 enter a field that requires text information input l M The 35001 touch screen keyboard becomes visible pop up when a text and numerical information is required for an action that is currently being taken E When the information has
19. G code Description The Spindle Functions enables M3 Spindle Forward M4 Spindle Reverse gt M5 Spindle Off gt M19 Spindle Orientation SPEED Spindle Speed Q I E O LL o q q gt Tool Change M code Description The Tool Change enables M6 Tool Select ACU RITE 35001 383 O I Sam O O pe A O O gt O lt Y q q 11 4 Advanced Programming SPEED This section covers S and M code formats The codes are included in the part program or activated in Manual Data Input Mode Code Function S Spindle Speed Commands spindle speeds S Format Sxxxxx Spindle speed is programmed via S Code The RPM range of the machine determines the S Code range In determining spindle speeds there also may be gear ranges selected by M Codes For example you may be able to select four ranges of speed by programming the corresponding M Code for the required range The machine tool builder specifies the range Check your machine tool manual for details M Functions Miscellaneous M Code Miscellaneous codes control a variety of machine tool functions The machine builder assigns them Be familiar with the M Codes available on your machine control combination M function avallability varies from one machine to another Refer to your machine tool manual for a complete list of M Codes M Code Function M3 or MO3 Spindle Forward M4 or M04 Spindle Reverse M5 or
20. Y e vor O C LL lt O c lt e O 0 N LO Program Details button ED rr Touch on the program Details button to display date EERTE SIE AN and size information The button is highlighted when activated TA Touch on the program Details button again to display the program ee name only and the button Is no longer highlighted m 3500iSlot Mark button ls 3500i TST Touch on the Mark program button to select multiple an programs in a folder The button is highlighted when selected l ls cam test W Chapter 6 Touch and hold the Mark program button to open the Mark Filter pop up dialogue Here multiple programs can be selected by entering part of the name of the desired programs ACU RITE 35001 93 Copy button i Touch the Copy program button to copy one or more 2D highlighted programs to the clip board Copy works on the current program or group of previously marked programs from the Mark program selection The number of programs that were selected is shown in the lower right corner of the button Touching the Copy program button now activates the Paste program and Move program buttons Touch and hold for two seconds on the Copy program button to empty the clip board The Paste program and Move program buttons will deactivate with this action To copy one program at a time using the Copy program button first deactivate the
21. YN 0 ban O K ed a eb O am LL E N itioning YN 0 ma A ed Sc eb O LL ve N Designation of the axes on milling machines The X Y and Z axes on your milling machine are also referred to as tool axis principal axis 1st axis and minor axis 2nd axis The assignment of the tool axis is decisive for the assignment of the principal and minor axes Tool axis Principal axis Minor axis X Y Z Y Z X Z X Y Polar coordinates If the production drawing is dimensioned in Cartesian coordinates you also write the part program using Cartesian coordinates For parts containing circular arcs or angles it is often simpler to give the dimensions in polar coordinates While the Cartesian coordinates X Y and Z are three dimensional and can describe points in space polar coordinates are two dimensional and describe points in a plane Polar coordinates have their datum at a circle center CC or pole A position in a plane can be clearly defined by the Polar Radius the distance from the circle center CC to the position and the Polar Angle the value of the angle between the reference axis and the line that connects the circle center CC with the position 28 10 02 2 Machining Fundamentals Setting the pole and the angle reference axis O The pole is set by entering two Cartesian coordinates in one of the three planes These coordinates als
22. e Tool Diameter Left G41 TOOL PATH PGM PATH 81 jad m N JT jad m N vr Intersecting Points You cannot program a plane change during tool compensation However a 2 axis move off the currently active plane is allowed For example The active plane compensation in XY You program an XZ or YZ move The Z axis reaches the programmed target as X Y reaches Its compensated target Helical moves in the active plane are also allowed Program cancel compensation G40 alone or with a move in the active plane The move must be in rapid or feedrate The move must be at least the tool radius in length The CNC looks ahead to following blocks in order to compensate correctly When it sees an upcoming cancel compensation block the CNC positions the tool perpendicular to the last move before the block The tool moves to a point perpendicular to the last move before the deactivation move Compensation Around Acute Angles During compensation the CNC finds the compensated intersection of moves and travels to that point On very sharp angles this is not always desirable For example if you compensate along the outside of a 15 degree corner angle the compensated intersection point is far away from the actual point on the work Time is wasted by cutting air until the compensated point is reached To save time the CNC creates an arc aro
23. updateTlo00rWork0ffsetZAxis select whether to update the values for the Tool Length Offset TLO or the Workpiece Offset WorkOffset N 2 O gt Q O O ES A Mm N Spindle Probe Calibration Cycle This is used to set the effective probe stylus diameter and set the 0 we tol compensation factor for any run out of the probe stylus pindle Probe Calibration You need to have already configured the spindle probe settings per the previous section E You also need to have the probe assigned to a Tool in the Tool Table with its Type set to Touch Probe and have It activate mounted via a Tool Call 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 p On machines that do not have spindle orientation or If you are using a corded probe or cordless UD probe and cannot 2 Are Cu X 0 10449 Y 048650 XCenter 9 05664 YCenter 0 02642 orient the spindle 180 degrees during calibration the Es E iia e XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 spindle probe stylus needs to be indicated true to the a5 Are Cu X 0 34924 Y 0 46468 XCenter 0 02764 YCenter 0 61493 spindle centerline Also before calibrating the probe with a wired type probe the center of spindle rotation must be indicated exactly over the probe gauge center In this case the accuracy of the spindle probe is only as good as the stylus concentricity to the spindle and the closeness to the probe gauge center Calibration must be done at le
24. 2A xii Fundamentals of Positioning Posiionencoders a a TETel CICS MaK S earra ida 26 PETET EN CS SUSTO tatiana 27 Reference system on milling MAachines coocccocccncncnncnnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnononononcncnnncnnnnnns 27 Designation of the axes on milling Machines ssrin EO 28 Polar OO NCH VU warsa eian cpa ato ees es teeth ayer tea a ce tdi 28 setting the pole and the angle reference axis micas tere ci n 29 Absolute and incremental polar COOrdINMAtesS ooccoccccccccncccncnncnnnnnncnononcnnnconononos 29 A OS Measurement o ti AA did 30 2 2 Absolute and incremental work piece POSITIONS ococccoccnccnccnccnncnnconcnononononcnnanononns 31 Absolute work piece 00 SIONS sidad 31 incremental work piece POSO Sa e 31 S SUNEK EN AIE EEPE caller E A AEE E E E EEE E E EE 32 FEE OTSE ass ieee a E E a a 32 Manual Machine Positioning Jog ModE MOVES A AA a 34 Changing the Jod Moden sii ibi 34 neremental MOVOS a dc da 34 EA O ee 34 AQUSUNO Me Escort aii ia 35 Ovemandg tine SUNS RPM asias 35 Manual Data Input S l 35001 Manual Data Input MDI A O A A T 38 Manta DATNE ceci e e ll elo add 38 Meantial Data INPUtMMOde SENO Scsi leads lat 39 Manual Data Input METIDA o bil 40 MEEMENU Rage WO ia 41 Manual DataInput Opera SS A as 42 MEME Bo A 44 POCKET Yala Example ai dai 45 e A 47 ESO A er a NS ice ON TAA aeRO EP RE OITC CR mE TRE TC CE SIO CRP ERT nT ORE 48 MDI Touchscreen Feature Dialogues ida 49 NOS S did id id 49
25. NOTE These variables are not valid during compensations such as tool radius scaling mirroring and rotation or while in transitional moves such as corner rounding and chamfering 1016 Current G motion mode O rapid 1 feed 2 cw arc 3 ccw arc b ellipse 6 spiral O Sen O O Sen A O O e gt 5 lt 1017 Current XYZ plane 17 XY 18 XZ 19 YZ 1020 Current tool diameter 1021 Current tool length offset 1022 Current feedrate 1023 Current rapidrate 1024 Current RPM 1030 Stock variable R VV 1031 Acute angle for rounding compensated intersections default 15 0 1032 of look ahead blocks for tool diameter compensation R VV 1041 Current program tool compensation 40 off 41 left 42 right 1050 to 1057 Actual absolute position X Y Z U V VV NOTE These variables are not valid during compensations such as tool radius scaling mirroring and rotation or while in transitional moves such as corner rounding and chamfering 1070 Current XYZ dimension 70 inch 71 mm 1071 Current UVW dimension 70 inch 71 mm 1090 Current XYZ dimension 90 abs 91 incr 1091 Current UVW dimension 90 abs 91 incr ACU RITE 35001 397 O Sen O Q S A O O gt lt Y User Variables Certain variables are set aside for the programmer to use These may be useful when programming macros You can read from or write to thes
26. YRef B Select Yes to return the Y Axis to its respective Absolute Zero Reference point ZRef C Select Yes to return the Z Axis to its respective Absolute Zero Reference point X X The X Axis coordinate at which to Rapid to before moving at a feedrate to the Absolute Zero Reference point Y T The Y Axis coordinate at which to Rapid to before moving at a feedrate to the Absolute Zero Reference point FA Z The Z Axis coordinate at which to Rapid to before moving at a feedrate to the Absolute Zero Reference point ACU RITE 35001 137 Basic Cycles ining o gt Lu q N Basic Cycles ining o gt Lu q N Fixture Offset Work Coordinate System Select Use the work coordinate system commonly known as fixture offsets to shift Absolute Zero to a preset dimension Fixture Offset dimensions are referenced to Machine Zero Fixture Offset cancels Mirroring Axis Rotation and Scaling To activate the Fixture Offset Table from Manual Data Input Mode ace Select the More Milling button and then Offset from the pop up menu Conversational format Offset G code format G53 138 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Unit Inch MM Use the Unit block to specify and activate the desired unit of measurement in a program The active Unit is modal and remains active until overridden Basic Cycles gt Select the More Milling button and then Unit from the pop up m
27. and R have been added to enable the programmer operator to override the values in the machine setup parameters for the specific tool being checked or set A Large tools can result in probe damage if the feedrate is You must Load the tool in the spindle and call up that tools offset Know the distance from the top of the probe stylus down you have to move so that the largest part of the tool diameter is even with the side of the probe stylus for diameter measurement That value is placed in E if different from the default 0 1 2 54 mm Position the tool over the probe stylus so that the tooth that sticks down the furthest is directly over the center of the probe stylus and above the stylus less than 0 200 5 08 mm To measure the tool diameter Jog the tool to the top of the probe stylus so that the tooth that sticks down the furthest is directly over the center of the probe stylus 214 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs From the Manual Data Inout Mode with G code MDI selected and the spindle off input G153 Tn Dn En and touch the NC Start button Where T is the tool number D is roughly the diameter of the special tool this should be larger but not more than 0 100 2 54 mm larger and E is the Z axis move down needed if different then the default 0 100 2 54mm so that the largest part of the tool diameter comes in contact with the edge of the probe stylus For example G153 T3 D3 5 E 25 and touch the N
28. xxii FROCK GH OV aaa a o ib 303 PACA E T 303 SCUDO eene R A ee ere Oe ag 303 POCKET FINS MOVO OS iaai aee ler 305 POTON a e ti ae 305 EO E E AEI EEE EA A AEE EE T A Pe nee E EET A EE 305 Adamda Machining olde at died 306 EEN O E EE E EATE E E A E AA 307 BSI Ul A e n A A 307 AO A de o a 308 CONCH te ioa cadeearneasaes 308 AE A Geld bus represen oreo ea nna 308 Adding a Program DISC HV ES caida did 308 Modityna Tocata ati aan 309 Moadaming ToolS BUON ater incr hatte cutesy ts arc nant cease 309 iS A 310 MP O 310 CAM MOOC AA A A 311 CAM IMOO BUTTONS stent 311 CAM SEUD cian ao TR e sa Ends 313 So elos o araea aa EA E a 313 OU dd dan o 313 EIS TO AD ses wena caster ean pl E oo E A E EREET 314 TOO Va DIS TaD aaa A banded 314 VIEN BURON estren anne a O ENEI 315 TS ON N sect tet acest eae hg saat acer tee aad eet asscoe macnn entpeceionsmnancett 316 Doll e o A A 316 COMPETING the GOOMIS IY uni id ibas 317 Finalizing the EMS IV tia 319 Oe AIMED S Do od tesa ates 320 DAR 0 A a eames 321 DA EGGS SUPPORT iia 321 DXF ER TES NOS UP lod 321 WTOC TING te IIE FIE nona tcs 321 MOI TOOS ca aio 322 Comer Radius AnS Ering sia dadas 322 Ehamter IAS STING cet aaa 322 TAMOS MOON Uat da dt iia 323 Delete DNOM an me am E T E A A A E A OAA 323 Propero S DUTON uerit A aa a 323 o an Se nt POO Meee Eee Ser Toe re 324 CODVING ar SES eari Ea A AE 324 WIG WINONA Nap E ena ii 324 CANA og Gs aoa ean ten eet hah eee E whee 325 SCANIO TNS LOO
29. 0 125 in to the right of XO so that the tool enters the work smoothly 4 AX THD SET Shortest Distance TO on G90 G70 GO M5 G28 ZO G53 01 GO X0 YO UO T1 SPECIAL THD TOOLS3500 S3500 M3 GO X 125 YO UO ZA G1 Z 075 F20 SET Shortest Distance TO on THIS IS TO PREVENT THE NEED TO UNWIND U U AXIS MOVE IS 360 X 8 PITCH X 6 LONG 360 FOR 1 TURN X 125 LEAD IN U MOVE WILL BE 17 640 00 DEGREES OR 49 TURNS G91 G1 X 6 125 U 360 8 6 360 G90 GO M5 G28 ZO XO YO UO M2 436 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Software Update Sem S N Y d YN gt Y O C E N 12 1 Updating System Software Software Update HEIDENHAIN Corporation recommends making a backup of the control with the included USB Recovery Drive 684138 xx before updating the NC software Please refer to the manual included with the drive for the backup procedure Use a blank USB memory stick 512 MB or larger to update the software Do not use any memory stick with a smaller storage capacity The setup zip file is required for updating the software The file will automatically be recognized by the installation program of the control and must be contained in the root directory of the USB memory stick Procedure for updating the software With the control software running insert the USB memory stick containing the setup zip file Ensure that you are
30. 18 01 19 G41 28 GO X4 7762 Y 3 5199 21 G1 X2 7683 Y 1 1099 22 G3 X1 8482 Y 2 7384 R 1 0000 23 G2 X3 4758 Y 4 1951 R2 0000 24 G3 X4 7762 Y 3 5199 R 0 7500 363 O y Lu os O O Ae a V O O hr O ME q q O LL La O O A Q 5 Q z O Preview Features The Edit Preview feature provides a graphic representation of a part edge and or tool path as the part program is being written Edited or inserted blocks can be viewed automatically as changes are made to the program Side Bar Menu The Side Bar menu contains buttons to change the graphics view characteristics Refer to Preview Side Bar Menu on page 116 where these buttons are described in detail In addition to the Rotate button described below the 3D model can also be rotated by holding the mouse button and dragging the cursor in the preview window In addition to the Zoom button described below when using a mouse to zoom in or out in the preview window place the cursor over the area to be viewed and rotate the wheel on the mouse Edit Features Menu Preview Features rr Zoom A Rotate SAA AAA Reset Rotate MENAJE Reset Pan Grid 364 On screen preview buttons are available in the Preview Features menu From the Edit screen touch the Preview Features button To zoom In or out touch the zoom button The Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons are no
31. 288 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit 9 Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Flat Bottom Boring Cycle This boring cycle generally used to program a pass In each direction O sc a Data Progran tun E MEA a tol with a dwell at the bottom The tool feeds from the R plane to Z a a a depth dwells for specified time then feeds to the retract P ath MTL dimension Field Code Description ZDepth Z Absolute hole depth Required Dwell D Dwell time in seconds Required TC 00100 Y 0 02650 StartHgt R Initial Z start point in rapid Required 67250 Y 0 16050 XCenter 0 0550 YCenter 0 03106 P 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 Y O gt O O Y O N N 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 Return Hat Z return point after hole depth In rapid 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 Feed F Feedrate M Delet Drill Pocket Oth Edit Previ ZR ore ete al ocke er i review i a Abs Inc Milling Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features Exit G code format G89 ACU RITE 35001 155 Ye O gt O O
32. Different view buttons are available for the Draw screen Touching the View Type button activates the sub menu of view options These view options are described in the previous chapter Refer to Chapter 8 View Options Menu on page 258 To adjust the drawing view touch the Adjust View button This activates the sub menu for view adjustment for the Draw screen These buttons are described fully in the previous chapter In the Real Time Draw Mode the 3500 displays the machine moves in the viewing area as It runs the program in Auto or Single Step Mode When you select Draw from the Program Manager Draw Simulation Mode is activated The 35001 draws the part without machine movement When you start Draw from Auto or S Step Modes Real Time Draw Mode is activated The 35001 draws the part while it Is machining it 270 178 Arc Cw 171 Arc Cw 172 Arc Cw 173 Arc Cw 174 Rapid 175 EndSub 176 177 Sub 11 178 Rapid 179 Line 188 Line 181 Line 182 Line X 0 21000 Y 0 30350 XCe y X 0 21600 Y 0 29350 X X 0 42700 Y 0 09950 XC X 0 39800 Y 0 19150 XCe Z 1 00000 k Liezi a 2200 Y 0 12350 3800 Y 0 09650 1000 Y 0 09650 anann o X 0 1 Z 1 0 X 0 15400 Y 0 12350 X 0 2 X 0 2 Block Search Counter 9 Running a Program on the Machine Program Status Area The following table provides a description of the various display fields for the Program Status area shown while running a p
33. FINISH FEEDRATE 1020 TOOL DIAMETER SAVEG90 99 SET STRING SAVEG90 TO VAR 99 SAVEGOO 98 SET STRING SAVEGOO TO VAR 98 SAVEFRT 97 SET STRING SAVEFRT TO VAR 97 TDIA 96 SET STRING TDIA TO VAR 96 EPSI 00001 SET STRING EPSI TO 00001 SAVEG90 1090 SAVE CURRENT DIM MODE ABS 90 INCR 91 418 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features SAVEGOO 1016 SAVE CURRENT MOVE MODE RAPID 0 FEED 1 SAVEFRT 1022 SAVE CURRENT FEEDRATE TDIA ABS 1020 SAVE CURRENT ABSOLUTE TOOL DIA IF IVAR 7 THEN PRINT ERROR HOLE DIA NOT GIVEN M30 ENDIF IF I VAR 5 THEN 5 1022 ENDIF DEFAULT ROUGH FEEDRATE IFIVAR 6 THEN 6 5 ENDIF DEFAULT FINISH FEEDRATE IFIVAR 19 THEN 19 0 ENDIF DEFAULT NO FINISH STOCK IF ABS 7 2 lt ABS 19 THEN PRINT ERROR TOOL DIA TOO BIG M30 ENDIF 33 ABS 7 2 ABS 19 TDIA 2 ROUGHING PASS RADIUS IF 33 lt 0 33 0 THEN PRINT ERROR ROUGH AMOUNT TOO BIG M30 ENDIF IF 1041 gt 40 EPSI THEN CHECK IF TOOL COMP IS ON PRINT ERROR TOOL COMP NOT ALLOWED M30 ENDIF IF TDIA lt EPS THEN PRINT WARNING TOOL DIA 0 Moo DWELL UNTIL START KEY ENDIF ACU RITE 35001 419 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q O I Sam O O pe A O O gt O lt Y q q 34 33 2 INTERMEDIATE RADIUS 35 ABS 7 2 TDIA 2 FINISH PASS R
34. H used as a safety clearance Z position before making X Y moves Executed in rapid at start and end of cycle Defaults to current Z position at beginning of cycle Number of tool used for previous roughing cycle Yes Roughing pass is skipped only finish pass is performed No Roughing pass is performed Default Yes Finish pass is skipped only rough pass is performed No Finish pass is performed Default Select Cw or Cow 181 0 2 O gt O O D Q N N Ye O gt O O Q N N Frame Pocket Cycle Use the frame pocket cycle to mill a frame or trough around an island of material You must position the tool directly over the center of the island or use the X Y words Activate the tool prior to programming so the cutter diameter is known Field Length Width StartHgt ZDepth Frame Width StepOver XCenter YCenter InsideRad Outside Rad DepthCut 182 Code M W Description Length of island in X axis Required Width of island in Y axis Required Z absolute starting height 0 1 or 2 mm above surface Executed in rapid Required Absolute depth of frame pocket Required Width of removed trough or frame Required The distance the tool steps over width of cut in the X and Y axes as It mills out the pocket Defaults to tool radius which is the max X coordinate of the island center point Defaults to
35. Milling Feature Buttons 106 More Milling Button 107 Other Cycles Button 110 Pocket Cycles Button 109 Program Display Relation 118 Program Edit Preview 116 Text Editing 115 Creating a New Part Program 97 D Datum setting 32 Diameter Offset in Tool Table 74 Draw Simulation Mode 257 Starting 257 View soft keys 258 Viewing Programs 256 Drawing View 261 E Electronic Edge Finder 24 Emergency Stop E STOP 4 Engraving Engrave Cycle 195 Programming 195 Entering Tool Length Offsets 73 F Feedrate Adjusting 35 Fixture Offsets 32 Four Axis Programming Four Axis Programming 432 Linear 432 Rotary 432 Rotary Axis Programming 433 Fundamentals of Positioning 26 G G code Listing 366 G code MDI 48 H Hard Keys AXIS IV Axis Jog v 274 Data Entry iv Navigation v Numerical iv Power control iv Visual display unit Iv History 47 l Incremental work piece positions 31 J Jog Continuous Moves 34 Incremental Moves 34 Mode 34 Moves 34 443 Index Index K Key Board Popup iv Keyboard Equivalents vi M Manual Data Inout screen Absolute 39 Active tool 39 Inch or MM 39 Incremental 39 Rapid or Feed 39 tool diameter compensation 39 tool length offsets 39 Manual Data Input Cycles 44 Manual Data Inout Menu Bar 40 Manual Data Input Operations 42 Manual Data Input Screen 38 Manual Machine Positioning 34 M Code List 370 MDI Basic Modals 54 Feed and Speed 55 Move to Target 51 Offset 53 Program Preset 50 Te
36. Mount the fourth axis as described above Mount a part 6 wide and 8 long on the face of the rotary table Shortest Distance is set to off Drill 10 ten 0 375 holes 36 apart 1 deep 0 75 in from the end of the cylinder Then starting at X 2 UO drill a spiral series of holes 36 and X 0 500 apart each Set XO at the right end YO at the cylinder s center line UO at a pre milled keyway on the cylinder Measure tool offsets from the top of the cylinder with Y axis at O A AX DRL SET Shortest Distance to off G90 G70 GO M5 G28 ZO G53 01 GO X0 YO UO T1 3 CENTERDRILL M3 2400 G81 Z 22 R 1 F12 M98 P1 12 3 8 DRILL M3 1850 G53 01 RE ACTIVATE OFFSET CANCELED IN SUBR 1 G87 Z 1 R 1 F14 1 18 J 012 K 1 U 3334 M98 P1 M2 01 ROTARY HOLE LOCATIONS GO G90 X 75 YO UO LOOP 9 GO G91 U36 END GO G90 X 2 UO LOOP 9 GO G91 X 5 U 36 END G80 M5 GO G90 G28 Z0 CANCELS G53 OFFSET XO YO UO M99 434 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Example 2 Mill Mount the fourth axis as described above Mount a part 3 in diameter and 5 long on the face of the rotary table The part has a 0 25 radius turned on the end Shortest Distance is set to off Assume that a series of six 0 25 wide grooves must be milled 60 apart 0 25 deep at the start tapering up to 0 125 deep and rotating 15 at the far end The groove must follow the end contour of the part radius
37. Pocket Cycles Rectangular Circular Frame Ring Draft Angle Plunge Rectangular Plunge Circular Slot Circular Slot Irregular Bottom Finish Side Finish Islands When a Pocket cycle has been selected the Conversational Data 0 Input display provides a help screen graphic with each data input sim dialogue This display shown is typical for Rectangular data input Touch the name of the data to be input The dialogue menu showing the necessary fields that require data will be displayed gt ios ar ACU RITE 35001 Manual Data System EF ikai ec pal 1 Basic template conversational 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Plane XY 5 BlockForm XMax 1 YMax 1 ZMax 0 0000 XMin 1 YMin 1 ZMin 1 6 Tool 1 MCode 6 7 Offset Fixture 1 8 RPM 1000 109 6 1 Conversational Programming Other Cycles Button aioe Select the Other Cycles button to display additional milling features in the pop up menu Other Cycles Face Hole Rect Profile Circ Profile Linear Engraving Arc Engraving Mill Cycle EndMill Cycle RMS Loop Tool Probing Spindle Probing Tool Probing Menu includes Length Diameter Length Special Diameter Special Break Vear and Probe Calibration 6 1 Conversational Programming Spindle Probing Menu includes Edge Find Corner Out Corner In In Out Boss In Out Web Probe Move Skew Compensation and Probe Calibration When Other cycles has been selected the Conversational Data Input iio tol displ
38. Preview 93 Screen 88 Utility Function Buttons 90 Program Management Screen 21 Program Management Side Bar 90 R Running programs Automatic Mode 22 266 Running programs 266 Single Step Mode 22 266 Using Draw 270 S Screen layout 10 Screen Navigation 6 Servos Activating Resetting 4 Shut Down CNC 4 Simulation Tool and Offset Tables 71 Spindle Probe Boss 227 Edge Finding 222 Inside Corner Finding 225 Outside Corner Finding 223 Skew Error Find 232 Web Finding 229 Subprogram Tool Probe Calibration 201 Subprograms 236 T T Codes and Tool Activation 72 Tool Arc Tangent Entry 79 Compensation Path 81 Editing the table 62 Find 65 Fixture Offsets 84 length difference 61 Length Offsets 73 Life Management 84 Line Arc Tangent Entry 79 Line Tangent Entry 78 Lock or Unlock 85 Perpendicular Entry 78 Radius Compensation 75 Radius compensation Outside inside corners 77 Ramping 78 Replacement RT 85 Second Menu Bar 63 Table 61 Table Menu Bar 62 Table Structure 67 Tool Compensation 60 Tool numbers names 61 Tool Top Table Tool Management 60 Menu Bar 10 Touch Screen Feature 49 U Updating System Software 438 Procedure 438 ACU RITE 35001 445 Index X pu j 446 HEIDENHAIN CORPORATION 333 East State Parkway Schaumburg IL 60173 5337 USA 1 847 490 1191 1 847 490 3931 E Mail info heidenhain com www heidenhain com 770530 26 Ver 00 7 2014
39. Program Edit Preview The Edit Preview feature provides a graphic representation of a part edge and or tool path as the part program is being written Edited or inserted blocks can be viewed automatically as changes are made to the program Preview Side Bar Menu In the Edit screen the Preview button is available on the side bar This is a toggle key that when activated opens the preview screen Also other available types of preview buttons become active Each button provides a different type of preview that allows the programmer to preview the tool paths that are best suited for the action being taken Function Preview toggles the preview screen on or off Preview 2D Top Plane Solid View is a two dimensional 2D top plane view of a solid block form model 3D Solid View is a three dimensional 3D view of a solid block form model Touch drag preview to change angle of view 3D Wire Frame View is a three dimensional 3D view shown as a wire frame and displays the tool path Touch drag preview to change angle of view 2D Wire Frame Top View is a top two dimensional 2D top plane view shown as a wire frame and displays the tool path Program Contour View enables disables display of programmed contours Available with 2D and 3D wire frame buttons Contour View with Line Numbers enables disables visibility of program line numbers Available with 2D and 3D wire frame buttons Ruler will toggle on or off r
40. Q O O Sam A N YN Q gt O O O pe A mM N Field OvrSlw Feed OvrRPM 218 Code Description S This is the override for the slow feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow This is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original feedrate Optional R This is the override for the RPM that was set in the machine setup parameter calilbAndToolMeasurementRPM This is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original RPM Optional Large tools can result in probe damage If the feedrate is set too fast For this reason the cycle parameters M S and R have been added to enable the programmer operator to override the values in the machine setup parameters for the specific tool being checked or set Running this cycle without first initially setting the length and diameter offset could result in damage to the probe and or the machine tool G150 Calibration and G151 Automatic Tool Length and Diameter set or G152 Manual Tool Length Measure for Special Tools and G153 Manual Tool Diameter Measure for Special Tools must be run first before using the G154 cycle 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs The G154 cycle loads the tool checks and u
41. SkipFinish Direction Code Q G code format G78 ACU RITE 35001 Description Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass on the sides only This amount overrides the value in S FinStock A value of zero can force stock to be left only on the bottom Default is equal to S FinStock The feedrate at which the tool will amp into the pocket in all three axes Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during roughing passes Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during finish passes Default is last programmed feedrate Z axis absolute start and finish height must be equal to or above H used as a safety clearance Z position before making X Y moves Executed in rapid at start and end of cycle Defaults to current Z position at beginning of cycle Number of tool used for previous roughing cycle Yes Roughing pass is skipped only finish pass is performed No Roughing pass is performed Default Yes Finish pass is skipped only rough pass is performed No Finish pass is performed Default Select Cw or Cow 175 0 2 O gt O O D Q N N Circular Pocket Cycle Use the circular pocket cycle to mill round pockets You must 0ra sun 0 af EEN Se Le position the tool directly over the center of the pocket prior to the block or use the X Y data eos Activate the tool prior to programming the pocket cycle so the E cutter diame
42. Start Y field input 0 0 Radius field input 1 0 Select either the Use or Enter buttons The geometry of a 1 00 circle located at X 0 0 and Y 0 0 and the geometry of a 2 00 circle located at X 2 0 and Y 0 0 have now been created Note When prompted for a point to define a location for geometry a new point can be defined by entering the X and Y coordinates or an existing point can be selected To select an existing point use point selection Completing the Geometry With these two basic shapes adding additional Geometry will allow the completed shape to be used as a milling path pocket or block as examples The Line Tool button will be selected next in this example to complete the Geometry Selection example Select the Line button from the Geometry Tools in the Pa main Toolbar c Select the Line Tangent between two circles button k from the side Toolbar The Prompt Vertical button bar will ask that circle 1 be selected Select the 1 0 circle The Prompt bar will ask for the second circle select the 2 0 circle ACU RITE 35001 317 O ve O O Sa A lt O E In many cases when creating geometry there is more than one solution When multiple solutions are available all geometry solutions appear The Prompt Menu bar will ask that only the lines to be kept should now be selected Select the top and bottom tangent lines O
43. The island must always be programmed before the corresponding pocket Also note that the island must specify the machining In this case since the island profile is defined in a clockwise orientation the machining side is to the left see block 22 Block 15 is a 4x5 rectangular pocket with center at 0 0 This is the rendering of the program after being ran in Draw The top view is the line draw and the bottom view Is the 3D solid model Approximate machining time is 14 minutes 242 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Pocket Island example 2 This example shows a circular pocket with an Island in the center The island is in the form of a circle The cutting tool is a 1 4 diameter end mill 10 ons oO A qn oe NN NN NN NN A pa pd pl op pd po pl SS OMAN hADcoco onb waune Basic template conversational Example 2 shows a circular pocket with an island in the middle the island is in the form of a diamond The initial roughing tool has a 1 4 inch diameter Dim Abs Unit Inch Plane XY BlockForm XMax 3 YMax 3 ZMax 0 0000 XMin 3 YMin 3 ZMin 1 Tool 1 Diameter 25 Length 2 MCode 6 RPH 1000 MCode 3 MCode 8 aaa ENTER NEW PROGRAM CODE HERE Islands FirstIsl 1 CircPock Diameter 4 StartHgt 1 ZDepth 5 XCenter 0 YCenter 0 RoughFeed 20 MCode 9 End ain Sub 1 teeter ENTER OPTIONAL SUB PROGRAM HERE Dim Abs ToolComp Left ACU RITE 35001 243 YN i O
44. When A eee ix Simple setup for easy testing 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L 1 6 7 Call sub program s 8 Call 1 9 Call 2 18 Call 3 11 Call 4 12 Call 5 13 Call 6 14 Call 7 15 Call 8 16 Call 9 17 Call 10 selected from the preview area the cursor defaults to its program line in the editing area 18 Call 11 19 Call 12 28 Call 13 21 EndMain 22 23 Sub program definition s 24 ECT gt bapa More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Yv 2890 LE O E e O hom 0 7 C 9 oa Y b gt Q t co 118 6 Conversational Editing Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Basic Cycles ining o gt LLI q N 7 1 Explaining Basic Cycles Round Chamfer Corner Rounding Corner rounding permits the operator to blend the intersection of consecutive moves To activate corner rounding the operator keys a radius value positive into the CornerRad field of the first move When the program runs It blends the endpoint of the first move with the starting point of the second The blend starts where the radius is tangent to the first move and extends to where the radius is tangent to the second You can use corner rounding at the intersection of non tangent line line line arc arc line and arc arc moves provided a blend radius or chamfer is possible You cannot blend radii at th
45. You should not require this instruction in a user macro It is intended for use in conjunction with the block skip symbol Y as shown in the example When block skip is ON Block N698 is not executed When block skip is OFF Block N698 Is executed and program execution jumps to the block specified block number with the character N When you program GOTO statements do not precede the For example GOTO 610 skips to block number N610 Short Form Addressing The appropriate abbreviation instructs the 35001 to activate the corresponding command Command Abbreviation DO JD END JE GOTO JG IF JI LOOP IL PRINT JP THEN JT WHILE IW 426 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Logical and Comparative Terms LOGICAL TERMS All logical operations can be carried out using the following command characters or combinations of characters Statement Symbol True false Table OR 0 0 False 0 1 True 1 0 True 1 1 True EXCLUSIVE A 0 0 False OR 0 1 True 1 0 True 1 1 False AND amp 0 0 False 0 1 False 1 0 False True COMPARATIVE TERMS You can compare variables with variables and variables with constants using equality and inequality operators N740 IF 130 360 THEN or GOTO N740 IF 120 125 THEN or GOTO Block N700 compares the contents of variable 120 with the contents of variable 125 If the contents are equal then the expression is true and THEN or GOTO directs the program Otherwise
46. and rapids directly over the center of the probe stylus The Z axis rapids down the distance placed in the ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome machine setup parameter then starts feeding down toward the probe for the initial touch at the feedrate that was placed in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast machine setup parameter then backs up The machine rapids over half the diameter of the cutter from the probe stylus center in the direction related to the probeOrientation machine setup parameter The spindle then comes on in reverse at the RPM specified in the calloAndloolMeasurementRPM machine setup parameter and retouches the probe twice once at the feedrate that is in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium machine setup parameter and again at the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium machine setup parameter and again at the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow machine setup parameter The tool length register for that tool is now updated and any value in the length wear register is reset to zero Then the Z axis rapids up to the home position If you have done a single tool in Manual that tool is now measured and you are ready to measure the next tool If you have placed multiple lines in a program one for each tool the machine then grabs the next tool and repeats steps 1 through 6 until all the tools have been measured N 2 O gt O O O S A M N 208 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Format
47. away from the outside of the corner you wish to find in X amp Y If H 1 the Z axis should be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part otherwise the Z axis should be at the side picking depth Type G142 On Wr If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated for every corner you wish to find or whose position you want to reestablish When positioning the probe from within the program you should always use the G146 Protected Probe Positioning cycle see G146 instructions later in this document or use the I J or K cycle parameters for the same purpose Execute the line in Manual Data Input Mode by touching NC Start 224 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Inside Corner Finding Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work probe The tool offset and work coordinate must be active before using this cycle in a program See Section 4 Tool Length Offsets on page 73 The Inside Corner Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or from the Manual Data Input Mode Field Code Description Search Q Quadrant of corner to find Quad O upper right 1 upper left 2 lower left 3 lower right Required Top H If set to 1 the cycle finds the top of the part before finding the X Y corner coordinate Default is O If H is not set or is set to O the Z axis must be at the pickin
48. o e It is recommended to copy programs from the USB device to the CNC and use the program from the CNC 96 5 Program Management 5 3 Creating Editing amp Selecting to Run Creating a New Part Program Touch the New Program button in the Program Manual Data a ui om om Manager to create a new program Sey Ey E gt Av user 34 a The New Program dialogue opens 135001 M 35001 ls 3500iSlot li 3500iSlot ew Program s 3500iTS Conversational G Code ISO cam tes Cancel mw I an MOE LL TT T 000 AA gt Gnn characters The CNC displays program names as they were entered No two programs can have the same name A A name cannot be longer than 60 alphanumeric Select Conversational or G code ISO depending on the type of program desired Enter the name of the new program in the Program Name field The program extension will automatically be added to the program nae depending on the type selected above DOTENOOOET Press the Enter key The new program has now been added to the program list DG 8 G_Pockets l gSample Bee llhinae plate 1 slinclude Editing an Existing Part Program To enter data into the new program highlight the program name Oc esc A and touch on the Edit button a Ss Ls 22am JGA e am ad O ad O 2 0 Y e O y LL O q de Q LO Touch the existing program to be
49. se oe EZE Ye O gt O O Q N N Field Code Description Firstlsl A First island Required Secondlsl B Second island Thirdlsl C Third Island Fourthlsl D Fourth island Fifthlsl E Fifth island G code format G162 192 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Bottom Finish Use Bottom Finish to remove bottom stock left by a previously O ue lio fol programmed pocket cycle me s _Q__ _ Bottom Finish must be programmed immediately after a compatible pocket cycle that has left bottom stock All of the bottom stock is removed in one pass Islands G162 definitions apply to this cycle and will be avoided if active Islands need to be re defined after the pocket cycle before the Bottom Finish call N O gt O O Q N N Field Code Description NE a a 205 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 RampFeed _ The feedrate at which the tool will ramp 27 Arc Ow X 0 07250 Y 6 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 into the pocket in all three axes Default is miine x170 Y a o Se Yeentor 9 009 last programmed feedrate obit are Ccu X 0 06280 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 FinFeed K Feedrate used during finish passes Default is last programmed feedrate Direction O Select Cw or Cow G code format G133 ACU RITE 35001 193 Side Finish Use Side Finish to remove side stock left by a previously Shin al programmed pocket cycle is Side Finish must be
50. the current mode Clear History clears current history deletes manual data input In standard MDI the block history is deleted and in G code MDI the G code editor contents are deleted Block History list block history and allows blocks to be edited Teach opens the pop up dialogue to create a new program or open an existing program for teach purposes Remote Diagnose submits a service request using the Remote Diagnostics feature Touch to return to default screen ACU RITE 35001 1 RectPock StartHgt 0 1000 Length 9 0000 Width 6 0000 ZDepth 2 0000 e oa eaa aa A ee nt i AA 0 0000 s F x x We Z Save Clear Block Teach Remote History History History Diagnose 41 m lt ad A o e we mM Manual Data Input Operations The following explains a few of the machining operations that are available with Manual Data Input Examples have been provided to explain an overview to the operator of the 35001 s capabilities The Drill Cycles Pocket Cycles and Other Cycles buttons access sub menus of different types of cycles that are available in each of these categories A cycle or operation is ran by pressing Use While running a graphic representation can be seen by touching the Draw button The Manual button can be touched at anytime to cancel an operation Mill Arc manual data input Shutdown 1 41pn al From the bottom menu ba
51. 0 406 Y 0 919 00 00 03 islands on the outside yy 19 x EE a F The Machining Side tool enables this feature to be added anytime after the shape has been created To add the machining side to a shape Select the Machining Side tool Select a shape to add 7 a machining side O Sen O O u A lt O a The Prompt bar will ask which shape to add the machining side to Manual Data AE syst i sal i sea ee Program Run ain Uni Shutdown to l Layer DefaultLayer X 0000 000 Y 0000 000 00 00 00 The Machining Side indicator is added to the selected EE BD shape on the side to be machined To flip the machining side touch the center of the indicator 306 10 CAM Programming Engraving Cycle The Engraving Cycle provides a quick and easy way to engrave part numbers legends or any alpha numeric inscription Engraving does not require the use of shapes or geometry There are two types of engraving patterns Linear and Circular Certain parameters apply only to specific cycles These parameters appear as needed The usual type of cutter is a sharp point or center drill tyoe tool Options are given for engraving on an angle and mirror is supported for engraving molds When executed the CNC rapids to the X Start Y Start then to the Start Height It then feeds to the Z Depth and begins cutting the Text specified Basic tab Type Choose Linear or Circular engraving T
52. 1 4 inch radius will be used for further roughing 6 Dim Abs 7 Unit Inch 8 Plane XY BlockForm XMax 12 YMax 7 ZMax 0 0000 XMin 0 YMin 5 ZMin 1 Tool 1 Diameter 1 Length 2 UpdTable MCode 6 RPH 1000 MCode 3 MCode 8 tected ENTER NEW PROGRAM CODE HERE Islands FirstIsl 2 SecondIsl 3 ThirdIsl 4 Pocket Sub 1 StartHgt 1 ZDepth 5 RoughFeed 20 FinStock 1 SkipFinish Yes Tool 2 Diameter 25 Length 2 MCode 6 Islands FirstIsl 2 SecondIsl 3 ThirdIsl 4 Pocket Sub 1 StartHgt 1 ZDepth 5 RoughFeed 20 FinStock 1 SkipFinish Yes CoarseTool 1 Tool 3 Diameter 25 Length 2 MCode 6 Islands FirstIsl 2 SecondIsl 3 ThirdIsl 4 SideFinish StartHgt 1 ZDepth 5 Islands FirstIsl 2 SecondIsl 3 ThirdIsl 4 BottomFin EndMain NN DN RS RS PB RS PB N pp eS eS eS eS eS eS pudo pudo pu sa mm aune 00 con a whe eS 0 ACU RITE 35001 251 YN i O O a Y N YN i O O T Q Y N 28 29 38 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 48 41 42 43 44 45 46 Af 48 49 58 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 68 61 62 252 Sub 1 datada ENTER OPTIONAL SUB PROGRAM HERE Dim Abs Rapid X6 0478 Y 2 4348 ToolComp Left Arc CCW X9 7321 Y 1 0000 Radius 2 0000 Arc CW X9 7321 Y3 0000 Radius 4 0000 Arc CCW X7 4286 Y5 9166 Radius 2 0000 Arc CW X4 5714 Y5 9166 Radius 5 0000 Arc CCW X2 8478 Y2 3652 Radius 2 0000 Arc CW X6 0478 Y 2 4348 Radius 8 0000 EndSub Shape 2 subprogram
53. 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 208 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit 9 Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Drill Pattern Cycle Do not program RMS with the drill pattern cycle Use the automatic hole pattern cycle to program partial or full pattern hole grids You can use this for a corner pattern when holes are required only on four corners It calculates the hole locations from the entered variables You can also rotate the pattern around the starting hole location A drill cycle must be programmed prior to this You must cancel the cycle after the pattern is completed You can use A and D or U and V but not both combinations Positive and negative values are allowed in all variable words except B and E Field XHoles YHoles Type XStart YStart XIncr YIncr Angle X Length Y Width G code format G179 Code B E ACU RITE 35001 Description Number of holes in X axis Required Number of holes in Y axis Required Select Pattern for a drilled hole pattern or select Square for a perimeter drilled hole pattern Absolute X position of start hole Required Absolu
54. 2 UpdTable MCode 6 RPM 1000 MCode 3 MCode 8 akooko ENTER NEW PROGRAM CODE HERE Islands FirstIsl 1 RectPock Length 4 Width 5 StartHgt 1 ZDepth 5 XCenter 0 YCenter 0 CornerRad 75 RoughFeed 20 FinStock 1 SkipFinish Yes Tool 2 Diameter 25 Length 2 MCode 6 Islands FirstIsl 1 N3 Rp op pd pd pd plo pd po pl D 00 30 une Tool 3 Diameter 25 Length 2 MCode 6 Islands FirstIsl 1 SideFinish StartHgt 1 ZDepth 5 Islands FirstIsl 1 BottomFin EndMain Sub 1 AOS ENTER OPTIONAL SUB PROGRAM HERE Dim Abs oo MD N N RM MN RM MH NM Mm See on oon ON a vv Db csc m Qa gt lt 0 ToolComp Left ao ow 40 A A NA Aa a Ne a ll al il tees J H H H H aos sa d Ss oe O gt lt oO Oo OO hH e lt lt lt lt O WN ACU RITE 35001 RectPock Length 4 Width 5 StartHgt 1 ZDepth 5 XCenter 0 YCenter O CornerRad 75 RoughFeed 20 FinStock 1 SkipFinish Yes CoarseTool 1 249 YN i O O a Q Y N Blocks 1 through 5 are comments Blocks 6 through 8 define common defaults Block 9 defines the blockform or stock size This is only needed for the 3D solid The stock defined is 6x6 with center at 0 0 Block 10 defines the initial roughing tool which has a 1 diameter tool table or be saved in the tool table This is a gt The parameters for this tool must either come from the requirement for the coarse tool feature Blocks 11 through 13 define RPM and turn on t
55. 25 Touch Use on the pop up dialogue or Enter from the numeric key pad O E E hom O E Q lt q Q t q The geometry of a 500 circle has now been created located at oW SIA z X 0 0 and Y 0 0 0 Repeat the previous steps to create another circle using the y AD x HB x following dimensions _ AAA Start X field input 1 0 Start Y field input 0 0 Radius field input 0 25 The geometry of a 500 circle located at X 0 0 and Y 0 0 and the geometry of a 500 circle located at X 1 0 and Y 0 0 have now been created ACU RITE 35001 333 Connecting the Geometry To create a continuous path the next step requires the circles to be connected together The Line Tool button will be selected next in this example to JC x Bg Ge hh complete the Geometry ooy yo x Selection example Select the Line Tool button from the Geometry Tools E in the main Toolbar Select the Line Tangent between two circles button k from the side Toolbar The Prompt Menu bar will ask that circle 1 be selected Select the 500 circle to the left The Prompt bar will ask for the second circle select the 500 circle to the right O Sen O O u A lt O a In many cases when creating geometry there is more than one solution When multiple solutions are available all geometry sol
56. ATOM A a 50 MOVeto Target LOCO Nr rai delas 51 I OO A A AA 92 A A N 53 nO 54 Feed ANG pee d ad leds 55 A O te tuate wientaeeaGe 57 xiii Tool Management 4 1 4 2 XIV Tool Table TOO aple Tool Managen eNi arnasari iia 60 Tool Compensation Redured Data eres 60 Toolnumbers LO NAICS asnon teori a aca 61 Locating the KOO AOS raii E ES 61 ECHO TNE LO TOS anotar dc 62 Tool Tabe MENU Basa siii 62 SPECON MMe a AAA e A aati sasatomee sansa teh 63 Clearing a entire ine ot 100 Aaa erinrar T 64 dearna me curent TOO at a 64 FIG AEE Ged O lak ta eat he Rede ie tet 65 al alte Hare fers TOOLS Tail 65 Co A A E Rea eee eee RR E A 66 Teach cand Teach Progra a a a dal T esate oe 66 Tool Table o rUe E oda ida 67 Fool table Standard tool data ia T eke tcl cate NA 67 Feeds espesas Tai e A a A 68 FOCUS Ce CEOS OV El VIC Wesana T N 68 Feeds uo pesas Tabo TUCU de eta SoA ae tea 68 Usina ther 66dS amp Speeds Table asus lll errada 70 Simulation OO and OSet Tables olaa aos 71 Tool Data FEOS TOMA A Reali ee ie i cea Rater ah rat 72 Activatmg Offsets via the PROCS seb dot 72 MECN eS NTI ON SiS iaa 73 Entering Tool Length Offsets in the Tool Table occooccccccccocccncncccncnncnnncnonos 73 Diameter Osetin OOM ablando e Ea 74 TOO RAGS COMPS Sa UO illa 75 Contouring without radius COMPE SON as 75 Contouring with radius compensa Nasa si 76 Radius compensation Machining COME Suicida Ds T1 Ramping into a Compensation MOV 6 atesora dildo
57. DefaultLayer X 0 608 Ya 62425 00OM ox Ee Block Form Basic Gomment Estimate BlockForm Use Cancel Select example 2 dxf Manual Data Program Run Input s Layer DefaultLayer 00 00 03 Shape View Adjust ToolPath Create A su o uses o oo eo NX es 10 CAM Programming Select the Pocket Cycle button from the Vertical 0 shutdown o 32an HN X button bar to open the Pocket Cycle Form dialogue IEEE AAA e Pocket Cycle 5 HQ IEE Step Over Enter 0 090 x i ad i Basic Setup Comment Start Height Enter 0 100 Step Over 0 Gam Z Depth 0 375 Start Height 0 000000 Touch Use button Select the shape by clicking on any part of the geometry that makes up the shape e g one of the outside arcs Xxx dxf eMoaos Select O ve O O Sa A lt O E Verity Tool Path graphic and touch Yes to accept O 7 example 2 dxf Layer DefaultLayer 00 03 06 Z Oj W _y _AS _ PERME ACU RITE 35001 339 The program for the slot pocket is now complete This can be used as Its own program or be Imported to other programs The order of steps taken are as follows Create Geometry Create Shape Select Create the Job Setup Define tool Create the Block Form Creat
58. EE AE 281 o A i ete a eat ere ate 281 Creating r New eal ROL ene oe ee ee ne aor on e 282 GAN IVIG COU OM Staind 282 SECIS Ty Too Dar DUELOS comisaria 282 POMO lo B hm Ce a St te fees eo vet ma or RE An es PS ROTI TE FETCH URE 283 FORTEGN ene eee ee eds 283 MRE OOM MOCO NS tia 284 FE CIM RUC I Ne ect O A Mi 285 Cree Tool DUNONS sacar poses Sacre agar rete a Seca cece are See earl ates 286 cele 10 10 1916 Meee enon ee een AE mR Oe Pree PUR A ne ee mee 286 MAS TO DUNA a EN nett a arnt aed eerie Ah ares aca 287 TAO AT AIS EN 288 Ora Data Id E 289 STA ARA E 290 Joo euU Ba Ca Da a E A ka aaa tee 291 Basic taD Data ENIE S Arta 291 Jop Setup Avance tau s E T ea 293 Advanced tao Data ENIS Sariman iras 293 OMS E EREE T I E A N AI AE A T 294 BLOCK Ronn BASIC TIO anaa E E AA eo 295 Basta GN Data ENIE Satan ad 295 COMME auna ia co teen el oda rd da tono ta e Tera 295 o AAN 296 POISE V ClO Ba SIC ais of a esas A hy 296 BES o lee era tere treasurers ainda ete iaecead clase ded weakens Paced gaduaneclebeandietis 296 BA A E 296 Dn Eyes Tabu usd dnd lt 296 Drill yes BOMI Brarecuonalars cette a ee iene a 296 DMC VCS Bonno UN dre cu Nal 297 Big Ga fe tro A A nie err 297 OLEYE Flat BOttonboO diseases talod 297 IS A A tic alaa agi 298 BASIC ls eaa AP PP EN 298 A O a 299 FO TORS roles 299 A a akan deena 300 Coniment tandas isos 300 A O A eae eR ee ee 301 Ba yates eae eR eee Pande A A A ORE 301 oo A e E E A E E AET 302 xxi
59. Editing Find Specific Text or Code in a program Use the Find button in Edit Mode to search for blocks or for specific text Depending on cursor location in the program touch previous to search from cursor location to the beginning of the program or next to search to the end of the program Text or Program Codes can be searched for throughout the entire program or at specific locations The following examples show how to use the Find button to search for blocks or for specific text First open the program for editing using the Edit button Place the cursor anywhere in the program and touch the Find button In the Find dialogue type in only the text or code that is being searched for Touch Previous to search from cursor location to the beginning E Or touch Next to search to the end of the program ex To find all instances of specific text or a code place the cursor at the beginning of the program Touch Cancel to exit the Find dialogue Cancel ACU RITE 35001 Manual Data System o ron A PP 1 Simple setup for easy testing 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 Previous Next 2 BEBBGGE 21 EndMain OROOCCIA 22 23 Sub program definition s 24 ifs Es 115 D gt O O E A 2 m Y oes T gt O Q m To O E e O hom 0 7 C 9 jad Y b gt Q t
60. G code MDI button on the bottom menu bar Type an instruction on the command line of the Program Area and touch START In Manual Mode the cursor rests on the command line More than one command can be programmed at a time Use a semicolon to separate the commands Touch HOLD to pause one shot moves Touch START to continue MDI moves are executed only once To recall a previously commanded block touch UP ARROW or DOWN ARROW to go to the line that you want You can execute from any line on the MDI history page After you execute the CNC takes you to the top line of the history page You can store up to 150 lines on the MDI history page Clear History and Save History are on the second menu bar Clear History will allow the contents of the G code MDI window to be cleared Save History will allow the contents of the window to be saved to a G code ISO format part program file You must know the location of the Absolute Zero before A making Absolute Mode moves 48 Program System z E E el ln BESS Bog ae 080 000 D 08B Lid B0B A A p Drill Pocket Other 3 Manual Data Input MDI Touch Screen Feature Dialogues The 3500 allows the operator to do quick machine functions directly trom the Manual Data Input screen Touching on any of these marked touch screen zones opens a dialogue for data input The data entered only affects the manual operation of the control it does not affect the
61. G151 T tool D tool rough diameter Q2 With T D and O cycle parameters set The machine rapids the Z axis up picks up the tool designated in the T cycle parameter and rapids directly over the center of the probe stylus The Z axis rapids down the distance placed in the ZRapidToStartPositionFromHome machine setup parameter then starts feeding down toward the probe for the initial touch at the feedrate that was placed in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast machine setup parameter then backs up The machine rapids over half the diameter of the cutter from the probe stylus center in the direction related to the probeOrientation machine setup parameter The spindle then comes on counter clockwise at the RPM specified in the calibAndToolMeasurementRPM machine setup parameter and retouch the probe twice once at the feedrate that is in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium machine setup parameter and again at the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow machine setup parameter The tool length register for that tool is now updated and any value in the length wear register is reset to zero Then the Z axis rapids up above the probe stylus the distance specified in the ZRetractAmount machine setup parameter Then it rapids the X Y axes over the center of the probe and turns the spindle on in reverse TA lt O gt Q O O Sam A N ACU RITE 35001 209 Manual Tool Length Offset Preset Updates tool length register To be used for large face m
62. If the operator touches and holds a program listing in the folder list a dialogue for the Program Properties is displayed This is where the operator can then change the program name but not the extension The program can also be marked Protected Favorite or both When a program is marked Protected the Lock icon will be displayed in the Folder Listing to indicate that the program is protected Protected programs cannot be edited or renamed but can be copied or moved When a program is protected the editor can be launched but no values may be changed only viewed Protected programs can be selected for Program Run When a program is marked Favorite the Star icon will be displayed in the Folder Listing to indicate that the program is a favorite Setting the favorite property of a program is a way to highlight certain programs on your control that are used often ACU RITE 35001 Manual Data System Program To Run AR 3 g I Showing w 9 G n ree 159 Sort by Name 14 Ac acu rite cnc3500i user 38 a Arc CCW XCenter 45 YCenter 45 5 gle 0 0 Basie template conversational 1135001 H 35001 Dim Abs Unit Inch 3500iSlot M 3500iSlot Plane XY ls AR 3 ElockFora XMax 1 YMax 1 ZMax 0 0000 XMin 1 YMin 1 ZMin 1 Tool 1 MCode 6 Offset Fixture 1 RPM 1000 li Chapter 6 sl DAN ROGRAM CODE HERE p Name O Size example 2 is Exan OType ODate iM fun is in
63. Limit feature The X Y and Z limits represent the extreme distance the tool can travel in the positive X Y and Z directions The I J and K limits represent the extreme distance the tool can travel in the negative X Y and Z directions The values of the positive and negative limits should be gt Software limits are referenced to Absolute Machine Zero programmed within existing machine limits To set software limits make sure the tool is within the envelope defined by the software limits XYZIJK In Edit Mode or Manual Data Input Mode set the appropriate values or the 35001 does not activate software limits G Code format G22 Return from Reference Point Return from Reference Point can be used in conjunction with the Intermediate Reference Point If the Intermediate Reference Point is commanded prior to the Reference Point then the intermediate machine reference point is passed to the Reference Point Return move is rapid or feed depending on which is active G Code format G29 Move Reference from Machine Datum Move Reference from Machine Datum is used to move an axis in reference to preset machine datum without being influenced by tool or fixture offsets The default machine datum location is preset to machine zero Move is rapid or feed depending on which is active to machine datum position G Code format G30 zero Changes to datum setting will shift intermediate gt Recommended Machine Datum default
64. Line Arc Tangent or None for the exit move Line Tangent The tool exits the contour in a line move tangent to the last move of the contour Line Perpendicular The tool exits the contour in a line move perpendicular to the last move of the contour O ve O O Sa A lt O E ACU RITE 35001 301 Arc Tangent The tool exits the contour in an arc move of a given radius and angle and tangent to the last move of the contour Line Arc Tangent The tool exits the contour in an arc move of a given radius tangent to the last move of the contour and continues in a line move to the Exit X Exit Y coordinate None Exit move is ignored Length Line Tan Line Per Enter the length of the exit move Angle Arc Tan Enter the angle of the exit arc Radius Arc Tan Line Arc Tan Enter the radius of the exit arc Exit X Line Arc Tan Enter the X coordinate for exit move Exit Y Line Arc Tan Enter the Y coordinate for exit move Setup tab Tool Enter the tool number to use for the cycle Z Feed Enter the Z axis feed rate plunging feed rate Automatically One xf Laver Defaultla calculated if tool being used is defined in the Tool Table So Z Feed Finish Feed Rough Feed Enter the XY axes roughing feed rate Finish Feed Enter the XY axes finish feed rate Coolant Choose None On M8 Off M9 or Mist M7 See Coolant on page 292 Spindle Dir Choose Forward Reverse Off
65. Manual operation single step operation and single commands can be entered The following describes the concepts and formats used with the ACU RITE 35001 CNC These topics are being introduced in this chapter Manual Data Input Screen Manual Data Inout Mode Settings Manual Data Input Manual Data Input Operations Manual Data Input Cycles Block History G code MDI MDI Touch Screen Feature Dialogues I MDI Teach Manual Data Input Screen The 3500i display screen provides the information required to monitor the machine it s movement programming program management and much more The default screen or home screen displays several windows operating modes and buttons The following list maps what is being viewed on this screen When the console is first turned on the unit defaults to this screen See Section 1 Manual Data Input on page 20 1 Program Position 2 Program Distance to go 3 Machine Actual Machine Position Target Position Machine going to 4 Secondary Dashboard Current tool Offset Modals and Feed Speed information 38 3 Manual Data Input Manual Data Input Mode Settings Features or settings that remain active for more than one operation are referred to as modal Modal features remain active until you change or cancel them Most CNC functions are modal As an example if the CNC is in Rapid Mode it executes all moves at the rapid rate until you initiate Feed Mode The CNC can be i
66. Mark program button then empty the clip board Select the program that is to be placed on the clip board and touch the Copy program button Paste Program button Y 0 a O C LL os O c S hom O om 0 N LO P Touch the Paste button to paste the copied B program s that are on the clip board to the current folder Move Program button Touch the Move button to move the program s that are on the clip board to another location Moving a program s empties the clip board when this action is taken The programs are deleted from its original location and moved to the current location Delete button Select a program one or more or a folder in the 2 Explorer window or in the programs window A prompt appears to confirm deletion Touch the Delete button located on the side bar The 3500 prompts to confirm the deletion and the buttons change for the response Select Yes or No to cancel out of the delete dialogue 94 5 Program Management Sorting Folder Contents The sorting button can be used to sort the contents of the folder list The sorting button shows the current sort method default is Sort By Name Ascending The options for sorting are Name Size Type and Date The operator can also choose to sort in ascending or descending order Sort by Name 12 Touch the Sort by Name button and select the sorting method desired and touch the OK button Program Properties
67. Name 14 gt ies im setup for easy testing a 91 am E a O O hom a e eb O os O S 0 ae LO 5 2 Program Manager Functions Folder Filter To select what type of programs to show touch the Showing button This opens the Folder Filter dialogue In the Folder Filter pop up dialogue check or uncheck the program types to be displayed or any part of a program name Y 0 a O C LL os O c S hom O om 0 N LO Advanced Folder Filter If you touch and hold the Showing button for two seconds the Advanced folder filter dialogue is shown The Advanced Folder Filter dialogue provides the means to filter the program listing by either Favorites or Protected Both can also be checked to only show protected programs that are marked as Favorites To change the Protected or Favorite attribute of a program see Program Properties page 95 92 Manual Data Input M 3500iSlot 1 3500i TST System laced el Folder Filter Showing w 9 G M Free A E es 5 GB Sort by Name H AR 3 lsl cam tes M Chaptex X M Conversational X DXF Filter X 8 G Code ISO auc l mog s DAVESDX oe ee ls Drillin gt 200 z eag p BOS ls example 2 lsl Example One Manual Data Input Program To Run AR 3 M M 3500iSlot
68. O O D O N N Enter either an X Stepover or Y Stepover Do not enter both G code format G170 162 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Hole Mill Cycle Use the hole milling cycle to machine through holes or counter bores You can position the tool at the hole center prior to the this block Activate a tool prior to so that the CNC knows the tool diameter If you do not provide Z and H program a separate Z move to raise the tool out of the hole after the cycle Field Diameter Direction ZDepth StartHgt DepthCut ReturnHgt FinStock XCenter YCenter RoughFeed FinFeed Code D E G code format G76 ACU RITE 35001 Description Diameter of hole Required Select the direction CCW climb milling or CW conventional milling Default is CCW Required The absolute depth of the finished pocket Absolute Z position to which the CNC rapids before feeding into the workpiece Z axis increment used for each pass Z axis height must be equal to or above HA Finish stock amount per side If you enter a negative value stock is left but no finish pass occurs If you do not enter a value no finish stock is left X coordinate of the center Default Pocket centers at present position Y coordinate of the center If no coordinate is provided default is set to present position Rough pass feedrate Defaults to last programmed feedrate Finish pass fee
69. Program Edit Screen Delete Find P Edit Preview 3 O The program edit screen provides the name of the program in the Shutdown 2 28pm MAEA ha od upper Status Bar and the program is displayed in numerical order in 3500iSlot Oo the main window Edit option buttons are available in the bottom 2 3500iSlot g LL menu bar Mi S T1 DO 4375 L 1 0000 z Each time a program is opened for edit the touch screen Keyboard jco aau Y2 oaan z1 9a9a T 1 daaa 1 104908 Ke eee opens with it The Keyboard can be dragged to a more convenient a ene ree Sen location or turned off when not needed 2 O TIITII T BOO To turn the Keyboard off DSSS Ss SsGmlg pa iti i i T gee A Touch the ABC button to toggle the Keyboard on or off fe flel BOB D Lo O Q q q q ACU RITE 35001 353 O LL z om O O om Q d ZG O 9 O _ Button Preview Help Insert po Delete Block N Find Replace N Edit Features e 354 Program Edit buttons When editing a program the following buttons are available Function Preview opens the preview window showing the tool paths in the program Also activates Side Bar viewing buttons for optional viewing formats Help activates the Edit Help screen Refer to Activating Edit Help on page 372 Insert activates Insert Mode Use to insert typed characters at the cursor pos
70. R 3500iTST EE ld cam test li Chapter 6 l DAN_C_Tool sl DAVESDXF Advanced Folder Filter System i in el A shell ae GM ee ee 194 5 GB Sort by Name a ide Favorite 8 Drilling_TST sl Engraving ll example 2 ls Example One 7 9 Protected 5 Program Management Utility Button Functions Preview button ea nae e Select a program to preview from the program directory A graphical sateen Te Rit on ECO OS 5 image of the program is displayed in the preview window 2235003 I 35001 Touch the Preview button on the side bar to preview Gp assesisior M3589iS1ot ES the program 3500iTST was i sl cam test la Chapteg 6 A preview of the program will only be displayed if an image of the f ee PA tool path s has been created No preview available will be eee Penes displayed if a tool path has not been created To create a tool path i Bexample 2 Example One A i image run the program in Draw W Bovz test carcs G_Drill G Mill In the bottom right corner of the preview image the estimated machining time will be displayed if it has been calculated by drawing the program If this timestamp is red the preview image is outdated and a new image should be generated by pressing the Draw soft key G Pockets ls gSample The preview display can be turned off by touching the Preview button again
71. Rotation G68 and Axis Scaling G72 a Select the More Milling button and then SetZero Milling from the pop up menu ining Conversational format SetZero G code format G92 o gt Lu q N Absolute Zero Absolute Zero should only be used in programs If programmed in MDI the Absolute Zero cancelled when the 3500i is switched to Auto gt It is recommended to use Fixture Offset instead of Field Code Description X X The new X Axis coordinate to assign to the current machine position Use a value of 0 to define the position as the new Absolute Zero Reference Y Y The new Y Axis coordinate to assign to the current machine position Use a value of 0 to define the position as the new Absolute Zero Reference Z Z The new Z Axis coordinate to assign to the current machine position Use a value of 0 to define the position as the new Absolute Zero Reference 140 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Block Form The BlockForm command is used to define a window in relation to the part zero This is used by the Draw function to present a solid model of the raw stock Block Form can be placed anywhere within the program and must be accompanied by all of the parameters na Select the More Milling button and then BlockForm from the pop up menu Conversational format BlockForm G code format G120 used you must have an active tool with a diameter before draw will graphically show material b
72. Set XO at the right end YO at the cylinder center line UO at a pre milled keyway on the cylinder Set the tool offset so that the center line of the 0 25 ball end mill is at the center line of the 3 diameter part with Y axis at 0 4 AX MILL SET Shortest Distance TO off G90 G70 GO M5 G28 ZO G53 01 GO X0 YO U0 T1 25 BALL END MILL S2400 M3 M98 P1 L6 G90 GO M5 G28 ZO GO X0 YO UO M2 O E hm O O A A x lt 5 O LL mb q 01 GROOVE G90 GO X 225 GO 22 625 G1 X 125 F5 G18 G91 G2 X 25 2 25 25 KO U 2 G17 G1 X 3 25 2 125 U 13 G90 GO 73 225 GO X 225 G91 GO U 45 M99 ACU RITE 35001 435 O Sen O O Sen A 2 x lt Su gt LL sal Example 3 Mill Mount a fourth axis as described above Mount a part 4 in diameter and 8 long on the face of the rotary table Support the part on the X end by a live center The part has a 0 25 45 chamfer on one end Shortest Distance is set to on This prevents the need to unwind the U axis saving operation time Table 15 3 shows a thread milling example Assume that a 4 8 UN 2A thread must be milled from the right end 6 long The tool is tapered to conform to the thread Set XO at the right end YO at the cylinder s center line UO at a pre milled keyway on the cylinder Measure the tool offset from the top of the part with Y axis at 0 The X start position is one pitch
73. T In Edit mode touch Other Cycles then touch Arc Engrave cycleto pacta ayas gt display the Engrave Cycle menu S orst 000 Q Complete the entry fields and touch USE 5 a Tu go b Field Code Description Text A Text string which is to be engraved All Oo ASCII characters within the range of ue MO More x032 x126 are allowed which includes bas Arc Cu X 6 61300 Y 0 96850 XCentex 0 12425 YCenter 9 01279 N Uppercase Lowercase Numbers and ome Are Cu X 0 12000 Y 6 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YGenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 Ma Punctuation maximum 80 characters in 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 i 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 Text string Required ri gt StartHgt H Z absolute start height Must be higher than ZDepth the Z parameter Required ZDepth Z Z absolute depth of engraving Must be below StartHgt the H parameter Required Height E Letter height Width is proportional to height Height is measured at the centerline of the cutter Required Radius R Radius of arc Must be a positive integer For upward arc CCW include text Height in calculation Required Direction S Arc direction CCW S 1 or CW S 0 Default is CW S 0 Required Font Q Font type to be used 01 Simple is a standard appearance Q2 Stencil is a stenciled appearance Q3 Stick has no rounded movements only straight moves Default is
74. Tab dialogues may be divided into more than one CO Gs section as shown on the Drilling Basic tab dialogue The D y upper section is the minimal input and requires each field Start Height E to be filled in The lower section s field inputs are for 1 SRE 10000 additional or if applicable information O Sen O O u A lt O a Basic tab Drill Cycle There are 6 drill cycle options available Basic counter bore Peck Tapping Boring Bidirectional Boring Unidirectional Chip Break and Flat Bottom Boring See Drilling Cycle on page 296 0 AS o ED Example One dxf Layer DefaultLayer E 2 T36 Y 2 078 00 00 03 Drill Location There are 3 drill location options available Bolt Hole CAT Pattern and Shape Bolt Hole and Pattern tabs must have the EA LN appropriate data filled in to use them in the Drill Location selection semen Start Height The initial Z start height will be entered here oping Z Depth The absolute hole depth is entered here E Chip Break Flat Bottom Bore Return Height The return height required is entered here ye 0 000000 Use Cancel LES AA A AAA ELA AA l EE a g VELA AR UA A A AU La Fae eet E aL OS DL E EUL Pe 1 0 1 al 3 4 5 6 7 Shape x View Adjust ToolPath Create F ase vee tee ust tee cos ee NT oe 298 10 CAM Programming Setup tab Tool Once the tool has been
75. The contour for the pocket is sub program 2 which is defined in blocks 30 through 37 This is the rendering of the program after being ran in Draw The top view is the line draw and the bottom view is the 3D solid model Approximate machining time is 11 minutes 246 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Pocket Island example 4 This example shows a rectangular pocket with an Island in the center The island is in the form of a diamond This example is similar to Example 1 but uses the coarse tool feature by first using a roughing tool and then a finer tool The initial roughing tool has 1 diameter A subsequent finer roughing tool is a 1 4 diameter end mill Using the coarse tool feature usually results in reduced machining time The finer tool only machines the material that the coarser tool cannot machine Basic template conversational Example 4 shows a rectangular pocket with an island in the middle the island is in the form of a diamond The initial roughing tool has a 1 inch diameter A finer tool with 1 4 inch radius will be used for further roughing Dim Abs Unit Inch Plane XY BlockForm XMax 3 YMax 3 ZMax 0 0000 XMin 3 YMin 3 ZMin 1 Tool 1 Diameter 1 5 Length 2 UpdTable MCode 6 RPH 1000 MCode 3 MCode 8 ASS CENTER NEW PROGRAM CODE HERE Islands FirstIsl 1 RectPock Length 4 Width 5 StartHgt 1 ZDepth 5 XCenter 0 YCenter O CornerRad 75 RoughFeed 20 Tool 2 Diameter 25 Length 2 MCode 6 Isla
76. Touch Use to activate the changes or press Cancel to exit without making any changes When the Use button is touched the operator will be prompted to Press Start to run operation or Manual to cancel Press the Start button to execute the change or Manual Touch the Manual button to cancel all changes O 4 ad A nm e y Mm 56 3 Manual Data Input MDI Teach The 3500 MDI also has a Teach mode which allows the operator to be o iee sabia ol able to manually move the machine and record the positions to be i i stored into a part program for running The machine can be manually NENE ne a cea ae moved by using the Jog buttons on the control See Jog Mode eee Ts 18 6850 Moves on page 34 To enter MDI Teach use the Teach button on the second set of menu bar buttons This will bring up a dialogue where the operator can select an existing program or create a new part program to store the positions From within the Teach Program file select dialogue The operator has the option to select a previous part program by navigating to the particular part program to highlight it and touch Ok to accept or touch the New Program to allow the operator to create a new part program O 4 Q lt mar m C e m o to store the information Once the new part program is created the 0k Coline button can be used to enter Teach mode with this new program LA Pro
77. X 1 334 Ve ool skp 00 00 03 a n Job Setup For the Program Units select Inch Basic AAN Enter 1 for the Tool Number Enter 375 for the Tool Diameter Enter 1 for the Tool Length Enter Define and Use Tool for the Tool Action Touch Use to accept the Job Setup tool path O ve O O Sa A lt O E bar to open the Block Form dialogue Example One dxf Layer a Select the Block Form button from the Vertical button ses ren al npu aint enance Xmax Enter 6 000 Block Form Ymax Enter 1 000 A Basic Comment a 0 000000 Zmax Enter 0 000 mE JS Xmin Enter 2 000 i dass l 0 000000 Ymin Enter 7 000 a IL 0 000000 i 0 000000 Zmin Enter l 000 Estimate BlockForm Or 1 E Use a Cancel j Select the Estimate BlockForm button to have CAM estimate the Block Form dimensions from the defined shape s Touch Use to accept he Block Form e e Je ee 3 ACU RITE 35001 347 Verify Block Form graphic and touch Yes to accept o 15 E Input i Program Run Shutdown al example 2 dxf Layer DefaultLayer Bee LE 4 00 00 03 Shape View Adjust ToolPath Create E mane e uo stat e seo es O Sen O O u A lt O a Select the Pocket Cycle button from the Vertical 0 me fo button bar to open the Pocket Cycle Form dialogue Example One
78. Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 4 gt Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit g Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field FinStock SideStock ZFeed Rough Feed FinFeed RetractHgt Coarse Tool SkipRough SkipFinish Direction G code format G210 Code Q ACU RITE 35001 Description Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass This amount applies to the sides and bottom unless R SideStock is defined then S FinStock only applies to the bottom Default is no stock left Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass on the sides only This amount overrides the value in S FinStock A value of zero can force stock to be left only on the bottom Default is equal to S FinStock The feedrate at which the tool will amp into the slot in all three axes Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during roughing passes Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during finish passes Default is last programmed feedrate Z axis absolute start and finish height must be equal to or above H used as a safety clearance Z position before making X Y moves Executed in rapid at start a
79. Zz G36 Q2 LI The line perpendicular exit move is executed the same as the entry PADUREN FONE e Cont Start Poi Cont End Point but in reverse order G37 Q2 Ll A Length A Start Point ret e Cc nt Tool Position Programmed Path Compensated Tool Path a Entry Move C Tool Compensation with Line Perpendicular Entry Move 78 4 Tool Management Arc Tangent Entry Move In an arc tangent entry move the tool approaches the contour through an arc and enters tangent to the first move of the contour The tool feeds from the current position to a calculated point based on the Angle C and Radius R then feeds through an arc and into the contour tangent to the first move of the contour To create an arc tangent in the opposite direction use a negative Radius R All programmed Z movements occur during the entry move G41 Xx Yy Zz G36 Q3 Rr Cc The arc tangent exit move is executed the same as the entry but in oa 1 Contour Start Point Contour End PointY Y reverse order G37 Q3 Rr Cc Ah Calculated Pointe e p gt jad O 8 N vr a pet Programmed Path e Current Tool Compensated Tool Path Position Entry Move Tool Compensation with Arc Tangent Entry Move Line Arc Tangent Entry Move In a line arc tangent entry move the tool approaches the contour through an arc and enters tangent to the first move of the contour The tool feeds from th
80. a new program and type in the new name of the program Select the CAM button CAM With the new program set up and named the steps in this program can now be created The first step is to create the geometry Defining Geometry Geometry items are the basic element of CAM programming Shapes are created from geometry and tool paths are generated from these shapes To define geometry the applicable button from the Geometry Tools in the main Toolbar will need to be selected See Geometry Toolbar buttons on page 282 In this exercise the Circle button will be used first o Select the Circle button from the Geometry Tools in the main Toolbar Select the Create Circle button for the method to be used to define the geometry from the vertical Toolbar 332 Manual Data System 3 el Program To Run Showing w G M Name Free 195 0 GB Sort by Name 44 ic acu rite cnc3500i usr user 29 M 3500iSlot Ls y Al pe 1 subprogra 3135001 M 35001 New Unplug Recycle o fo ea e e le 3500iSlot e 3 3500iTST New Program ld cam test DAN_C_Tool Conversational Cancel l4 Z O O W LZ 10 CAM Programming Insert the following data in the dialogue fields on the pop up dialogue using the pop up numeric pad or the key board Start X field input 0 0 Start Y field input 0 0 Radius field input 0
81. a value larger than 0 55 13 97 mm the control issues an error message If E is not set the cycle uses a default value of 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Default 0 1 Z Retract Amount is set in the Tool Probe Parameters ACU RITE 35001 201 To calibrate the tool probe Jog the calibration standard the calibration standard should be in the spindle to the top of your work piece or a common surface where all your tools will be calibrated to and set its tool length offset to the top of the work piece or to wherever you would like your Z zero to be To calibrate the tool jog the tip of the calibration standard to the proper spot Touch the Teach button Manually jog the calibration standard over the probe stylus center and less than 0 1 2 54 mm above the probe stylus It should be no more than 0 1 2 54 mm from the center of the stylus From the Manual Data Inout Mode with G code MDI selected type G150 D n and touch the Start button Where D is the exact diameter of the calibration standard The Z axis initially goes down and touches the top of the probe stylus at the feedrate specified in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium machine setup parameter Then retouch at the slow feedrate specitied in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow machine setup parameter establishing the zero probe stylus top Then incrementally rapid up whatever value that Is in the ZRetractAmount machine setup parameter The spindle comes on at the RPM speci
82. and circles they are displayed on the Graphics screen The resulting tool path is also shown in the graphics screen for tool path verification CAM mode features a powerful tool table which can be used to calculate feeds and speeds used in the program To utilize this feature tools must be set up in the CAM tool table Feeds and speeds can also be manually entered and calculated values overridden CAM Mode enables you to generate complete part programs CAM generated programs are based on canned cycles which makes the program easier to edit outside of CAM if needed 278 Manual Data System Layer DefaultLayer X 15 567 Y 9 767 00 00 00 Manual Data System O 3 aii L 19pm i example 2 dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 4 439 Y 0 568 00 01 34 O W _y _O lt MELE eal 10 CAM Programming Recommended CAM Programming Sequence CAM Setup Review the CAM Setup data to verify the default settings work for your program requirements see page 313 If you are not an experienced user the default settings should be adequate Experienced users can fine tune the CAM Setup to their program requirements CAM Setup contains the powerful Tool Table feature Tool Table data can be used to calculate feeds and speeds needed in your program Feeds and speeds can be entered manually and automatic calculations overridden Geometry Data Gather the informatio
83. angle displayed The user can select the desired one s when gt When more than one solution is available they are all done click on an empty area 284 10 CAM Programming Editing a Line Parameter values are interdependent When one parameter value is changed other parameters are updated to reflect the change that was made After a change to a parameter has been made touch inside another parameter field or use the ENTER button to tab to another parameter field to review the automatic changes To edit a line Select the Properties button Select the line to be edited The Line properties dialogue opens Edit the parameters to be changed Select the Use button to save the changes and close the Line properties dialogue or Cancel to quit without saving on the geometry to be edited and selecting Properties gt The first two steps can also be achieved by right clicking from the pop up dialogue When the Unbounded box is checked the selected end points of the line are no longer constrained and It s length is changed to infinity a maximum length ACU RITE 35001 0 000000 0 000000 1 000000 0 000000 1 000000 0 000000 DefaultLay Unbounded 285 O S L O O Sen A lt O aie Circle Tool buttons Touching the Circle Tool button activates the O following buttons in the Vertical button bar Button Function Select Circle Radius to create a circle using
84. been entered using the keyboard and the Use button has been touched the keyboard will disappear from the screen The keyboard will also be removed from the screen when the Cancel button is touched 1 2 Visual Display Uni Program System 0 m 0 2900 0 4231 19 6850 i h ora Fuse Jf ore Peares 12 1 Introduction Additional Buttons The following additional buttons are always available on the keyboard 1 Enter Button same as ENTER key 2 Special Characters Button shows other characters Copy Button copy information in the current field to the copy buffer Paste Button paste previously copied information in the current field Clear Button clear the current field Shift Button switch between upper and lower case Backspace Button delete the character to the left of the cursor Drag Bar Use to move the keyboard to a different location ey ON OO A Special Characters The keyboard has asecond Special Characters page provided which ee AT oo is accessed by touching the E Touching the H W button displays the special character buttons Touching the button again returns to the main keyboard The Copy ce ls fs Gaga Paste Backspace Enter and Clear buttons are also displayed ACU RITE 35001 13 E gt gt 6 AL O E gt gt N Programming Sliders The following list describes the slider controls sh
85. block in the program is o N a Single Adjust i E Sim highlighted ACU RITE 35001 263 s Sim Tools A Touch the Sim Tools button to activate the Draw Tool e me ee al aid Table Diameter Length D Wear L Wear Type Comment Timel Time2 Cu a vo 0 0 0 0 Milling Cu 0 00 0 00 i q 2 0 0 0 O Milling Cu 0 00 0 00 00 The simulator tool table is a separate table that Draw uses to simulate LAO ng aiso 000 l the machining of the part The machine tool table can be copied into o BOC Ang oa 0060 the Draw tool table Any changes made in this table does not affect A a ca ess the machine tool table A co eee 11 0 0 0 0 Milling Cu 0 00 0 00 Button Function T o a f Miling e es eee a _ _____ _ EEE _E5 lt lt lt gt EA2AAAAAAAAA 14 0 0 0 0 Milling Cu 0 00 0 00 15 0 0 0 0 Milling Cu 0 00 0 00 Sim Tools is the table used to define the A ag oo Se characteristics of the tools to be used while 18 0 0 0 O Milling Cu 9 00 0 00 Sim i i 19 0 0 0 0 Milling Cu 0 00 0 00 Tools simulating the program The usage behaviors are 5 o o don w identical to the standard machine Tool Table e a apg an a Sim Offset is the table used to define the fixture SS BDO EOS Offset offsets to be used when simulating the program rer Clear line clears the data for highlighted line er Clea
86. buttons to select view type 3 Real time draw display 1 Arc CCW XCenter 45 YCenter 45 An a 2 Basic template conversational 3 Dim Abs 4 Unit Inch 5 Plane XY 6 BlockForm XMax 1 YMax 1 ZMax 0 0 7 Tool 1 MCode 6 8 Offset Fixture 1 9 RPM 1000 18 MCode 3 11 MCode 8 12 kkk ENTER NEW PROGRAM C 13 22 1 Introduction 1 4 Accessories Available accessories include a selection of electronic Touch Probes and Hand Wheels Touch probes Touch Probe Function software option With the various HEIDENHAIN 3 D touch probe systems you can Automatically align work pieces Quickly and precisely set datum Measure the work piece during program run Measure and inspect tools TS 220 TS 640 and TS 440 touch trigger probes These touch probes are particularly effective for automatic work piece alignment datum setting and work piece measurement The TS 220 transmits the triggering signals to the CNC via cable and is a cost effective alternative for applications where digitizing is not frequently required The TS 640 see figure and the smaller TS 440 feature infrared transmission of the triggering signal to the CNC This makes them highly convenient for use on machines with automatic tool changers Principle of operation HEIDENHAIN triggering touch probes feature a wear resisting optical switch that generates an electrical signal as soon as the stylus is deflected This signal is transmitted to the control which stores th
87. code G76 gt G170 G171 G172 G175 gt G176 gt G181 gt G190 gt G191 4 Draft Angle Pocket Cycle Frame Pocket Cycle Circular Pocket Cycle Rectangular Pocket Cycle Bottom Finish Side Finish Islands Q I E O LL o q q Irregular Pocket Cycle Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle Plunge Rectangular Pocket Cycle Slot Cycle Circular Slot Cycle Ring Pocket Cycle Select Description Hole Mill Cycle Face Mill Cycle Circular Profile Cycle Rectangular Profile Cycle Mill Cycle EndMill Cycle Thread Mill Cycle Engrave Cycle Arc Engrave Cycle gt 377 Q I O LL a q q Rotation Scaling and Mirroring The Rotation Scaling and Mirroring enables Refer to Chapter 7 7 2 Canned Cycles on page 149 for more information regarding these cycles Spindle Probing The Spindle Probing enables Refer to Chapter 7 7 2 Canned Cycles on page 149 for more information regarding probing cycles 378 G code Description G68 E G72 G100 G code gt G140 gt G141 gt G142 G143 G144 G145 G146 gt G147 Rotation Scaling Mirroring Select Description Spindle Probe Calibration Edge Finding Outside Corner Find Inside Corner Find Inside Outside Boss Inside Outside Web Protected Probe Move Skew Compensation Select 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Tool Probing Description The Tool Probing enables Refer to Ch
88. does not automatically reactivate the servos Activating Resetting the Servos For safety reasons the CNC powers up with the servomotors disengaged While the servos are off the CNC cannot move the machine Reset the servos as follows gt If a limit switch disengaged the servos manually reposition the machine inside its normal range of travel gt Press E STOP to display the message External emergency stop Rotate the E STOP switch in the direction of the arrows to reset It Press SERVO RESET to reset the servos 1 Introduction Writing Programs The 35001 allows many features to be used without having to write a program But for operations that repeat or complex machining It is best Manual Data System 35001 m oO LO Mm a e q to write a program Before you start to write a program determine the ET Ra work holding device and the location of Part Zero the point to which 4 Plane XY ae 5 BlockForm XMax 1 YMax 1 ZMax 0 0000 XMin 1 YMin 1 ZMin 1 all movement is referenced Since absolute positions are defined e Tools 1 NCode 6 from Part Zero try to select a location that directly corresponds to 8 RPH 1990 dimensions provided on the part print such as the lower left corner of A A em eee the work Then you can develop a program using a procedure similar acode 9 to the one that follows Fi The first block of a program is a safe starting position This is where P eteevENTER OPTIONAL SU
89. dxf Layer DefaultLayer Y 4 765 00 00 03 e Pocket Cycle Step Over Enter 0 090 0 Te Start Height Enter 0 100 CO ae Z Depth Enter 0 75 0 000000 Retract Height Enter 0 100 d E Fin Stock Enter 0 125 Touch Use button The prompt bar will ask to select shape to use for this tool path Select the shape Prompt for islands LS x Shape z View Adjust ToolPath Create Eeee eTA Verify Tool Path graphic and touch Yes to accept o HEE l l Input Program Run Shutdown al example 2 dxf Layer d X 1 980 Y 2 790 00 03 06 JRE EMPRESA Shape View Adjust ToolPath Create sont fe ao ise ist tee os see NOT eu 348 10 CAM Programming y Select the Job Setup button from the Vertical button 0 shutdown o 45an El bar to open the Job Setup dialogue Example One dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 1 725 Y 3 310 4233 19 29 Job Setup O lt Enter 2 for the Tool Number Basic Advanced Comment Enter 375 for the Tool Diameter Program Units None Enter 1 for the Tool Length Enter Define and Use Tool for the Tool Action Touch Use to accept the Job Setup A RS Cancel j O ve O O Sa A lt O E Select the Pocket Finish Cycle button from the e Shutdown 9 47am El Vertical button bar to open the Pocket Finish
90. feedrate for modal moves Add Feed blocks whenever Basic Cycles necessary lors Select the More Milling button and then Feed from the pop up menu Conversational format Feed O C G code format FIn E MN M a gt X L Field Code Description ae a sl mN Feed F The rate of motion to be activated Required FeedRate 4th Axis A FeedU block sets the feedrate for the 4th axis U If the U axis is a rotary axis the units for the FeedU block are degrees per minute deg min otherwise the units are the same as in the Feed block gt Select the More Milling button and then FeedU from the pop up menu Conversational format FeedU FeedU F The rate of motion for the 4th axis to be activated Required ME More 144 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Spindle RPM Use the RPM command to designate and activate the desired spindle speed in Revolutions Per Minute Programming an RPM does not activate any spindle motion it only sets the speed at which any subsequent spindle rotation will occur at Conversational format RPM E G code format SIn Description RPM S The speed of rotation for the spindle to be activated Required M Functions Use the MCode command to program one of the various Miscellaneous machining codes such as turning ON OFF the spindle or coolant Refer to chapter 11 Advanced Programming on page 384 where M F
91. force stock to be left only on the bottom Default is equal to S FinStock RampFeed J The feedrate at which the tool will ramp into the pocket in all three axes Default is last programmed feedrate 0 2 O gt O O D Q N N Rough Feed Feedrate used during roughing passes Default is last programmed feedrate FinFeed K Feedrate used during finish passes If entered as negative finish pass will mill in conventional CVV direction Default is last programmed feedrate ReturnHgt P Z axis absolute start and finish height must be equal to or above H used as a satety clearance Z position before making X Y moves Executed in rapid at start and end of cycle Defaults to current Z position at beginning of cycle Coarselool T Number of tool used for previous roughing cycle SkipRough E Yes Roughing pass is skipped only finish pass is performed No Roughing pass is performed Default SkipFinish F Yes Finish pass is skipped only rough pass is performed No Finish pass is performed Default Direction Q Select Cw or Cow G code format G77 ACU RITE 35001 177 Plunge Rectangular Pocket Cycle Use the plunge rectangular pocket cycle for carbide tooling where 9 me Shutdan sou aa A a multiple axis ramp in move is not possible The Z axis plunges 3 single axis to the programmed depth You must position the tool o PEO directly over the center of the pocket prior to the plunge
92. in Manual Data Input mode by verifying the button Is highlighted Press System Maintenance and select Config Enter 222 if prompted for a password Press the Config Data button and navigate to System gt Display Settings gt CfgShutdown Change the shutdownOnUser parameter to TERMINATE Exit the Config and save settings Shut down the control software using the normal method of Shutdown gt Shutdown At the Username prompt enter 222 and press ENTER At software update menu screen Press 1 and ENTER The software update will now be done automatically taking approximately 10 20 minutes When the update is complete it will prompt you to remove the USB drive and restart At this time remove the USB drive and press ENTER to restart After the system has restarted it will start up normally to the control software You can now return to System Maintenance gt Config and change shutdownOnUser back to SHUTDOWN If any issues are encountered please either refer to the technical manual or contact your service representative for assistance 438 12 Software Update Off Line Software 13 1 35001 Off Line Software Off Line Simulator The off line software provides a convenient way to write part Manua Data Shutdown 9 32am E programs and simulate machine behavior using a standard Windows TEL El 00 01 03 based computer Features and functionality are virtually identical to
93. irregularly shaped tools O mo or tools with a hole in the center of the bottom System A 10 39am el 001 Special Diameter Offse Preview O Field Code Description Tool T Tool number Required The T cycle parameter must be the same as the current tool in the spindle EstDiam D This is the rough diameter of the tool Required The diameter specified in this 7 3 Probing Cycles es is lt 2 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 38 Arc Ccw X 0 16113 Y 0 45042 XCenter 0 08062 YCenter 0 03126 31 Arc Cw X 0 10449 Y 0 48650 XCenter 0 05664 YCenter 0 02642 EJ 32 Line X 0 10443 Y 0 48650 cycle parameter should be larger than the actual diameter of the tool being measured ul Are Cow X 0 31588 Y 0 44772 XCenter 0 07804 YCenter 0 03631 but no more than 0 04 1 0 mm over If 35 Arc Cw X 0 34324 Y 0 46468 XCenter 0 02764 YCenter 0 01403 you have a left handed tool you would give o a negative value to the diameter so the Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit 9 Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features spindle turns on in the forward direction DistDown E The incremental distance from the current Z Retract amount to go down along the side of the probe stylus when doing a diameter pick The maximum E value is 0 55 13 97 mm or the tool may crash into the probe or table If you enter a value larger than 0 55 13 97 mm the control
94. is defined then S FinStock only applies to the bottom Default is no stock left Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass on the sides only This amount overrides the value in S FinStock A value of zero can force stock to be left only on the bottom Default is equal to S FinStock The feedrate at which the tool will amp into the slot in all three axes Default Is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during roughing passes Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during finish passes Default is last programmed feedrate Z axis absolute start and finish height must be equal to or above H used as a safety clearance Z position before making X Y moves Executed in rapid at start and end of cycle Defaults to current Z position at beginning of cycle Number of tool used for previous roughing cycle Yes Roughing pass is skipped only finish pass is performed No Roughing pass is performed Default Yes Finish pass is skipped only rough pass is performed No Finish pass is performed Default Select Cw or Cow 189 0 2 O gt O O D Q N N Ye O gt O O Q N N Irregular Pocket Cycle Use this to mill irregular pockets You must enter the perimeter of the shape into a sub program The main irregular pocket needs to be a closed shape with contiguous line and arc movements starting and ending at the same poin
95. of a block where the copied blocks are to be inserted and touch the Insert Block button Insert Place the cursor at the beginning of the new empty block line and touch the Paste button Paste The selected blocks have now been added in at that location ACU RITE 35001 example 2 g 5 G70 6 T1 DO 3750 L 1 0000 H 7 G120 X6 0000 YO 0000 Z0 0000 10 0000 J 6 0000 K 1 0000 8 G169 Wi Z 0 5000 A0 0900 HO 1000 S 0 1250 PO 1000 9 T2 DO 3750 L 1 0000 H 18 T2 11 G133 12 G120 X6 0000 Y1 0000 Z0 0000 I 2 0000 J 7 0000 K 1 0000 13 14 End program 15 M2 16 17 Shape 1 subprogram 18 O1 19 G41 28 GO X4 7762 Y 3 5199 21 G1 X2 7683 Y 1 1099 22 G3 X1 8482 Y 2 7384 R 1 0000 23 G2 X3 4758 Y 4 1951 R2 0000 24 G3 X4 7762 Y 3 5199 R 0 7500 25 M99 359 O y Lu E O hom A O O Q o g q q O 5 LLI Sen O Q A Q 5 Q ee O Moving Blocks in a program Moving one or more blocks is accomplished by using the Cut button first of one or more blocks to be moved then touch the Edit Features button In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the Features Touch the Mark button Use the Arrow keys to mark additional blocks below or above the cursor location Touch the Cut button to remove the block or blocks selected and place them on the clipboard Place the cursor at the beginning of a block where the ii blocks are
96. or gt i Down movement by a factor of 10 esse Reset Pan resets the graphic to the original image Pan before pan activity Line View Adjustments pm Touch the 2D or 3D Wire Frame View button to E activate the tool path view from the side bar f 1 Touch the Line Numbers button to toggle the line O numbers on or off O Touch the Show Contour button to display the tool path along with the part contours 1 Simple setup for easy tesi pa 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L 1 6 7 Call sub program s v Adjust Zoom Rotate Move Clear Reset Blk Form Cursor Draw Blk Form 262 8 Drawing Programs Draw Options Touch the Options button to activate the Options e anual Data Dialogue E El 00 01 6 The Options dialogue functions the same as in Programing In Draw blocks of the program can be marked to stop or be skipped When these are selected the Stop or Skip feature is activated gt de O E 00 Options Optional Stop Optional Skip The Rotate feature functions in the same way when selected Rotate is activated 3D Line view action a pat Rotate O t Highlight Block is available when 2D or 3D Line view has been lt t Simple setup o cancer selected When activated if a program block is selected the lines in 3 Unit Inch the drawing view are highlighted by changing color for that block If 5 T1 D Ol Let a line in the drawing view is selected then the
97. paths are viewed Q To return to the previous menu Touch the Previous Menu button lt QO Adjust View a The Adjust View button opens the Adjust View button dialogue of additional buttons to manipulate the tool path view To return to the previous menu Touch the Previous Menu button ACU RITE 35001 315 O Sen O O u A lt O a Geometry Defining Geometry Geometry Items are the basic element of CAM programming Shapes are created from geometry and tool paths are generated from these shapes To define geometry the applicable button from the Geometry Tools in the main Toolbar must be selected See Geometry Toolbar buttons on page 282 Selection example Select the Circle button from the Geometry Tools in e the main Toolbar Select the Create Circle button for the method to be used to define the geometry from the side Toolbar Insert the required data in the dialogue fields on the automatic pop up dialogue Data input example Start X field input 0 0 Start Y field input 0 0 Radius field input 0 5 Select either the Use or Enter buttons The geometry of a 1 00 circle has now been created located at X 0 0 and Y 0 0 316 Wo yy JO xt EB 10 CAM Programming Repeat the above steps using the following dimensions O i A Start X field input 2 0
98. pocket such as corner radius side finish stock etc These additional parameters are not typically required To exit from the More Menu touch the More button again The required parameters are displayed Rectangular Pocket Cycle data input View Touch the View button to view the rectangular pocket data Input graphically and is useful for verification O 4 ad A nm e y Mm Touch the Exit button to return to the rectangular pocket dialogue The view option is available with all MDI forms Touch the Use button to run the operation or Cancel to cancel the operation After touching the Use button the 35001 will prompt you to touch the Start button to run the operation or the Manual button to cancel Draw can be activated while running to provide a graphical representation of the operation while machining applications are described in the chapter Canned gt A full description of Pocket Cycles and programming Cycles Pocket Cycles can be found on page 171 46 na ii ss Fuse Jf view cancel 5 G code Drill Pocket Other Manual Data System i 3 cana TETI to 2 DI Pre l 00 00 00 Sa OOE Adjust 3 Manual Data Input Block History The MDI block history allows the operator to record all cycles that are programmed into the MDI to be retrieved or saved into a part program By default the recording of the MDI cycles is on and can be turned off b
99. programmed immediately after a compatible pocket cycle that has left side stock All side stock is removed in one pass If no DepthCut is specified Multiple finish passes are possible using SideStock Islands definitions apply to this cycle and will be avoided and sides finished If active Islands need to be re defined after the pocket cycle before the Side a D 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 Finish call D 206 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 267 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 288 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 Y 0 S 0 c 5 N Mm Field Code Description nit Are Cow X 0 06260 Y 0 12480 XCenter 9 04519 YCenter 0 10558 ZDepth Z Absolute pocket depth Default is last a roughing cycle used StartHgt H Z absolute starting height 0 1 or 2 mm above surface Default is last roughing cycle used RampFeed The feedrate at which the tool will ramp into the pocket in all three axes Default is last programmed feedrate FinFeed K Feedrate used during finish passes Default is last programmed feedrate DepthCut B The depth of each cut per pass Default is entire depth removed in one pass SideStock M Amount of stock left on sides for an additional finish pass Direction Q Select Cw or Ccw G code format G134 194 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Engraving Cycles Engraving cycles provide
100. q pa Line Line Move Line Move initiates a straight line feed motion and is used to cut a part Y Axis Straight line motion occurs in one or more axes The block may contain any combination of available axes 7 Stopping Point l l l Y Position One to four axes can be included on a block with Line Move E eer X Y Z and U reach the target simultaneously Radius Distance Line Move is modal and remains in effect until canceled or overridden Line Move can be programmed in absolute or incremental and follows the active mode Starting Point Specify the feedrate of the movement on or prior to the Line Move block X Position Conversational format Line G code format G1 X Axis Press the Other button to select the Line Move variant that best fits your needs Each variant is described next The following figure visually depicts the Angle and Radius parameters used in some of these variants to specify the desired end point coordinate ACU RITE 35001 125 Line Move EndPoint Specify the desired end point coordinate using actual position designations either in absolute or incremental Field Code Description X X Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired X Axis destination Basic Cycles Y Y Absolute position of or incremental E 5 i More Cancel O distance to the desired Y Axis destination e M n Z Z Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis dest
101. re entering Program Run the timers will again be initialized to zero Both timers begin when you press START and will pause when you press STOP Accessing the Tool Table In Program Run mode easy access to the machine Tool Table is provided by touching the Tool button on the bottom menu bar This opens the normal Tool Table view in which the usage behavior is the same as in Manual Data Input mode the new values do not take effect until the corresponding If the values in the Tool Table are changed from this view tools offsets are re activated within the part program ACU RITE 35001 273 z a O O C a t JOG Cycles the CNC through manual movement y JOG modes RAPID JOG JOG FEED JOG Q 100 JOG 10 JOGO 1 Axis Jog keys gt The Axis Jog keys are located on the front panel of the console O From the Manual Data Input Mode pressing the J0G key repeatedly a will toggle through the available modes and feed rates Description of how to use the Jog keys have been explained previously See Jog Mode Moves on page 34 O e Key Name Function e as q z X Manually moves X axis in positive direction X Manually moves X axis in negative direction Manually moves Y axis in positive direction E lt GHANIE y Manually moves Y axis in negative direction Z Manually moves Z axi
102. rectangular EZ E pocket cycle block or use the X Y words Activate the tool prior to programming plunge rectangular pocket cycle so the cutter diameter is known Ye O gt O O Q N N Field Code Description HTA 205 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 Length M Length of pocket in X axis Required mer AG Cu X 0 07250 Y 0 10659 Xoenter 0 05506 Yoenter 0 03106 EN 288 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 Width W Width of pocket in Y axis Required bit Arc Cow X 0 06280 Y 6 12450 XCenter G 04519 YCenter 0 10558 A ee El StartHgt H Z absolute starting height 0 1 or 2 mm 7 7 7 above surface Executed in rapid Required ZDepth Z Absolute depth of pocket Required StepOver A The distance the tool steps over width of cut in the X and Y axes as It mills out the pocket Defaults to tool radius which is the max XCenter X X coordinate of the pocket center point Defaults to current position YCenter Y Y coordinate of the pocket center point Defaults to current position CornerRad U The arc radius of all four corners of the pocket Defaults to tool radius which is the minimum value allowed DepthCut B The depth of each cut per pass Defaults to tool diameter Max is the full ZDepth in parameter Z less bottom finish stock A negative value will cause the finish pass to finish the side walls in steps down 178 7 Programming Canned C
103. rotates more than 180 degrees in one move So if a move of greater than 180 degrees is programmed the control resolves the number to a positive value less than 360 degrees and move to that target taking the shortest distance always less than 180 degrees A move of exactly 180 degrees always moves positive and a move of exactly 360 degrees does not move at all If programming the U axis in Incremental The rotary axis moves the exact amount of degrees programmed and in the direction indicated with the plus or minus sign The display resets to zero every time 360 degrees Is crossed so that the highest value in the U axis display is 359 999 degrees depending on the displayed resolution Feedrate display is always vectored Programming Examples All programming examples are for 4 axis machining with the rotary table mounted on the left end of the mill table with the center line of the rotary axis parallel to the X axis The face of the rotary table faces X The examples contain both milling and drilling applications Modal cycles G81 to G89 and G66 can be executed at rotary locations as In XYZ locations Non modal canned cycles can be executed at rotary locations Position the rotary axis before you execute a non modal canned cycle ACU RITE 35001 433 O E S O S 0 E A lt S gt LL r q q O E EA O om 0 E A a S gt LL E q q Example 1 Drill
104. s listing lists the programs stored in the CNC All CNC programs are displayed by their extensions after its name Change the Program Type mode to view programs with other formats VAUSER All programs should be created and saved in this folder Additional folders can be created in VAUSER to better organize programs Do not delete or alter programs or folders outside of VAUSER Some programs and folders outside of VAUSER may be needed for normal operation of the CNC A The folder where the user programs are stored is Program Screen Description The following is a map of the Program Management screen 1 Current folder 2 Folder list 3 Program list 4 Program To Run 5 Showing button to filter Program Types shown This is used to show only the extension type programs to display 6 Horizontal menu bar buttons 7 Vertical menu bar buttons 8 Scroll Bar 88 A To Run AR 3 M I Showing w 9 G mM Freei9456B iv user 34 Manual Data System 3 o el 135001 M 35001 ls 3500iSlot M 3500iSlot 3500iTST k AR 3 sl cam test li Chapter 6 s DAN_C_Tool e DAVESDXF s Drilling_TST le Engraving sl example 2 ls Example One ls g92 test l G_Arcs G_Dril1 AG Mill s G_Pockets le gSample R m gO B El ll hinae plate 1 sl include rogram Bin l Manual Data Sy stem Fue a bel el Program To Run 3500iSlot m Showing
105. setting is machine point and machine reference position 388 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Modifiers Use modifiers to alter the way the 3500 interprets a word address For example a single value in an Inch Mode program may be forced to Metric Mode without programming G71 Or arc center values I J or K may be forced to an absolute value The address and modifier must be accompanied by an ampersand amp Place the ampersand amp between the address word to be modified and the modifier The address word is programmed first followed by amp followed by the modifier followed by the value The modifier is non modal and is applied only to the address word it accompanies The following available modifiers are listed Modifier Function A Force the address word to be in Absolute Mode D Force the address word to be in Incremental Mode E Force the address word to be in Inch Mode M Force the address word to be in Millimeter Mode Example G02 X2 0 Y1 0 ISA1 5 J amp A1 0 The example forces the and J center of an arc to be in Absolute Mode and J are incremental by default Assume the axes are at X1 Y1 Block Separators Block separators can be used to place several functions on one line of a program This is useful in Manual Data Input MDI Mode because you can combine several commands on one line at the command line The number of separate steps in a program is limited only by the avai
106. shown in the figure The drawing does not show the finish pass Assume an existing rectangular pocket 4 in long x 2 in wide x 1 in deep with a theoretical sharp lower left corner at X2 Y2 The following program machines a draft angle onto the existing pocket The tool performs the following operations Position the tool above the center of the lower left corner radius The tool path starts and ends at the center of the lower left corner radius after each perimeter pass for all roughing passes During finish passes the tool steps down the draft angle and makes passes around the perimeter If a ball end mill is programmed W the following points must be considered the length X and width Y at the bottom of the pocket is measured at the tangency point of the ball radius and the draft angle The start height H must be set to 0 1 ball radius above surface to be cut Set the tool length offset so that the ball is buried up to its centerline when at the part surface touch off the tip and add the ball radius or touch off tip and use a negative length wear equal to the ball radius ACU RITE 35001 173 Rectangular Pocket Cycle Use the rectangular pocket cycle to mill square or rectangular O ac Shutdoim to ns pockets You must position the tool directly over the center of the 3 Rectangular Pocket Cycle pocket prior to the Rectangular Pocket cycle or use the X Y data Preview lo 0000 a aaa 0 0000 0 000
107. sin Simulation Tool Table stores tool diameter length offsets and wear factors for tools used in Draw Simulation Mode Exit will return to the Program Manager Exit ey lee e ell ACU RITE 35001 257 Touch the Display Program button to open the program and dashboard screen gt a A 00 View Options Menu The Side Bar menu contains buttons to change the graphic view modes and style The following table describes these buttons Manual Data System E gt Ei INCH ABS XV 1 Simple setup for easy tesi pa 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L 1 7 Call sub program s 4 AA gt s Jepi Button m Oo o 258 Function 2D Top Plane Solid View is a two dimensional 2D top plane view of a solid block form model 3D Solid View is a three dimensional 3D view of a solid block form model Touch drag preview to change angle of view Projection View adjust the view form and cursor features to blue print view 2D Wire Frame Top View is a top two dimensional 2D top plane view shown as a wire frame and displays the tool path 3D Wire Frame View is a three dimensional 3D view shown as a wire frame and displays the tool path Touch drag preview to change angle of view 3D Shaded View is a three Dimensional 3D Shaded View of a solid block form model only available after the program finishes drawing Contour View with Line
108. small circle appears at the end of the line This circle appears on the closest end to where the line was touched on and represents the start point of the shape ACU RITE 35001 345 select the geometry on the other side of the circle This selects all grp pren EE ol geometry completing the tool path example 2 dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 4 928 Y 3 868 00 00 00 Selecting the path this way eliminates selecting each individual geometry All geometry is now yellow in color and is considered a shape or contour Touch 0k to accept machining side to shape Exit out of CAM to save the program Re enter CAM O Sen O O u A lt O a Creating the tool paths To create a continuous path the machining material size and tooling e Manual Data MS j 1 i x Input lanac requirements must be defined The material size can either be a block e large enough to accommodate the tool path or can be the actual size Al O ON E we le of the finished product AA es Select the Tool Path button from the Geometry Tools F in the main Toolbar contour Touching on its center will flip it to the other side gt The larger small circle represents the tool side of the of the line 346 10 CAM Programming y Select the Job Setup button from the Vertical button 0 wc apa npu aintenance bar to open the Job Setup dialogue Example One dxf Layer DefaultLayer
109. specific tool The CNC will consider all the data entered for the tool when running the part program 60 4 Tool Management Tool numbers Tool names Each tool is identified by a number between 0 and 100 The tool name is its tool number The machine builder determines the number of tools available The tool number O is automatically defined as the zero tool empty spindle with the length L 0 and the diameter D 0 E 8 ae Sign for the length difference AL If the tool is longer than the 11 tool AL gt O If the tool is shorter than the T1 tool AL lt 0 The tool length offset may be entered as a known value or the 35001 may determine the offset automatically To have the 35001 determine a tools length offset involves touching the tip of each tool to the part s ZO surface and touching the Teach button This provides information to the 35001 to determine the tool length offset for each tool For more detailed information see Tool Length Offsets on page 73 Tool Diameter D Enter the tool diameter D directly Locating the Tool Table The Tool Table is accessed from the Manual Data Input screen E To activate the tool table touch the Manual Data Input button also referred to as a tab key In the bottom menu bar touch the Tool button to open the tool table ACU RITE 35001 61 Editing the tool table With the tool table open it can now be edited by changing exist
110. spindle carefully jog the tool down until it touches the top surface of the work piece This is referred to as Part Zero Touch the Teach button The 3500 calculates the tool Bl length offset for the selected tool putting the data to the length column Press the Enter button to save the data entered in the field Diameter Offset in Tool Table When you activate a tool you automatically activate the length offset and diameter values recorded on the Tool Table When a tool Is activated the length offset is applied immediately to provide an accurate Z axis position display The active diameter value is important when you program compensated moves and use cycles with built in tool compensation If tool diameter is correct compensated moves and cycles are executed accurately Enter tool length offsets and tool diameter values on the numbered lines of the Tool Table The numbered lines on the Tool Table identity the tool number T Code that activates those values You can program a tool activation as a separate block or include it within the block for most moves and cycles Tool activation s programmed as separate blocks are easier to find in a Program Listing The Tool Table can store information for up to a number of tools specified by the machine builder On machines equipped with collet type tool holders it is impractical to use the Tool Table to store tool length offsets You can set tool length offset at tool change T
111. text a In Edit Features marked blocks will be unmarked from the current location of the cursor to where it Is relocated to Touching the Mark button again to deactivate It will unmark all marked blocks When using a standard key board use the shift key and key board arrows to highlight multiple blocks If a mouse is being used hold down the mouse key and drag the cursor to highlight multiple blocks ACU RITE 35001 Manual Data System p O ae ile ol maybenew m Kaaa maybenew m Preview 1 Basic template conversational 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Plane XY 5 6 BlockForm XMax 1 5 YMax 1 5 ZMax 0 0000 XMin 1 YMin 1 ZMin 1 7 Tool 1 MCode 6 8 Offset Fixtures 1 9 RPM 1000 18 MCode 3 11 MCode 8 12 eb ENTER NEW PROGRAM CODE HERE 13 RectPock Length 625 Width 375 StartHgt 1 ZDepth 125 CCW 14 Dim Abs 15 Dim Incr 16 MCode 9 17 EndMain 28 Sub 1 21 taa ENTER OPTIONAL SUB PROGRAM HERE 22 Se N 111 O E E n O d 0 CS 9 m Y i gt Q m O E e O hom 0 T C S jad Y d gt Q m Deleting a program block There are two ways to delete program blocks from a Program Listing The following provide the steps necessary to delete a block or blocks aaa In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the Block first block to be deleted Touch the Delete Block button to delete on
112. the current position only once The sub program can be looped L G66 Pn Modal macro call Call macro n Execute macro at any X and or Y location given after the G66 code until G67 cancel is called G66 stays active until G67 is called G67 Cancel Modal Macro Call G66 O Sen O O ua A O O gt 5 lt q ACU RITE 35001 409 O Sen O O Sa A O O gt lt Y Macro Body Structure The macro body is defined in the same way as a sub program Format Oxxx O identifies it as a macro xxx IS the label number Example 1 N200 O 201 N210 Terminate the macro with an M99 code Use local variables within the body of a macro or sub program only You cannot use them to transfer data to other macros or sub programs If further sub program calls are made from the macro body you must transfer data from the local variables to common variables The common variables can then be referenced to transport data to the further sub program N220 100 20 N230 Common variables range from 100 to 220 The macro must either be part of the program from which It is called or included using the program inclusion code Refer to File Inclusion in this section 410 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Setting and Passing Parameters You can set parameters for a macro before the sub program call M98 Pn Refer to Example
113. the cycle Finish Stock Enter the Finish Stock amount Depth Cut Enter the depth per pass Prompt for islands Select if the pocket has islands After shape has been selected for the pocket you will be prompted to select shapes for islands O ve O O Sa A lt O E Setup tab Ramp Feed Enter the ramp feed Automatically calculated if tool Foal Data Data A sten 7 A a i Input Program Run enai Shutdown fell being used is defined in the Tool Table a m Ramp Feed Rough Feed Finish Feed 2 A E Rough Feed Enter the XY axes roughing feed rate Finish Feed Enter the XY axes finish feed rate Tool Enter the tool number to use for the cycle Coolant Choose None On M8 Off M9 or Mist M7 See Coolant on page 292 Spindle Dir Choose Forward Reverse Off or None See Spindle Direction on page 292 4 o o o 3 5 X o o 4 p z T O Use Cancel m LET MAA E E E OL AA RIS IA A AAA OREA LADEN A d A m 3 4 5 6 7 Shape A View Adjust ToolPath Create 5 Select Edit Layers Type View Edit Program Setup aw Exit ACU RITE 35001 303 Spindle Speed Enter the spindle speed Coarse Tool Enter the number of the tool used for the previous roughing pass Skip Rough Skip rough pass Skip Finish Skip finish pass Finish Dir Direction of the finish pass CW or CCW Comment Tab Ad
114. the expression is false At Block N740 the contents of variable 130 are compared with the constant 360 The result of the comparison is identical to the first case ACU RITE 35001 427 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q O z Sam O pee A O O gt O lt Y q q INEQUALITY OPERATORS NOT N760 WHILE 135 137 DO 10 N790 END 10 The exclamation mark symbolizes NOT Therefore Block N760 instructs the 3500i to continue the loop to N790 while the contents of variables 135 and 137 are not equal condition true When the contents of the variables become equal the expression is false and the loop terminates GREATER THAN N800 IF 122 gt 134 GOTO 830 The symbol gt symbolizes GREATER THAN Therefore Block N800 instructs the control to go to GOTO or jump to Block N830 if the contents of variable 122 are greater than the contents of variable 134 condition true If the expression is false execution continues to Block N810 LESS THAN N840 IF 123 lt 135 GOTO 880 The symbol lt symbolizes LESS THAN The function is the opposite of GREATER THAN and the expression is true when the contents of variable 123 are less than the contents of variable 135 Greater than gt and less than lt expressions become false if the contents of the compared variables are equal 428 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advance
115. the manual data input form programming applications are provided in this manual gt A full description of the above listed Cycles and Refer to chapter 7 Canned Cycles on page 149 Pocket Cycle Example From the bottom menu bar touch the Pocket Cycles button ENE anagement ane Touch Rectangular in the sub menu The touch screen displays a graphic of a rectangular milling cycle and the highlight bar is positioned in the first field on the form that is requiring data input The numeric pad is also displayed so that data can be entered into MUERE the required fields that are shown The Use button can be executed once all fields have been entered or the operation can be canceled 3 0000 at any time by touching the Cancel button i 3 1 Manual Data Input MDI 1k pili oe i Enter the data in each field for the pocket size and depth Use the Enter button on the numeric key pad to use the data entered in a field and move to the next field When the data has been entered touch the Enter button on the numeric pad The highlight bar will go to the next required field input and the graphic view changes to display graphically the next required data input When the data has been entered touch the Enter button again on the numeric pad or touch the More button to insert additional data ACU RITE 35001 45 The More button is used to enter additional or optional parameters regarding the machining of the
116. the program for editing using the Edit button ca Place the cursor anywhere in the program and touch Replace the Find Replace button In the Find input field type in only the text or code that is being searched for Touch Previous to search from cursor location to the beginning ae Or touch Next to search to the end of the program ex To find all instances of specific text or a code place the cursor at the beginning of the program Check the Match Case box to narrow the search parameters for specific text or a code rca Touch Cancel to exit the Find and Replace dialogue ance Manual Data System Obi sutim ED example 2 example 2 g Previous Next Replace All Match Case 17 Shape 1 subprogram 18 O1 19 G41 28 GO X4 7762 Y 3 5199 21 G1 X2 7683 Y 1 1099 22 G3 X1 8482 Y 2 7384 R 1 0000 23 G2 X3 4758 Y 4 1951 R2 0000 24 G3 X4 7762 Y 3 5199 R 0 7500 25 M99 B Delete Find Edit Preview tee nme ae rt mene een ia soe 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 1 OAADDAD 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Replace Specific Text or Code in a program Use the Find Replace button in Edit Mode to search for blocks or for specific text to be replaced Depending on cursor location in the program touch previous to search from cursor location to the beginning of the program or next to search to the end of the program Text
117. the spindle reversal at the bottom of the hole Field Code Description ZDepth Z Absolute hole depth Required StartHgt R Initial Z start point in rapid Required ReturnHgt P Z retract height after hole depth in rapid Dwell D Dwell time TPlorLead F Threads per Inch TPI in Inch mode or Lead Distance between threads in MM mode Required Syncspin S Synchronized Spindle No 0 or Yes 1 G code format G84 152 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Boring Bidirectional Cycle Boring Bidirectional is a boring cycle generally used to make a pass O ue AS Data Progran fun a EA ian fol in each direction on a bore or to tap with a self reversing tapping E s i head It feeds from the R plane to Z depth and then feeds back to th MMT Star the retract height Field Code Description ZDepth Z Absolute hole depth Required StartHgt R Initial Z start point in rapid Required 00100 Y 0 02650 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 Return Hot P Z return point after hole depth In rapid 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 N O gt O O Q N N 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 Feed F Feedrate 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 Dwell D Dwell time G code format G85 Boring Unidirectional Cycle Boring Unidirectional is a boring cycle that
118. the spindle to the specified Index Angle back off in X rapid retract in Z re position in X and restart the spindle Drill Cycle Chip Break A chip breaker peck drilling cycle is generally used to peck drill medium to deep holes The cycle feeds from the Start Height to the First Peck depth in Z rapid retracts the chip Break Increment feeds to the next calculated peck depth initial peck less Peck Decrement and continues this sequence until it reaches a Retract Depth or until Z Depth Is reached This cycle enables optimum drilling conditions for holes For maximum efficiency in deep hole drilling set parameters to accommodate the material and tool types used Generally the deeper the hole the smaller the Peck Decrement This prevents the binding of chips tool and work piece Set Retract Depth to retract the drill completely at set depth intervals O Sen O O A lt O it Drill Cycle Flat Bottom Boring A flat bottom boring cycle is generally used to program a pass in each direction with a dwell at the bottom The tool feeds from the Start Height to Z depth dwells for specified time then feeds to the Return Height ACU RITE 35001 297 Drilling dialogue The Drilling dialogue has 5 tabs available for inputting information for the desired drilling requirement Basic Setup Bolt Hole Pattern and Comment Drilling 5 E ee Basic Setup Bole Hole UN Note
119. to 1 H is forced to 1 as well otherwise the Default is O Optional The distance to go down from the top of part to find X amp Y coordinate of the center This is only used if H parameter is set to 1 Without any E value the cycle brings the probe stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the top 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it Default is 0 1 2 54 mm if not set Optional The distance from the starting point to move in the X axis to find the top of the part The default if Q is not set or set to O is 0 1 beyond the edge of the boss hole If O is set to 1 the default is the current probe position Optional Manual Data e 3 lage ae System t ofan io nside Outside Boss Preview In v 0 0000 14 Y Abs Inc 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 38 Arc Ccw X 0 16113 Y 0 45042 XCenter 0 08062 YCenter 0 03126 31 Arc Cw X 0 10449 Y 0 48650 XCenter 0 05664 YCenter 0 02642 32 Line X 0 10443 Y 0 48650 33 Arc Cw X 0 16109 Y 0 45037 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 34 Arc Ccw X 0 31588 Y 0 44772 XCenter 0 07804 YCenter 0 03631 35 Arc Cw X 0 34324 Y 0 46468 XCenter 0 02764 YCenter 0 01403 Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit g Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features 227 N 2 O gt O O E O Tim A N
120. to a progran DOCK sana n 360 Restore edits to a program DIOCK addons lt 360 Programi Text EGUN o taa 361 Merino TEE natalia nte ella 361 OVA NANO TON A Ae AeA eel lee io 361 Ping specie Textor code Inia Prodi da cian 362 Replace Specific Text or Code In a progTaM ooccnccnnccncncncnccnononcnnononenonineninonoss 363 HS SYS cme Ea E eee RR 364 Edit FS ae IM Uta 364 Pooran Debay cla ON id 365 A vatial tip bedaihtaven aoa nunmetacan etndotladatcedcsuneahons 365 11 2 G Code and M Code Definitions Sa E A A IN 366 Un A E AO 370 Typingim Address OTIS Aia o a 371 O A 371 11 3 Edit Help ACUTE lada 372 FICO Gla AIG SOL SC Sea cteta atcha T abe Reni an aaa tial 373 GS CTI ON Sorrir rre rta 374 Basie Modal FUNCION Sra a A 375 M ltocgmment BOC esla 375 ATO Sa ae raat acetates AA aa 3 6 BINE REE E E E EEN EE PE N E EAE EA EEE E A E E EET 376 POCKET CY CICS ariii aaa r a E G 377 Ming and Promesa 377 Rotation Salling anes MINON resres a do 378 PMA ODIA Tiara 378 A A laa ean eit 379 TOO RACIGSC ORNS C Sal Onset teehee i E OTAN 379 UIC Se UCT ON Sastre aes aoa o e o 380 Wrs Fe UNG ION tod ed teehee actors wetted A basanernaancera uaa mtene 381 AMS EUC UO iaoi T EA TE a 381 Basic ME FUNCTIONS sien ios 382 Cooling Cleaning and LUCI ION is ii 382 Soo O eee hoe aes 383 A A er ene ere Renae ane eee ee ees 383 11 4 Advanced Programming SFREE A atid cinch ate le aaah asl Waa eee ah ald eet leet ath dene da htt ae arlene 384 WI SUING LOIS e
121. to be inserted and touch the Insert Block button With the cursor at the beginning of the new empty dais block line touch the Paste button to move the selected blocks to the new location Canceling edits to a program block Using the Undo button sequentially steps backwards undoing all previous steps Touch the Undo button to undo one or more recent actions taken in sequential reverse order Continue touching the Undo button will continue to remove recent actions taken in sequential reverse order Restore edits to a program block Using the redo button to reverse edits made to a program and restore the block s to Its edited form Touch the Redo button to redo one or more recent undo Continuing to touch the Redo button will continue to redo recent undo 360 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Program Text Editing Buttons are provide to assist with program text editing Scroll bars and page navigation buttons are available to move around in the program A Find Replace feature is also provided to locate and or replace specific text This feature also allows the user to locate specific blocks throughout a program A description of these buttons are found on page 355 Inserting Text The Insert button will allow text to be inserted on the program block without overwriting the existing text When this key Is not activated all text inserted in that block will overwrite existing text Locate the block t
122. to be repeated for every boss hole you wish to find or whose position you want to reestablish When positioning the probe from within the program you should always use the G146 Protected Probe Positioning cycle see G146 instructions later in this document or use the I J or K cycle parameters for the same purpose Execute the line in Manual Data Input Mode by touching Start 228 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Inside Outside Web Finding An inside Web is a slot An outside Web is a standing rib Webs can only be measured in the X or Y axis Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work probe The tool offset and work coordinate must be active before using this cycle in a program See Section 4 Tool Length Offsets on page 73 The G145 Inside or Outside Web Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or from the Manual Data Input Mode Field Code Side Q Length X Width Y Top H DistDown E DistBack V DistInxX A ACU RITE 35001 Description Inside or Outside O Inside Hole 1 Outside Boss Required Estimated X width of Web if measuring in the X axis X or Y must be specified but only one not both Estimated Y width of Web if measuring in the Y axis X or Y must be specified but only one not both If set to 1 the cycle finds the top of the part before finding center of Web If O para
123. to dialogue Right Click amp Drag Navigate pan graphics area Scroll Wheel Zoom graphics area in and out Graphics Area 3D Tool Path Views Refer to Viewing Tools CNTRL Right Click amp Drag Rotates the 3D tool path view Geometry and Shapes Activates pop up dialogue Properties Show geometry properties Copy Shape Prompts to copy shape Refer to Copying a shape only available when a shape is selected Move Shape Prompts to move a shape Right Click Refer to Moving a shape only available when a shape is selected Delete Deletes selected geometry Delete All Deletes all geometry Delete Shape Deletes only a shape and not geometry only available when a shape is selected 280 10 CAM Programming CAM Mode Screen In CAM Mode the CNC displays the CAM Mode screen e a 3 ae to example 2 dxf Layer EE E PE ATEL Y 2 788 00 00 00 Status Bar Displays the program name active layer and mouse AS x E E cursor position and estimated machining time Main Toolbar Section 1 Geometry Tools Modifying Tools Viewing Tools Main Toolbar Section 2 Modifying Tools Main Toolbar Section 3 Viewing Tools Side Toolbar Displays options for Geometry Tools Graphics Display Area Displays geometry shape and Tool Paths Message and Prompt Display Displays messages or prompts user for input 8 Buttons Offer various functionality based on tool type or button chosen ape l iew j
124. toggles between Absolute and Incremental mode Milling activates the bottom menu bar for e g Rapid Line Arc More Milling opens the menu for additional milling operations e g Offset Plane Feed Delete Block deletes a single block located at the Cursor Drill Cycles opens the menu to select the type of drill cycle that is to be defined Pocket Cycles opens the menu to select the type of pocket cycle that is to be defined Other Cycles opens the menu to select other types of machining operations that is to be defined Edit Features activates the bottom menu bar for editing features e g Find Mark Copy Exit exits the Program Edit feature 6 Conversational Editing Conversational Data Input Cycles Milling Button pages and programming applications are provided in this manual Refer to Chapter 7 2 Canned Cycles on page 149 A full description of the cycles described on the following Select the Milling button to display the milling button R features in the bottom bar menu Milling RPM Entry Move Rapid Line Arc Exit Move Tool Repeat Sub Programs When editing or creating a new program the Conversational Data Input display provides help screen graphics with each data input dialogue When text is required the on screen keyboard appears and the same when numeric information is required the numeric key pad is displayed The display shown is for milling a line When a bottom horizontal menu butto
125. width of cut in the X and Y axes as it mills out the slot Defaults to tool radius which is the max The depth of each cut per pass Defaults to tool diameter Max is the full ZDepth in parameter Z less bottom finish stock A negative value will cause the finish pass to finish the side walls in steps down X coordinate of the slot center point Defaults to current position Manual Data System e 3 sate eD to 1 15k i jpn Preview 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 EE Em 2 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 286 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 287 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 EN 288 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 4 gt Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit 9 Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field YCenter FinStock SideStock ZFeed Rough Feed FinFeed RetractHgt Coarse Tool SkipRough SkipFinish Direction G code format G211 Code O ACU RITE 35001 Description Y coordinate of the slot center point Defaults to current position Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass This amount applies to the sides and bottom unless R SideStock
126. with X Y and Z axis In rapid linear and circular moves The U axis IS always synchronous to the XYZ moves Rotary Program rotary moves In degrees The typical resolution is 0 001 degrees Minutes and seconds cannot be programmed Therefore you must convert minutes and seconds to a decimal value Conversion formula Converting from minutes seconds to decimal degrees Minutes to decimal min 60 decimal degrees Seconds to decimal sec 3600 decimal degrees Example Minutes15 min 60 0 25 degrees Example Seconds30 sec 3600 0 008 degrees Example Convert 5 DEG 30 MIN 15 SEC to decimal degrees 5 30 60 15 3600 5 0 5 0 004 5 504 When the U axis is programmed alone without an X Y or Z linear move you must program a feedrate for the U axis in degrees per minute dpm Format FU 500 0 500 dpm for the U axis FU is also allowed when the U axis is linear A feedrate is programmed in in min or mm min 432 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Rotary Axis Programming Conventions A rotary axis typically U programs differently based on the setting of the Axes gt PhysicalAxis gt U gt CfgRollOver gt Shortest Distance parameter which is determined by the builder The default for this parameter is off in which case the U axis behaves like a linear axis If set to on the behavior of the rotary axis U is described below If programming the U axis in Absolute The rotary axis never
127. you use T1 to activate a tool later in the program the Tool Table offsets for Tool 1 are used not the values programmed via T1 Dn Rn Ln It is recommended that you use the Tool Table to avoid confusion or possible entry errors on the offsets 72 4 Tool Management Tool Length Offsets Tool length offset is the distance from ZO Machine Home to the tip of the tool at the part ZO the surface of the work Tool length offsets allow each tool used in the part program to be referenced to the part surface In an idle state the CNC does not have a tool length offset active Therefore Tool 0 TO is active When TO is active all Z dimensions are in reference to the Z Home position When you program T1 all Z dimensions become referenced to the surface on which the tool length offset of Tool 1 was activated For machines that do not have a Z axis automatic homing feature you must set the ZO position of the Z axis Usually it is the fully retracted Up position of the quill or machine head Tool Length Offsets are referenced to this position Because tools differ in length ZO axis Part Zero is not set the same way as XO or YO The tool length offset is the distance from the tip of the tool to the top of the part Enter a length offset for each tool in the Tool Table With tool length offsets active the Z axis position display reads 0 00 when the active tool moves to Part Zero Tool length offsets simplify programming Ente
128. 0 Activate a tool prior to programming so cutter diameter is known Ye O gt O O Q N N Field Code Description Length M Length of pocket in X axis Required Width W Width of pocket in Y axis Required a he EA O 2 Dim Abs StartHgt H Z absolute starting height 0 1 or 2mm i Feed 0 above surface Executed in rapid A Required _ ZDepth Z Absolute depth of pocket Required StepOver A The distance the tool steps over width of cut in the X and Y axes as It mills out the pocket Defaults to tool radius which is the max XCenter X X coordinate of the pocket center point Defaults to current position YCenter Y Y coordinate of the pocket center point Defaults to current position CornerRad U The arc radius of all four corners of the pocket Defaults to tool radius which is the minimum value allowed DepthCut B The depth of each cut per pass Defaults to tool diameter Max is the full ZDepth in parameter Z less bottom finish stock A negative value will cause the finish pass to finish the side walls in steps down FinStock S Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass This amount applies to the sides and bottom unless R SideStock is defined then S FinStock only applies to the bottom Default is no stock left 174 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field SideStock RampFeed Rough Feed FinFeed ReturnHgt Coarse Tool SkipRough
129. 0 10558 Field Code Description Zi Length X The feedrate at which the tool will ramp a AAA AAA O A a P a Abs Inc Milling Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features Exit into the pocket in all three axes Default is last programmed feedrate Width Y Feedrate used during finish passes Default is last programmed feedrate StartHgt H The Absolute Z position before beginning the facing cycle This must be 0 1 or 2 mm above the surface Executed in rapid Required ZDepth Z Absolute depth of the finished surface Required NOTE ZDepth must be lower than StartHgt StartHgt is 0 1 2 0 mm above the work surface XStepOver A Width of cut in the X axis direction When you do not enter a value the CNC defaults to 70 of the active tool radius Maximum step over permitted is 70 of the active tool radius YStepOver B Width of cut in the Y axis direction When you do not enter a value the CNC defaults to 70 of the active tool radius Maximum stepover permitted is 70 of the active tool radius Feed F Feedrate used In cycle ACU RITE 35001 161 Field Code Description XStart D X coordinate of the starting point Defaults to current position NOTE Type the required absolute X Start and Y Start coordinates when possible YStart E Y coordinate of the starting point Defaults to current position NOTE Type the required absolute X Start and Y Start coordinates when possible T 2 O gt
130. 0 55 13 97 mm or the tool may crash into the probe or table If you enter a value larger than 0 55 13 97 mm the control issues an error message If E is not set the cycle uses a default value of 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Default 0 1 Ball nose cutters and special cutters that require a move down more than 0 55 13 97 mm are not supported NOTE Z Retract Amount is set in the Tool Probe Parameters This is the override for the fast Z feedrate that was set In the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast Sometimes there may be a tool that has a large diameter making It necessary to slow it down to prevent the touch probe from being hit too hard This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original feedrate Optional This Is the override for the medium feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium This is used for the same reason as the F cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original feedrate Optional 205 TA lt O gt Q O O Sam A N N 2 O gt O O O ES A m N To use the automatic tool preset Field OvrSlwFeed OvrRPM 206 Code S Description This is the override for the slow feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow This is used for the same reason as th
131. 001 75 4 2 Tool Data Contouring with radius compensation The tool center moves along the contour at a distance equal to the radius Right or left are to be understood as based on the direction of tool movement along the work piece contour as viewed Y from behind a moving tool jad O 8 p N vr 76 4 Tool Management Radius compensation Machining corners E Outside corners If you program radius compensation the CNC moves the tool around outside corners on a transitional arc If necessary the CNC reduces the feed rate at outside corners to reduce machine stress tor example at very great changes of direction Inside corners The CNC calculates the intersection of the tool center paths at inside corners under radius compensation From this point it then starts the next contour element This prevents damage to the work piece The permissible tool radius therefore is limited by the geometry of the programmed contour A 4 2 Tool Data ACU RITE 3500i 77 Ramping into a Compensation Move Entry moves allow a smooth transition into a contour Allowing a way to avoid areas you do not want to affect with the tool when entering a contour Entry Move button G36 If an entry move without compensation is required program a tool with 0 radius Four types of entry moves are available Refer to Line Tangent Entry Move Line Perpendicular Entry Move Arc Tangent Entry Mo
132. 010000 etu Selection Output Display ODP 313 O S ben O Q pe A lt O a Display tab Shape Color Color to display shapes Default value is Yellow CAM Setup Shape First Color Color of the first geometry object of a shape Selection Output Display LI Default value is White Default Color Color of all geometry objects Default value is Cyan Highlight Color Color of geometry objects that are highlighted Default value is Yellow Side Indicator Color Color of the shape machining side indicator Default value is Yellow Mouse Pos Resolution Positions after decimal point to display for mouse positions in top header bar Default value is 3 Grid Size Size of the grid to display Default value is 1 Show Shape IDs Show the shape ID numbers in the display vee amiy cancer Default value is No O ES pe O Q pe A lt O o Tool Table tab See Tool Table on page 325 314 10 CAM Programming View Buttons O CAM Mode View buttons allow different views of tool paths They will S manipulate the tool path view depending on the type of view selected View Type and Adjust View buttons are activated by selecting the 3D tool path View button in the Viewing Tools Toolbar View Type view The View Type button opens the View Type button 5 dialogue of additional buttons for the way the tool Som
133. 02 Prooral Edit Screen ala pito ees 103 Fograim EAE OUR ON apio ada 104 Conversational Data Input Cycles ssid cotsterstnzvatiersiVecettuain ddvaitiwretlatentea i eantatwaeeetennedl 105 MUNA BUTTON AA A ae barista ane bng eeu 105 Miling Feature BUTTONS aparta cda 106 More MINO BUO ars a aa es 107 EMSA LUGS BURON atari T a A E 108 Pocket Cycles BUON A E 109 Other veles BUHO Meios 110 A CMO Stoica aati hone Nea wh cer E A O E 111 INGLE KAO OO GIT WOO ns 111 URManea DOCK ODIOS uan ls 111 Deleting progran DOCK sneren aa ET a A AAA 112 ISSUING a progran PlOCK ada a cen 112 CODY Faste Blocksina e eee oes 113 Movng Blocks ma PLOT ario dd 113 Canceling edits toa program Dic asi 113 Restore edits to a program DICK 114 ado e A 114 Inserting program blocks using keypad DOtkeyS c occcocccccccccconncccnonnconnnnonon 114 FOOT ari exceda 115 Find Specific Text or Code in a prograM ss ssssissriesrerrsrrerresrerrrerrerrerrerrrere 115 Prodan Edit FrEE ea E aan ances E akon 116 Proview Ide Bar Men nestu T la ieaoiidd 116 Preview Features Menu iria A is 117 Pogram D Day Rela IO sta dd 118 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Fel xvi Explaining Basic Cycles RORO MINS ere at meh cet cl rt Oe A attendee 120 INS Fe CMC listens A A Mihi eat hia ca ae 120 VEVO LOsLe MS COMET AOU CLIO sasiaren iaa E NOE 120 i e to Arc Comer OID CLIN dos 121 ACIOA comer ROUMO O idad 121 CHATE Oly tii A 121 35001 FOC A dapdc vs feteva
134. 1 Blocks 10 to 12 define variable values for the sub program called in Block 13 Example 1 N10 151 2 N11 151 8 N12 151 3 4 N13 M98 P1 N14 It may be more convenient to use macro call G65 Pn or G66 Pn to pass variables to the sub program by letter address This is how a canned cycle operates Refer to Example 2 Values are passed on for parameters A B and C O Sen O O ua A O O gt 5 lt q Example 2 N20 G65 P1 A2 B3 C3 4 N21 Macro call G65 Pn contains a loop option Ln Where n is the number of repetitions of the sub program called N20 G65 P1 A2 B3 C3 4 L3 Nai es Macro 1 is called three times Ln equals 3 When parameters are passed to a macro body by letter address the contents of the parameters are stored in local variables Letter Addresses A 1 B 2 C 3 D 7 E 8 F 9 H 11 4 J 5 K 6 M 13 Q 17 R 18 S 19 T 20 U 21 V 22 W 23 X 24 Y 25 Z 26 ACU RITE 35001 411 O G65 Macro Programming Main E The following is an example of a simple macro program In this example the macro is a window milling cycle designed to mill a Square or rectangular window through a part Block Block N1 O99 WINDOW MACRO CALL N2 G90 G70 GO G17 0 O N3 TO O N4 ZO N5 XO YO gt a N6 T1 5000 DIA N7 G90 GO X1 Y1 ue N8 Z 1 N9 F40 N10 G65 P3 X4 Y4 Z 55 N11 G90 GO Z 1 N12 TO N13 ZO N14 XO YO N15
135. 1 Rotate Forward rotates the part down incrementally al with each touch of the button aa Touch the Reset Rotate button to return to the default display orientation The drawing view can also be rotated by touching and dragging on the touch screen from anywhere in Draw Pan Drawing View When the 2D or 3D Wire Frame buttons or 3D Shaded View button is selected the Pan button Is activated ACU RITE 35001 Manual Data System e 3 Input sr cal SE gt po 1 Simple setup for easy tesi 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L i 6 7 Call sub program s 4 O a 1 Simple setup for easy tesi 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L 1 6 7 Call sub program s 4 Adjust Move Ja E Manual Data System eal Dale uae o 261 gt de O E 00 S The following is a description of the panning buttons that are available Manual Data i A Button Function Pan Right Pans the part to the right incrementally a T with each touch of the button 00 T E _ _ lt _qqX2qZqXK AA AAAAAAAAA SS Pan Left Pans the part to the left incrementally with each touch of the button Pan Up Pans the part up incrementally with each BEE oinas 0 fo easy tesla y touch of the button Feed Ba AAA T1 D 01 L 1 Pan Down Pans the part down incrementally with Hr cel ci each touch of the button A x10 amplifies or increases each Right Left Up
136. 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 08132 YCenter 0 05632 i g 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 The Rectangular Profile Cycle automatically compensates for tool ait Arc Cow X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 diameter Activate the correct tool diameter before the cycle block Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit g Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features Field Code Description Length M Finished length of rectangle Required Width W Finished width of rectangle Required StartHgt H The Absolute Z position before beginning to mill the pocket This must be 0 1 or 2 mm above the surface Required ZDepth Z Absolute depth of the finished profile Required Ramp R Radius of the ramping moves Required Side A Setting for cutting on the inside of the profile In or the outside Out Required O Inside 1 Outside XCenter X X coordinate of the center If no coordinate is entered the CNC centers the profile at its present position YCenter Y Y coordinate of the center If no coordinate is entered the CNC centers the profile at its present position ACU RITE 35001 169 Field Code Description CornerRad U Corner radius setting If the programmer enters a negative value both direction of cut and the starting and endpoints reverse Ye O gt Q O D Q N N ZFeed Z axis feedrate Rough J Roug
137. 1400 are comment blocks that regard the macro s structure and concept Block Block N1255 01255 SLOTMAC G O N1260 O Som N1270 EXAMPLE G65 P1255 X 3 Y1 Z 125 A5 B12 C10 aL O N1280 P SUB b O N1290 X XDIMOFSLOT 24 N1300 Y YDIMOFSLOT 25 E N1310 Z ABS DEPTH OF SLOT 26 lt N1320 A 7 FEEDRATE 1 N1330 B XYFEEDRATE 2 e N1340 C ANGLE FROM 3 o clock 3 N1350 N1360 NOTES N1370 1 SLOT WILL HAVE FULL RAD N1380 2 MUST POS N XY OVER CENTER OF L LEFT RAD N1390 3 PROGRAM SLOT LENGTHWISE IN X ANGLE C WILL ROTATE N1400 O Sen O Q Saa A 5 d O e gt lt Block N1410 N1420 N1430 N1440 N1450 N1460 N1470 N1480 N1490 N1500 N1510 N1520 N1530 416 Block G90 GO Z 1 G61 Z 26 F 1 G68 C 3 G91 G41 G64 X 1 Y 25 2 F 2 Kel G3 XO Y 25 10 J 25 2 G1 X ABS ABS 24 ABS 25 G3 XO Y 25 10 J 25 2 G1 X ABS ABS 24 ABS 25 G1 G40 Y 25 2 G68 G90 GO Z 1 M99 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Macro Programming Hole Milling Macro This example machines a CW or CCW hole A move is made to the hole center and to the required Z depth before calling the macro After the macro is completed the Z axis moves to the clearance plane The macro contains tangential entry to and exit from the hole surface It uses error checking and messages When the macro is finished machine parameters retur
138. 19 Call 12 28 Call 13 21 EndMain v 22 23 Sub program definition s y 24 z o o 1 Aga 6 Conversational Editing Copy Paste Blocks in a program Multiple blocks can be copied and inserted in the same way Copy Paste Highlight the selected blocks to copy and touch the Copy button Place the cursor at the beginning of a block where the copied blocks are to be inserted and touch the Paste button The selected blocks have now been added in at that location Moving Blocks in a program Moving one or more blocks is accomplished by using the Cut button Edit Features Mark Paste In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the first of one or more blocks to be moved then touch the Edit Features button Touch the Mark button Use the Arrow keys to mark additional blocks below or above the cursor location Touch the Cut button to remove the block or blocks selected and place them onto the clipboard Move the cursor to the beginning of the block line where the cut blocks are to be inserted before touch the Paste button to move the selected blocks to the new location Canceling edits to a program block Using the Undo button sequentially steps backwards undoing all previous steps Touch the Undo button to undo one or more recent actions taken in sequential reverse order Continue touching the Undo button will continue to remove recent actions taken ACU RITE 35001 in seq
139. 2 Y 3 5199 R 0 7500 25 M99 B 11 1 G Code Program Editing Unmark a block or blocks Insert Block E In Edit Features marked blocks will be unmarked from the current location of the cursor to where it is relocated to Use the Arrow keys to unmark additional blocks and text Touching the Mark button again to deactivate it will unmark all marked blocks When using a standard key board use the shift key and keyboard arrows to highlight multiple blocks If a mouse is being used hold down the mouse button and drag the cursor to highlight multiple blocks ACU RITE 35001 357 Delete a Character gt While in the Edit Features Mode place the cursor to the right of the character to be deleted A Use the Back Space button to delete one character at a atime If multiples characters or blocks are highlighted the Back Space button will delete all that is highlighted Deleting a program block There are two other ways to delete program blocks from a Program Shutdown 2 28pm fal Listing The following provide the steps necessary to delete a block s06iSIot g or blocks R 3500iSlot g In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the EXA Delete O y LLI a O S A v O 7 O q q first block to be deleted Touch the Delete Block a e ee F LD button to delete one block at a time ES epee e End pr Z gt In Edit Features place the cursor at the beginning of e a
140. 35001 Manual Data e 3 A ngrave Cycle review RA feme i MO e 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 286 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 287 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 288 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit g Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features System aa 3 59 el Preview i Exit Features 195 N O gt O oS Q Q N N T O gt O O D Q N N Y coordinate for lower left corner of the first Angle in degrees Default is O degrees Mirrors all X moves Set by selecting Yes Mirrors all Y moves Set by selecting Yes Field Code XStart X YStart Y Angle C MirrorX U MirrorY V Feed F Feedrate used while engraving Default is current feedrate Optional G code format G190 196 Description X coordinate for lower left corner of the first character Defaults to current position if not given Optional character Defaults to current position if not given Optional Optional in this field Optional in this field Optional 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Programming the Arc Engrave Cycle 3 To program the Arc Engrave Cycle huida 10
141. 35001 259 Adjust Block Form Touch the Adjust B1k Form button to open the bottom ODES ae menu block form buttons TER m gt a O 00 The bottom menu now displays the Adjust block buttons Adjust In Adjust Out Left Side Right Side Top Bottom Front and Back The Reset Adjust button resets the graphic to the original image before adjust block activity ae co 1 Simple setup for easy tesi 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L 1 6 Touch the Previous Menu button to return to the previous menu bar 7 Call sub program s Adjust Adjust e y Zoom Touch the Zoom button to open the bottom menu Zoom buttons Touch the Zoom In button to enlarge the part view Touch the Zoom Out button to shrink the part view Touch the Reset Zoom button to return to the original displayed view Touch the Previous Menu button to return to the previous menu bar Zoom can also be done with a mouse wheel 260 8 Drawing Programs Rotate Drawing View Touch the Rotate button to access the directional rotate buttons The display can also be rotated by touching the screen and dragging Button Function Rotate CW rotates the part to the right incrementally with each touch of the button Rotate CCW rotates the part to the left incrementally with each touch of the button Pa Rotate Backward rotates the part up incrementally with each touch of the button f
142. 5001 jumps to Block N600 The number after DO is a label identifier only and the same number must be used to identify the END of the loop 424 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features In place of an expression you can use a variable that while not zero is treated as a true expression Zero equals false Any other value equals true DO END N620 DO nnnn N670 END nnnn DO END sets the program into an infinite loop that can only be ended by programming a GOTO 1111 command to another block DO and END must be paired with labels nnnn When executed the program repeats Blocks N630 to N660 until the expression at N650 becomes true and program execution continues at block 1111 Unconditional LOOP Repeat Conditional statements require that a test be strictly true or false in order for a particular course of action to be taken Unconditional statements are acted on without a logical precondition LOOP END N680 LOOP nnnn N695 END ACU RITE 35001 425 O Sen O O ua A O O gt 5 lt q O Sen O Q S A O O gt lt Y LOOP instructs the control to execute the following blocks N685 until it reaches an END command The sequence is repeated nnnn times The number of loops can be a variable assignment LOOP 121 GOTO N698 GOTO nnnn GOTO is an instruction to continue program execution at the block specified nnnn
143. 750 ua e O gt LL q N ACU RITE 35001 33 Itioning T O a E O 5 N N 2 2 Manual Machine Positioning Jog Mode Moves You can make or change jog moves when the CNC is in Manual Data Input Mode Teach Mode or in the Tool Page and the servos are on Jog Mode Description Rapid Default rapid speed for continuous jogs Actual speed determined at machine setup Feed Continuous jog at feedrate determined at machine setup Jog 100 Conventional Jog Mode increment set to 100 times machine resolution Jog 10 Conventional Jog Mode increment set to 10 times machine resolution Jog 1 Conventional Jog Mode increment set to actual machine resolution Changing the Jog Mode Jog move modes with the exception of Jog Rapid Mode are performed at the currently active feedrate The CNC displays the active Jog Mode in the Machine Status Display Area See Axis Jog keys on page 274 In Manual Data Input Mode Press the JOG key to select a jog feed rate Pressing the JOG key continually cycles through the modes listed above Incremental Moves To make a jog increment move press the JOG key to select a Jog 100 Jog 10 or Jog 1 mode Press the Axis keys for the desired axis to step the axis in the corresponding direction at the designated resolution Continuous Moves To manually position the machine using continuous movement press the JO
144. 78 Hne Tangent Entry MOVE ti di cis 78 Line Perpendicular Entry MOVE iva aio 78 Arc Tangent ENY IOMA Ad 79 Line Arc Tangent Entry MOVe narran rra ri 79 Special Code Temporary Change of Tool Diameter oocoocccnccccccnccnnccncccncnnnncnos 80 TOA CAMPERS ION Fa ena ticet ita neste tana eat heats aber aidak ead ioicateies 81 Patrol Tool During Tool COMmPCN SATION cessere 81 Mt rsecuad ROMS tai dos 82 Compensation Around ACUTE ANOS tactil lll 82 Genera bere cauto Sii lin 83 Fure Oset Toome an aiclo tinea E TT 84 sI 84 Activate Tool Life Managemen tesoira ARE 84 LocK Or INO K d TOO aay aT T T REA 85 Replacement OO A Stadia ated nec id e 85 Program Management 5 1 Program Management Introduction ACCESSING Program Maa d 88 Programi SCTCC Descrip dl das 88 Frogra Mania der Ment Das 89 TE FUNCION BUTON Srs 90 Display window arado Menta ica 91 5 2 Program Manager Functions FOIE FI rn T T T A a 92 PRON INCE a Folder FRITET aruo os 92 VB UTON FANC UON eae E NE AAA 93 SONAE CONTEN aia 95 Progra PI ODES ana 95 FAC CY Clee DI MAA err E EEEE AR N 96 A 96 5 3 Creating Editing amp Selecting to Run reali Near OM edit A Gia ee 97 Edino o A a A 97 selectina a Program o RUN iia 98 Podran o CISC OMT ses idad 98 Using custom program templates iaa a 99 To create custom program templates occooccocccccnoccnccncocnnnnnonnnonnnneneninnnnnnnnnns 99 35001 Conversational Editing 6 1 Conversational Programming Ea La AA A A 1
145. 8 16 GO Z2 0 17 M3 18 G78 M50 W24 6 H2 Z 2 U7 I100 J500 K500 P30 19 T6 D6 35 L 360 750 oa GA YTR 9 V 5M R Select To access the Edit Help Screen In Edit Mode with the appropriate program opened Touch Help The Edit Help screen activates Select the functional group from the top left and the specific G Codes are displayed on the top right Select the specific G Code that you want to add and touch the Select key or double tap the G Code number Select Touch the More button and Other button to provide additional data if needed Touch the Use button to add the code to your program or Cancel to exit without making a change pls Data System spiral to a t 0 0 O The screen returns to the Edit mode oor e os 2 1 GO G71 G90 XYZ 2 1 La 2 G120 X 220 Y 150 Z100 I 360 J 245 K 200 3 G53 02 X 364 36 Y 146 28 Z5 0 4 G53 02 5 GO X76 2 Y 50 8 6 T1 D8 L 200 7 GO 22 0 8 S1000 M3 ani 7A FINA _ Delete Find Edit Preview em 372 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Help Graphic Screens The Edit Help allows a G Code to be programmed using a form The form contains parameters for the G Code and a graphic parameter aid for each When the 35001 activates a help graphic screen its first entry field is highlighted A highlight indicates that values can be typed in an entry field or make the appropriate selection Press ENTER to move the highlight to the nex
146. 9 5 L 359 160 15 GO X76 2 Y 50 8 16 GO Z2 0 17 M3 18 G78 M50 W24 6 H2 Z 2 U7 110 19 T6 D6 35 L 360 750 28 GO X76 2 Y 50 8 21 GO Z2 0 v 22 M3 23 G77 H2 Z 5 D19 I500 K500 P 24 T9 D8 L 250 AD 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Program Display Relation A program line can be selected in the editing area or preview area When selected it is highlighted in purple in the preview area When Manual Data System f O Go real E al A selected from the preview area the cursor defaults to its program line 26128 X 200 Y 1S 2100 1 260 3 2 a In the editing area ES X 364 36 Y 146 28 Z5 5 GO X76 2 Y 50 8 6 T1 D8 L 200 7 GO 22 0 8 S1000 M3 9 G1 Z0 F200 18 T2 D8 0 L 351 757 11 GO 22 0 12 M3 13 G75 N76 2 450 8 H2 Z 2 1100 14 T3 D9 5 L 359 160 15 GO X76 2 Y 50 8 16 GO 22 0 17 M3 18 G78 M50 W24 6 H2 Z 2 U7 11d 19 T6 D6 35 L 360 750 28 GO X76 2 Y 50 8 21 GO 22 0 22 113 v 23 G77 H2 Z 5 D19 1500 K500 P Y 24 T9 D8 L 250 z Edit Help Preview O y Lu de O hom 0 O 3 Q Q q a q Edit Help is also available when using Edit Preview To access Edit Help after Edit Preview has been activated touch the Help button Manual Data System O om 3 2 to 3500iTST G G Code Assist Code Assis a G code Description la GO Rapid Move EndPoint G1 Feed Move EndPoint G2 Arc CW Radius and EndPoint G3 Arc CC
147. A a Cooling Cleaning and Lubrication dale lee Fu Spindle Probing Spindle Functions a Tool Probing Tool Change Tool Radius Compensation gOther G Functions Descriptions of M Codes have been described previously aM Functions see page 370 dl All Basic M Functions Cooling Cleaning and Lubrication om Spindle Functions Tool Change ioe aa Tools Q L 3 LL a All M Functions M code Description al All M Functions Program Stop Mode Optional Program Stop End of Program Spindle Forward Spindle Reverse Spindle Off Tool Coolant On Coolant Off Spindle Orientation Jump to New Program Call SubProgram End of SubProgram Select M105 Dry Run All Axes M106 Dry Run No Z Axis M107 Dry Run Off Cancel M105 and M1 SPEED Spindle Speed v Select ACU RITE 35001 381 Basic M Functions M code Description The Basic M Functions enables MO Program Stop Mode gt M1 Optional Program Stop gt M2 End of Program gt M30 Jump to New Program M98 Call SubProgram gt M99 End of SubProgram gt M105 Dry Run All Axes gt M106 Dry Run No Z Axis gt M107 Dry Run Off Cancel M105 and M106 11 3 Edit Help 4 Cooling Cleaning and Lubrication M code Description The Cooling Cleaning and Lubrication Blocks enables M8 Coolant On gt M9 Coolant Off Select 382 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Spindle Functions
148. ACU RITE 1 XZ MERCEDES DEMO FOR A z USE T2 8MM BALL MILL 451 0000 G53001 OFFSET 251 2000 LEFT EDGE OF PART IS 440 0000 LOWER EDGE OF PART IS Z TOP 45MM 1 771 HATERIAL 8 00 5 90 blkfrm x452 y 250 245 0 ACU RITE O LO o os me t Ez E J c Q Controls of the 3500i Keys on visual display unit Power control keys Key Numerical keys ey A goageagalsigsia a Function NC Start key i e run a program Stop key i e stop a program Servo Reset activates servo motors Function Zero key One key Two key Three key Four key Five key Six key Seven key Eight key Nine key Decimal key Data Entry keys Function Plus Minus toggle key CLEAR CLEAR key clears selections i e values ENTER key activates selections and 08 a z lt m entries Axis Keys Key Function X Axis Y Axis Z Axis UAxis Touch OWERTY keyboard Key Board BESS 000 lt 00 000 0 600 Ela JL be LS J Numeric Touch Pad s Numeric Pad Calculator Pad Axis Jog keys Navigation keys O Key Function Key Function T JOG Cycles the CNC through manual Mm movement modes RAPID JOG JOG d FEED JOG 100 JOG 10 JOG 1 lt re Manually moves X axis in positive uj X direction D ARROW over up down to move highlight E Y Manually moves X axis in negative a a direction O a Manuall
149. ADIUS 36 35 2 INTERMEDIATE RADIUS G64 CONTOURING MODE IF 7 gt 0 THEN COUNTER CLOCKWISE G91 F 5 G01 X 34 Y 34 GOS X 34 Y 34 34 JO G03 X0 YO 10 J 33 GO3 X 34 Y 34 10 J 34 G01 X 34 Y 34 IF 19 gt EPSI amp 6 gt EPSI THEN IF FINISH PASS G91 F 6 G01 X 36 Y 36 G03 X 36 Y 36 I 36 JO G03 XO YO I0 J 35 GOS X 36 Y 36 10 J 36 G01 X 36 Y 36 ENDIF ELSE CLOCKWISE G91 F 5 G01 X 34 Y 34 G02 X 34 Y 34 134 JO G02 X0 YO 10 J 33 G02 X 34 Y 34 l0 J 34 G01 X 34 Y 34 IF 19 gt EPSI amp 6 gt EPSI THEN IF FINISH PASS 420 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features G91 F 6 G01 X 36 Y 36 G02 X 36 Y 36 136 JO G02 X0 YO 10 J 35 G02 X 36 Y 36 10 J 36 G01 X 36 Y 36 ENDIF FINISH PASS ENDIF CLOCKWISE IFC SAVEFRT gt EPSI THEN F SAVEFRT ENDIF RESTORE FEEDRATE G SAVEG9O RESTORE G90 91 G SAVEGOO RESTORE G00 01 M99 ACU RITE 35001 421 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q O Sam O O pe A O O gt O lt Y q q Probe Move G31 G31 is to be issued with an associated axis move i e G31 X10 When the G31 is executed it moves at current feedrate selected for G1 until the touch probe selected is deflected At this point the move is stopped and the position where the probe touched t
150. Any button that has a second function small gray dot in seconds Y T T k O Y v O O 2 O E jad hom O o O M q ACU RITE 35001 21 Program Run Select a program to run Touch the Program Run button The CNC loads 4 the program The name of the currently loaded program is displayed in e e SAR a npu anagemen aintenance the Program Name field at the center of the screen There are two modes of programed operation Single Step Mode Runs a program one block at a time See Using Draw with running programs on page 270 Y e 0 pa O Y o O Automatic Mode Runs a program automatically without pausing id O See Auto mode on page 266 aaan 3 c e Blockforn Max 1 YMax 1 ZHax 0 8 1 Program Run main mode button Offa Patron 5 3 RPM 1000 2 Single Step and Auto buttons Default is Auto it Mode 8 Sa i 12 kkk kkk ENTER NEW PROGRAM C a 3 Program display i ys o 4 Program status display gt O 5 Manual button cancels the program So Sey EJ pE e 5 2 Draw View Mm When Draw Is activated a display window opens When the program Manual Data Program EA sten o nput anagement iacent a is started the loaded tool movement and the action it is taking Is Oct pun Sue displayed See Starting Draw on page 257 0 2900 0 4231 19 6850 1 Draw button to view real time drawing 2 View
151. B PROGRAN HERE the tool change position a location away from the work area where goes the axes can return for safe tool changing Is input The first block includes the units of measurement Inch MM mode of operation Absolute move type Rapid and to cancel all auxiliary functions Tool Offsets Spindle and Coolant This is the same as in g code hbs Inc e g typical first blocks G70 G90 GO G28 ZO amp M5 Refer to chapter 11 G Code on page 366 Subsequent blocks in the program set Spindle information call Tool number turn on Coolant and make the initial move toward the work The remaining blocks in the program describe the required moves Canned Cycles and Tool changes to complete the machining The next to the last block in the program returns the axes to the Tool change position turning off any auxiliary functions Tool Offsets Spindle and Coolant The last block EndMain M2 ends the program This is the same as in g code e g typical last blocks Mb GO TO XO YO ZO M9 M2 Refer to chapter 11 M Code List on page 370 After writing a program verify it Run it in Draw Mode to troubleshoot for errors Verify that all programmed moves are safe and accurate to the part print dimensions Load the stock material into the selected work holding device Set the Tool Offsets for each tool in the Tool Page Before running the part in the Auto Mode run it in Single Step Mode to verify that both the
152. C Start button The Z axis feeds down with the spindle on touching the top of the probe stylus Once the top of the probe is found the Z axis rapids back up above the probe and moves over to one side of the probe stylus The tool then moves down the distance in E or 0 1 2 54 mm If E is not programmed Then with the spindle turning in reverse the canned cycle touches the side of the tool to the probe stylus twice on opposite sides establishing the tool s diameter The new diameter is then stored in that tool s diameter register and clears any value in the diameter wear register The Z axis then rapids up to machine home The Tool Diameter has now been set and you can change to another tool and repeat steps 1 through 3 TA lt O gt Q O O Sam A N ACU RITE 35001 215 Tool Breakage Length and Diameter Wear Detection Checks the tool and gives an alarm if not within tolerance Length 0 me Shutdown al i o ms and Diameter Wear Check the Length and or Diameter and 3 updates the Length and or Diameter wear registers up to a preview INN gt user defined limit Once the user defined limit has been reached the cycle gives an alarm and the program stops N 2 O gt Q O O ES A Mm N Field Code Description Tool T Tool number Required e The T cycle parameter is the tool number mt Are Cow X 0 16113 Y 6 45042 XCenter 0 68062 YCenter 0 63126 31 Arc Cw X 0 10449 Y 0 48650 XCente
153. Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work probe The tool offset and work coordinate must be active before using this cycle in a program See Section 4 Tool Length Offsets on page 73 The probe must be pre positioned to the proper spot in relation to the part in accordance with the specified S parameter as described below or an I J and or K should be included for pre positioning The Skew compensation Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or from the Manual Data Input Mode Field Code Description Action Q QO Finds the skew angle but does not activate skew compensation Q1 Finds the skew angle and activates skew compensation 02 Activates skew compensation with the current skew value but does not rerun the cycle on the part If Q2 is used all other skew compensation parameters are ignored Before using skew compensation Q2 you must have called skew compensation at least once with QO or Q1 or the error message Skew Compensation has not been found is displayed Skew compensation is activated around the current active work coordinate and only works from within the program being run Skew compensation cannot be activated directly or indirectly using skew compensation from the MDI mode The operator can run the skew compensation from MDI but must place skew compensation Q2 inside the program for skew compensation
154. Cycle AAA Form dialogue poo Bottom Side Comment Tool Enter 2 o Tol A Select Bottom Finish check box Touch Use button A None None Y Verify Tool Path graphic and touch Yes to accept omp oe to npu aintenance example 2 dxf Layer DefaultLayer E 00 03 06 Confirm Toolpath Yes No Cancel Shape View Adjust ToolPath Create A sont sae ues vier ar ame a o A oe ACU RITE 35001 349 O Sen O O u A lt O a The program for the pocket is now complete This can be used as its own program or be imported to other programs The order of steps taken are as follows Create Geometry Create Shape define tools Create the Job Setup Create the Block Form Create the Pocket Cycle for the Tool Path e ls 5 10 Create the Finish Pocket Cycle G 350 example 2 dxf Layer DefaultLayer Manual Data gr System we l l N 8 36am 9 X 5 064 Y 0 605 00 05 05 wM L 10 CAM Programming G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features E 11 1 G Code Program Editing The 35001 supports G Code programming This section provides an overview of G Codes supported and features available when using G Codes Activating Edit Mode Program blocks are written using the Edit button When in the Wanual Data system Ty anna
155. D Shaded View of a solid block form model showing contours Contour View with Line Numbers enables disables visibility of program line numbers Available with 2D and 3D wire frame buttons Program Contour View enables disables display of programmed contours Available with 2D and 3D wire frame buttons eo 356 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Program Editing cancel out of the program without saving touch the quit gt To save the changes made touch the exit button To button Mark a program block For many editing features the affected program block or blocks must be marked before the edit is performed example 2 g Manual Data System lid s aiL el 1 Preview 2 example 2 g 3 xk In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the Edit Features first block to be marked and touch the Edit Features button 4 A 5 G70 6 Ti D0 3750 L 1 0000 H 7 G120 X6 0000 YO 0000 Z0 0000 10 0000 J 6 0000 K 1 0000 8 G169 Wi Z 0 5000 A0 0900 HO 1000 S 0 1250 P0 1000 H v 9 T2 D0 3750 L 1 0000 18 T2 11 G133 12 G120 X6 0000 Y1 0000 Z0 0000 I 2 0000 J 7 0000 K 1 0000 13 Touch the Mark button to Mark the block or blocks c la 14 End program 15 M2 16 17 Shape 1 subprogram 18 01 19 G41 28 GO X4 7762 Y 3 5199 0 21 G1 X2 7683 Y 1 1099 Use the Arrow keys to mark additional blocks 22 G3 X1 8482 Y 2 7384 R 1 0000 23 G2 X3 4758 Y 4 1951 R2 0000 24 G3 X4 776
156. E 35001 Introduction Machining Fundamentals Manual Data Input Tool Management Program Management Conversational Editing Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Drawing Programs Running a Program on the Machine CAM Programming G code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Software Update at oo mad N 200 6 N OGIA WUN Table of Contents Controls of the 35001 INCVS Ol VISUAL ASIA UAC recriando db nan IV NUNCA CNE VS A a Re ae nat ete IV Ds ALOE Wig yeni ft Pte A T EA ETE IV TES EA o E A IV Touch OWERTY Key DO ista IV Numero LOUC Pads perenne nen rer ae mene RRO En cent iia IV PIS ed OUI ONS a etal aes tao cal aod ome eure are eee cto V NAVIA TORES dd EA EA E bee EE os V Potentiometer for feed rate and spindle speed override ocooccccocccocccoconcncnnononononnn V REV Oa lO Stalin VI Keyboard Equivalent Key Strokes 000 00 cda vi Manual Information MESSI lt SV 1110 es vil Fonte Used MAS MUA atraso VII MOCO Software and Features e te th ot oleate cat viii intended pacs Or operahoNioaa n e e e EA N A ERP viii NEW FUNCIO O O VE deel ee ee IX TN IE O A Roo lt P and aaciewnaacaaiebeeegniees waadeeian ences IX DOOM a artos teu caos ioestass ies dal delas tete a ba acne Seren rere iX Changed FOUMCHONS Ob ONA C rnn ES AEE X Siete Ee TA e OE o E EEE ree teen AE O X A re cates cease ba eec anaeieea gah ct aeb actu weswlewalaenateandicniuettcnsnateess Xx A Ree nT ere ern rr ee ae err ener an ee e
157. EE On Onn Oe Seed ee 186 Circular Slot Ecler a 188 regular Pocket Eycle ad oca 190 o A P a 192 BOLONIA da 193 o NUM Si estes EE EE E eae AEE E aun aia a A ata a E EE 194 A A i ENT A TEIA PEREA ee A RV ne 195 Programming the Engrave Cycle ias 195 Programming the Aro Engrave Cycle A 197 7 3 Probing Cycles Sol ana Sonde PODS ocre a eee 199 TOOlPrODS CVO Setenta ld ono 200 Tool ProbeCallbraton Ecler o ca 201 Teo ktengtrand Diameter O series lona ii 203 Manual Tool Lena OSE E PICS C anaa in dee 210 Manual Tool Diameter Measure for Special TOOIS oocccoccccccnoccnconncononos 213 Tool Breakage Length and Diameter Wear Detection occocccccncccnccnccnncnncnns 216 ONO OO O 219 Jo A a a a ete eee 219 SOIMOIS PTODEZ5 CUI Sesenta leas 219 Spindle Probe Calibration Cy Cle a3 2 cea its eta Edic 220 FCM MPM E rec 0 O AA E 222 OUTSIGe Comer ANAN oren a r 223 SUS COMERCIO saraaa aE 225 nside Otiside BOss Hole FIN sad dices 227 side Outside VV CDs FINGING stas delicada 229 Protected Pope OSITOMING aura alee 231 SKEW COMPENSA UON oeie ETAN 232 Using the Z Work OftsetUpdate Feat eniin N A 235 7 4 Sub programs 35001 Subprograma torna Oda td ii 236 US PO O eR OS TE EOD RPS Bn 230 Endino the Main PON di dore 236 BENNAE SUDO GU I a rai 237 ENANOS OOO Maita bs 237 Calif a SUBO aMule alas 237 Looping a SUb Progra aiias e i A E A ne 238 Rotate Mirror and or Scale a sub prograM oocccoccccncncncncnnennncnnonenonen
158. F Drillina TST 00 12 17 see Edit es ee 1 Introduction Powering Up the CNC Machine Turn on the CNC machine according to the builder s instructions Turn the power switch on to the 3500 console The 3500 completely resets activating the startup screen With the EMERGENCY STOP button out reset the servo drive by pressing the SERVO RESET key Press the Home button gt Press the Start button The 35001 default display is the Manual screen ACU RITE 35001 Program System re oO LO Mm Q a e q oO LO Mm Ea E q E Stop Servo Reset and CNC Shutdown Press E STOP to disengage the servos and then revert to Manual Data Input Mode Touch Shut Down to display the Shut Down dialogue Touch Shut Down to power down the CNC or touch Cancel to cancel the shut down The shutdown takes less than a minute The 3500 will let you know when it is safe to turn power off Or you can touch Reboot or press the ENTER key to re start the 35001 Follow the builder s instructions for turning off the machine A Always shutdown the CNC before turning power off to the machine Emergency Stop E STOP gt Press E STOP to take all axes and spindle servos offline This ends all machine movement gt To reset E STOP pull out and turn the rotary switch clockwise in the direction of the arrows The switch makes a touching sound when it resets Resetting E STOP
159. G key to select either the Rapid or Feed Jog Modes Press the Axis keys for the desired axis to move the axis in the corresponding direction at the currently active feedrate Feed Mode or at the machine rapid rate Rapid Mode 34 2 Machining Fundamentals Adjusting the Feedrate The Feedrate Override rotary switch can be used to override the currently active feedrate or rapid rate for machine moves The switch provides a range of 0 to 150 Setting the switch to 100 will allow the actual feedrate or rapid rate currently active to be used Itioning The machine builder determines the default rapid rate and maximum feedrate at setup If the CNC is shut down the configuration file reloads these default rates at the next power on Overriding the Spindle RPM The SPINDLE Override rotary switch can be used to override the currently active programmed spindle speed The switch provides a range of 5 to 120 Setting the switch to 100 will allow the actual spindle speed currently active to be used T O A E F O 5 N N ACU RITE 35001 35 Huluoljisog aulyoesj 2NUEeIA 272 2 Machining Fundamentals 36 Anat 0 Em Manual Data Input O 4 ad A C e m Mm 3 1 Manual Data Input MDI Overview Manual Data Input allows data input for simple machining operations
160. Jos inaf ae va BEB X races 6 1 Introduction Menus Dialogues and Forms This section describes general overview of the pop up menus dialogues and forms provided by the 35001 Complete information is provided in this manual where specific examples of actions are being explained Pop up menus allow you to make a selection from multiple options When a pop up appears touch the desired selection or use the ARROW keys and touch Enter Some features will require entering data in a form Enter the required data in the field touching Enter moves to next field When done touch the Use button to have the 35001 accept the feature or touch the Cancel button Additional buttons may be present based on the form being Used Operator Prompts Actions that require immediate data input to continue the operation the 35001 will prompt for the required information The required data can be entered with the on screen keyboard and numeric keypad Cursor The 35001 uses a cursor or highlight to mark data field for selection or editing Touch the screen or use the ARROWS to move the cursor or highlight The cursor can be activated in a field that is highlighted by touching the highlighted field or using the left right ARROW keys ACU RITE 35001 Program System 7 a ou Ja M Y ls Program System ln 0 2900 0 4231 0 0222 o ooo PN E D oO Lise ree Zs Pocket G ag 1 2 Visual Display Uni General O
161. M30 O99 parameters passed X 24 length of window in X axis Y 25 width of window in Y axis Z 26 absolute tool depth 412 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features G65 Macro Programming Macro sub program O This macro can mill any size window L x W at any Z depth To change the pocket size change the parameters on Block 10 X Y Z The 3500i executes the macro only once at the current position G65 is not modal Block Block N22 03 WINDOW MACRO O N23 G90 G1 Z 26 a O N24 G91 G41 Y 25 2 T N25 X 24 2 S N26 Y 25 O N27 X 24 lt N28 Y 25 Y q N29 X 24 2 y N30 G40 Y 25 2 N31 M99 ACU RITE 35001 413 O Sen O O Sa A 5 d O e gt lt G66 G67 Macro Programming This example is a modal macro program to mill slots in a plate at various locations In contrast to the G65 single call macro in Example 1 G66 modal macro call applies the macro to all subsequent moves until canceled by G67 Program G67 after the last slot location Block N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 NG N7 N8 N9 N10 N11 N12 N13 N14 414 Block 0101 SLOTCALL G G90 G70 GO G17 TO ZO XO YO TID 25L 1T F30 G66 P1255 X5 Y1 Z 1 A5 B12 C5 X1 Y2 X2 Y4 G67 G90 GO TO ZO XO YO M2 SLOTMAC G 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features ACU RITE 35001 415 SLOTMAC G Program O In the following example Blocks 1260 through
162. MO5 Spindle Off M6 or MOG Tool Mount M8 or M08 Coolant On M9 or MO9 Coolant Off 384 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Control M Codes Control M Codes execute or alter certain 35001 functions such as program end sub program call dry run etc These M Codes are part of the 35001 software To use them enter the appropriate M Code into the program word for a spindle orient to a specific angle i e M19 C45 orients the spindle to 45 degrees O S Som M Code Function e MO or MOO Program Stop Mode Program stops O indefinitely Touch Start to resume A M1 or M01 Optional Program Stop Optional program stops indefinitely Touch Start O to resume M2 or MO2 End of Program At M02 the program gt stops and returns to the first program Oo block M19 Spindle Orientation Followed by the C Y q q M30 Jump to New Program Return to other program M30 O75 programmed as the last block of a main program returns the 3500i to program 75 O75 must be in the same file M98 Call sub program A block in the main program with M98 P100 executes sub program 100 0100 must be in the file after the end of the main program M99 End of sub program M99 ends a sub program and returns to the main program at the block preceding the last executed program call M105 Dry Run All Axes Program M105 in a program file or in MDI to set Dry Run Mode 3500i executes all feed moves at a ra
163. Numbers enables disables visibility of program line numbers Available with 2D and 3D wire frame views Program Contour View enables disables display of programmed contours Available with 2D and 3D wire frame views 8 Drawing Programs Adjust View Menu Touch the Adjust View button to open the adjust e ua ae fo View mal 00 view buttons AR 3 00 01 gt de O 00 Button Function Adjust Blk Form changes the work piece size to aid pire in determining the appropriate block form j dimensions EJ gt Zoom opens the zoom menu bar 1 Simple setup for easy tesi pa Zoom 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 50 T1 D 01 L 1 6 7 Call sub program s Rotate opens the rotate menu bar Part can also be cane rotated by touching the display and dragging Adjust Reset a Clear Pan opens the panning menu bar 2 o lt oO 4 4 Move Cursor opens the cursor manipulation men Cursor bar Only applies to the Projection View mode Show Ruler toggles the Ruler on off Show Block Form toggles the display of the block form outline Required to display the ruler as well Clear Draw erases the Draw image Clear Draw Reset Blk Form resets the view Reset Blk Form EN Gl The buttons in this menu are enabled disabled depending on the active View Mode e g The Pan button is only enabled when the 2D or 3D Wire Frame view modes are active y ACU RITE
164. O a Y N Blocks 1 through 4 are comments Blocks 5 through 7 define common defaults Block 8 defines the blockform or stock size This is only needed for the 3D solid The stock defined is 6x6 with center at 0 0 Blocks 9 through 12 define the tool RPM and turn on the spindle and coolant Block 14 defines an island in sub program 1 The actual island is then defined in blocks 19 through 27 corresponding pocket Also note that the island must specify the machining In this case since the island profile is defined in a clockwise orientation the machining side is to the left see block 22 Y i O O T Q Y N gt The island must always be programmed before the Block 15 is a circular pocket with 4 with center at 0 O This is the rendering of the program after being ran in Draw The top view is the line draw and the bottom view is the 3D solid model Approximate machining time is 8 1 2 minutes 244 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Pocket Island example 3 This example shows an irregular pocket with an island in the center The island is in the form of a diamond The cutting tool is a 14 diameter end mill YN i O O a Y N 1 Basic template conversational 2 Example 3 uses an irregular with an island in the middle 3 the island is in the form of a diamond 4 The initial roughing tool has a 1 4 inch diamete
165. O RESET use to activate servo motors STOP key use to stop a program that Is running or a machine operation Same as Stop button in Machine function buttons START key use to start a program to run or a machine operation previously stopped Same as Start button in Machine function buttons ACU RITE 35001 19 c n gt O el gt N 1 3 Main Operating Mode Screens Display navigation The three main operating modes Manual Data Input Program Management and Program Run each have there own screen A condensed description of these has been provided here on how to navigate become familiar with the information that is being provided Manual Data Input The Manual Data Input screen default screen displays several windows and program buttons The following list maps what is being viewed on this screen When the console is first turned on the unit defaults to this screen Manual Data Input default screen Horizontal button Bar These keys change to correspond with the selected main mode display Display area Preview Screen This displays the position of the machine during a program or single event run This displays the Distance To Go per the program being run The Machine display window displays the actual position of the machines axes The Target display window displays the position that the machine IS going to 8 This displays the status of the machine during its current activ
166. Simple Required ACU RITE 35001 197 T O gt O O D Q N N Field Code Description XCenter X X coordinate for the arc center point Defaults to current position if not given Optional YCenter Y Y coordinate for the arc center point Defaults to current position if not given Optional Angle C Angle in polar degrees Default is 0 degrees 3 o clock position Optional MirrorX U Mirrors all X moves Set by selecting Yes in this field Optional MirrorY V Mirrors all Y moves Set by selecting Yes in this field Optional Feed F Feedrate used while engraving Default is current feedrate Optional The start point of the text string is the lower left corner of the first character This is a polar defined coordinate using the arc s radius center point and a polar angle of rotation about that point G code format G191 198 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs 73 Probing Cycles Tool and Spindle Probe cycles This section describes operation and an overview of the tool and spindle probe canned cycles available on the 3500 CNC products The cycles provided perform the most common tool and spindle probing functions Custom cycles to perform specific functions can be written using the primitive and parametric programming If Probing has been added post sale beside Machine Parameter changes there may be Programmable Logic Controller PLC program modifications required Th
167. Status Area can be modified manually as well For example if Program Run was exited for some reason and then re entered to continue machining the same batch of parts you would want to continue on with the number of parts previously completed Touch the Parts Counter button on the bottom menu bar This activates the Parts Counter adjustment dialog Enter into the New Value field the number at which you would like the Parts Counter to begin at Touch Ok the make the change or Cancel to discard the change To reset the Parts Counter back to value 0 without exiting the Program Run mode use this same method and enter a value of 0 into the New Value field 272 9 Running a Program on the Machine Program Run Timers The 35001 also keeps track of the program machining time during the active program run session When first entering into Program Run mode both of the timers are initialized to a value of zero hours minutes and seconds The timers begin when you press START and will pause when you press STOP The Timer Inc timer displays the current program runtime Each time the active program completes the Timer Inc timer will reset The Timer Abs timer displays an overall runtime for the active program run session This timer will continue to increment with each consecutive run of the program The timers continue this pattern until Program Run mode is exited which clears the running total Upon
168. Sub 2 Rapid X8 8749 Y 1 5156 ToolComp Left Arc CW X7 0153 Y 1 8256 Radius 1 0000 Arc CCW X6 5297 Y3 8301 Radius 11 0000 Arc CW X7 4999 Y3 9918 Radius 0 5000 Arc CCW X8 8749 Y 1 5156 Radius 11 0000 EndSub Shape 3 subprogram Sub 3 Rapid X5 4000 Y4 0000 ToolComp Left Arc CW X2 6000 Y4 0000 Radius 1 4000 Arc CW X5 4000 Y4 0000 Radius 1 4000 EndSub Shape 4 subprogram Sub 4 Rapid X 4 7 Y 4 0000 ToolComp Right Arc CW X 3 3 Y 4 0000 Radius 7 Arc CW X 4 7 Y 4 0000 Radius 7 EndSub 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Blocks 1 through 5 are comments Blocks 6 through 8 define common defaults Block 9 defines the blockform or stock size This is only needed for the 3D solid Block 10 defines the initial roughing tool which has a 1 diameter tool table or be saved in the tool table This is a gt The parameters for this tool must either come from the requirement for the coarse tool feature Blocks 11 through 13 define RPM and turn on the spindle and coolant Block 15 defines the islands in sub programs 2 3 and 4 The actual islands are then defined in blocks 41 47 50 54 and 57 61 YN res O O red o Q Y N corresponding pocket Also note that the island must specify the machining side In this case since the island profile is defined in a clockwise orientation the machining side is to the left Except for sub program 4 is nested inside of sub program 3 thus this nee
169. The Teach and Teach Program buttons are used to automatically provide position value for the selected tool depending on the button used Teach will use the machine position values and Teach Program will use the program position values The Teach and Teach Program buttons can be swapped so that one of the two Is located on the main Tool Table button bar and the other is placed in the second menu bar To swap these button locations enter the Configuration and go to UserSetup gt CtgTooltableSettings gt mainTeachSoftkey The value selected here Is the button that shows up in the main menu bar Refer to the Technical Manual for more information for changing configuration settings mm Select the Teach Program button to automatically Program provide the data from the program position Select the Teach button to automatically provide the ene data from the machine position Teach Program button should always be used In this scenario set the mainTeachSoftkey configuration parameter to Teach Program gt When a W Axis knee scale is coupled with the Z Axis the 66 4 Tool Management Tool Table Structure Tool table Standard tool data Column Tool Diameter Length D Wear L wear Type Comment Time1 Time2 Cur_Time TL RT Max Length Plunge Angle ACU RITE 35001 Description Number by which the tool is called in the program e g tool 2 12 Compensation value for the tool diameter Co
170. W Radius and EndPoint G4 Dwell G9 Exact Stop 1G Code Assist 2 36 Functions Basic Modal Functions iMulti Segment Blocks Arcs 3Drilling Cycles JPocket Cycles Milling and Profiles JRotation Scaling and Mirroring iSpindle Probing 1Tool Probing Tool Radius Compensation Other G Functions g i M Functions M es CET G17 XY Plane G18 XZ Plane G19 YZ Plane G22 Stroke Limit G28 Reference Point Return Return from Reference Point Mara Dafaraman Fenm Manki m Select 12 M3 13 G75 M76 2 W50 8 H2 Z 2 I100 J500 14 T3 D9 5 L 359 160 15 GO X76 2 Y 50 8 16 GO Z2 0 17 M3 18 G78 M50 W24 6 H2 Z 2 U7 I100 J Edit Preview Features Features Delete Block Find Replace ReEdit Exit ACU RITE 35001 365 InNITIONS Ga O d O Q S Le e d Lo Q br O N 11 2 G Code and M Code Definitions G Code The following is a list of available G Codes Represents the most commonly used G Codes G Code Listing G Code GO G1 G2 G3 G4 G9 G17 G18 G19 G22 G28 G29 G36 G37 G40 G41 G42 366 Description Axis moves made at rapid rate y Axis moves made at feed rate t Sets clockwise circular interpolation Sets counterclockwise circular interpolation Programs a timed or infinite dwell Non modal ex
171. X Use Coment a Cir a _ _ NU I TES AUTO URI A CUINA SEAU A pt E IRI RE TT ab AE Alt EDTA Shape A View Adjust ToolPath Create 10 CAM Programming Block Form Basic tab Basic tab Data Entries e Block Form defines the dimensions of the stock The Block Form is 9 ue al used for graphical purposes only and allows a solid 3D view of the lt e e aa ei program to be generated At least one Block Form must be defined in a o Off Jf the program Multiple Block Forms are allowed and are displayed in e O the sequence they are arranged in the program An estimated Block A E gt Form can also be automatically generated see Output tab on page 0 090000 d 313 9 f max 8 200000 A 3 0 000000 Data Input Fields All fields must be filled in gt Si 0 000000 lt Xmax Estimate BlockForm Enter the maximum edge in the X axis of the stock from part zero i f we O Ymax S q Enter the maximum edge in the Y axis of the stock from part zero Zmax Bun DA AAA AU LOA DT ULA UA IA 1 FD AAA LL E EL a DAA UA MUA OL EE et a A E ELIT PL La SE ALS 1 9 2 3 4 5 6 7 Shape E View Adjust ToolPath Create eleke ee cos e es Enter the top of the stock in relation to part zero Xmin Choose None Use or Off Enter the minimum edge in the X axis of the stock from part zero Ymin Enter the minimum edge in the Y axis of t
172. a center and radius a Select Circle Tangent to create a circle tangent to any combination of circle and line and having a specific radius Ey Select Circle Tangent Point to create a circle going x through a point tangent to a line and having a specific radius O ES pe O O pe A lt O o Select Circle Tangent Center Point to create a circle tangent to a line and having a specific center Circle Editing Existing parameters can easily be edited 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 500000 DefaultLaydy X Full Circle To edit an arc or circle Select the Properties button Select the parameter to be edited The Circle Arc properties dialogue opens Edit the parameters to be changed Select the Use button to save the changes and close the Circle Arc properties dialogue or Cancel to quit without saving Circle Arc on the geometry to be edited and selecting Properties p The first two steps can also be achieved by right clicking trom the pop up dialogue Values that cannot be edited are in gray This indicates that the value is interdependent with the values that can be edited When the Full Circle box is checked the arc becomes a full circle and can now be edited with new parameters 286 10 CAM Programming Shape Tool buttons a Touching the Shape Tool button activates the following buttons in the Vertical butto
173. a Field O gt Tool Q O 2 O O EstDiam 0 pa MeasType 204 Code D Q Description Tool number Required With only the T cycle parameter present the canned cycle does not step over half the tool s diameter but comes straight down measuring the tool length and storing it in the tool register This is the rough diameter of the tool This should be within 0 04 1 0 mm Optional If the D cycle parameter is present the tool steps over half of its diameter the spindle turns on in reverse and then the canned cycle measures the tool s length A negative D value is for a left handed tool and causes the spindle to come on forward instead of reverse For on center length measurement do not give a D cycle parameter This option specifies to measure length diameter or both and the appropriate tool registers are updated Optional Default Q1 QO Measure the diameter only Q1 Measure the length only Q2 Measure both length and diameter If Q is not set the cycle measures the tool length only If QO or Q2 are programmed you must also have a D cycle parameter or the control displays an error message 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field DistDown OvrFstFeed OvrMedFeed ACU RITE 35001 Code E F M Description The incremental distance from the current Z Retract amount to go down along the side of the probe stylus when doing a diameter pick The maximum E value is
174. a Program on the Machine CAM Programming O Sen O O u A lt O a 10 1 CAM Programming CAM Mode CAM Mode is different from the standard CNC programming method of part programming With CAM programming you create part programs with the help of geometry tool buttons These buttons prompt you for necessary information CAM Programming utilizes a graphical interface and features that eliminate the need for CNC programming and complicated calculations To use CAM programming you must know the XYZ Cartesian coordinate system the polar coordinate system and machining sequences Refer to chapter 2 1 Fundamentals of Positioning on page 26 You must make a machining plan decide which type of tools to use and when to use those tools in the program CAM programming is used to generate tool paths from Shapes These Shapes are generated from geometry created with the CAM geometry tools importing geometry in a DXF Tile or a combination of creating and importing To create the geometric elements required for a part program such as points lines and circles select the appropriate Geometry Tools button Next select on the appropriate sub tool button The CAM software prompts you to enter the required information to create the geometry These entries combined with selecting shapes and creating tool paths enable the system to perform the desired machine sequences As you program points lines
175. abla dd tanaidegauieecaeacearee 327 MPorincra ere Tala elias 327 EXPONGO ar TOO Ta E std AAA 327 MP le a a a a a Seales 328 Creanga 1001 Pati CAM MOJE tt 328 TOOP Vencida 328 MOONE GHEY E dU esetei ROO 50 E huss E A 329 WSC EXISHD OS MaDe zais e i 329 EANO ST VOOM aU ariaa ana a aiii 330 Disabling and Enabling Tool Path Srania a a econ 330 Deletno Tool Pas ieirik a En a E 330 Afranging Tool Paths Sequence A A ON 330 Smart FOJ aN nt RT a NA 331 FESC OSL CC o E clit Chou tern sha clee 331 GANIE KIMO o ey 8 Oe OE S52 EErEE rd et rae ener 332 STU CON MC U reaa cet cet eat e o oil 332 Connecting TNE GC OMICUY dao 334 Rinalizmng the CEM Us 535 TEA UING UNG SS aeiae A S aE A 336 Credo The tool Patas a T N 337 CANTE aN mo A AA 341 A A EC RR 341 Create Circle Geon e aa Aa 341 Create Ne DEMI becas 343 Finalizing the geometry ironien iia A Ei 344 Gl A 345 CTEAUMG Ane TOO Par dicta 346 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features 11 1 35001 G Code Program Editing ACUVa INTE IIS sanidad 392 EOI EU e ae 393 Progra Edit DUON S ria T anc A TEOR 354 Edit FSA UrES IM Mai td a worse aeetertiee 305 Preview Features MENU aaa ir ddoci 356 o O 357 Maka prodan DOCK oaii eae T TE a 357 uUnmark apoek SONIDO CIS ices cht a A O 357 Biel excel atc ccc gt it ias 358 Daletndra progranm DOCK wae rides cado 358 NS SIS a Progar DOCK AA A A 359 Copy Paste BIocks ina progra as 359 Moving Blocks in OOM Mts daria 360 xxiii Canceling edits
176. ach 57 Tool 52 Zero Axes 49 MDI Cycles Drill 44 Other 44 Pocket 44 Rectangular Pocket 46 MDI Display Screen 20 N Note Symbols Advice Attention vil Advice Damage vil Advice take note vil Different between machines vil Refer to another Manual vil Numeric Touch Pad Iv O Off Line Software 440 Operating Panel w Touch display 6 444 P Position encoders reference marks 26 Potentiometer feed rate v spindle speed v Power Up CNC Machine 3 Probing Cycles 199 Diameter Offset 203 Manual Tool Diameter 213 Manual Tool Length Offset 210 Spindle Probe 219 Tool Breakage 216 Tool Length 203 Tool Probe 200 Program Editor Arcs 376 Basic M Functions 382 Basic Modal Functions 375 Definitions 366 Drilling Cycles 376 Edit buttons 354 Edit Features menu 355 EditingProgram Editor Editing 357 G Functions 374 G Code 366 G Code editing 352 Help Activating 372 Help Graphic Screens 373 M Code Definition 370 Milling and Profiles 377 Mirroring 378 Multi Segment Blocks 375 Other G Functions 380 Pocket Cycles 377 Preview Features 364 Preview Features menu 356 Rotation 378 Scaling 378 Search 362 Spindle Probing 378 Tool Probing 379 Tool Radius Compensation 379 Program Editor M Functions Cleaning 382 Cooling 382 Lubrication 382 Spindle Functions 383 Tool Change 383 Program Management 88 Advanced Folder Filter 92 Copy 94 Delete button 94 Details 93 Display window 91 Folder Filter 92 Mark 93 Menu Bar 89 Move 94 Paste 94
177. act stop check Activates exact stop check for a single block Sets default XY plane Sets default XZ plane Sets default YZ Activates deactivates Return to Machine Home directly or through an intermediary point Return from Machine Home to the coordinates specified Tool diameter compensation LEFT or RIGHT with entry move Tool diameter compensation cancel G41 or G42 with exit move Tool diameter compensation cancel G41 or G42 Tool diameter compensation LEFT Tool diameter compensation RIGHT Label Rapid Move Feed Move Arc CW Arc CCW Dwel 1 Exact Stop XY Plane XZ Plane YZ Plane Stroke Limit Reference Point Return Return from Reference Point Compensation LEFT RIGHT with entry move Compensation OFF with exit move Compensation OFF Compensation LEFT Compensation RIGHT 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features G Code G53 G59 G60 G61 G64 G65 G66 G67 G68 G70 G71 G72 G73 G75 G76 G77 G78 G79 ACU RITE 35001 Description Shifts the location of Absolute Zero to a preset location The preset location is the specified fixture offset measured from Machine Home and stored in the Fixture Offsets Table Use to program modal corner rounding or chamfering Use to cancel the program modal corner rounding or chamfering Contouring Mode OFF Modal Exact Stop Check Activates In Position Mode Exact Stop Mode OFF Modal Contouring Mode De activate
178. ad Mill Cycle Engrave Cycle Arc Engrave Cycle Slot Cycle Circular Slot Cycle Feed rate 369 INITIONS Ga O Q 75 Q T Le e Q 5 Q z O N InNITIONS Ga O d Le Q z Lo e d Le Q z O N M Code Definition The following is a list of available M Codes Be advised that many M codes are machine dependant and often machine manufacturers will add and or remove some M Codes M Code List M Code Description MO or MOO Program Stop Mode M1 or M01 Optional Program Stop M2 or M02 End of Program M3 or M03 Spindle Forward M4 or M04 Spindle Reverse M5 or M05 Spindle Off M6 or M06 Tool Mount M8 or M08 Coolant On M9 or M09 Coolant Off M19 Spindle Orientation M30 Jump to New Program M98 Call Sub Program M99 End of Sub Program M105 Dry Run All Axes M106 Dry Run No Z Axis M107 Dry Run Off Cancel M105 and M106 S Spindle Speed 370 Label Program Stop Mode Optional Program Stop End of Program Spindle Forward Spindle Reverse Spindle Off Tool Mount Coolant On Coolant Off Spindle Orientation Jump to New Program Call Sub Program End of Sub Program Dry Run All Axes Dry Run No Z Axis Dry Run Off Cancel Spindle Speed 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Typing in Address Words Most address words can manually be typed in without exiting Edit Helo Address words that can be typed into the program via Edit Help include dimension coordi
179. adius Two Arcs can intersect any two points an Arc with an included angle less than 180 degrees and an Arc with an included angle greater than 180 degrees 130 Included Anale Included Anale Less Than 180 Dearees Greater Than 180 Dearees Positive Radius Value Negative Radius Value Start Fnd Point a NN Point E End i Point 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Arc Move Radius and EndPoint The following is a description of the menu fields Field Code Direction E Radius R X X Y Y Z Z Feed F CornerRad A ToolComp T ACU RITE 35001 Description Specifies a clockwise CW or counterclockwise CCVV arc direction Required Radius of the arc Positive value for an included angle less than 180 degrees negative value for an included angle greater than 180 degrees Required Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired X Axis destination Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Y Axis destination Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis destination Feedrate at which to conduct the machining movement Positive arc radius for corner rounding negative X Y distance for chamfering Select the modal tool diameter compensation to activate or select Off to deactivate comp uE ne E 131 Basic Cycles ining o gt Lu q N Arc Move Center and EndPoint Specify the arc movement using the ac
180. allows the X axis to back off the bore surface after the spindle has stopped and oriented itself The cycle feeds from the R plane to Z depth dwell for the specified time stop and orient the spindle to the specified angle C back off in X rapid retract in Z re position in X and restart the spindle Your machine must be equipped with spindle M functions Spindle Forward M3 Spindle Reverse M4 Spindle Off M5 and spindle orientation M19 to use this cycle Do not use this cycle if the machine does not have the spindle CeO commands and spindle orientation 07250 Y 0 10950 Xtenter 0 05596 Yoenter 0 03106 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 15700 Y 0 06250 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 Field Code Description ZDeptn Z Absoluta hole depth Requred roe noe Jr e StartHgt R Initial Z start point in rapid Required X Backoft X axis incremental backoff distance in X positive or negative dimension Feed F Feedrate ReturnHgt P Z retract height after hole depth in rapid Index C M19 index angle If no angle is given the Angle angle for spindle orientation defaults to Zero Dwell D Dwell time in seconds G code format G86 ACU RITE 35001 153 Ye O gt O O Q N N Chip Break Cycle This is the chip breaker peck drilling cycle generally used to peck drill medium to deep holes The cycle fee
181. amp Feed Enter the ramp feed Automatically calculated if tool being used is defined in the Tool Table Ramp Feed Rough Feed Finish Feed 2 Finish Feed Enter the XY axes finish feed rate Coolant Choose None On M8 Off M9 or Mist M7 See Coolant on page 292 Spindle Dir Choose Forward Reverse Off or None See Spindle Direction on page 292 Spindle Speed Enter the spindle speed Finish Dir Direction of the finish pass CW or CCW Comment Tab Add a comment if needed that will be placed in program See sample Comment tab on page 300 ACU RITE 35001 Bottom Side Comment g Z T Manual Data System E O Heak ie Example One dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 2 303 Y 4 793 00 00 00 Pocket Finish Cycles 2 O o o o 3 5 E oO oO Tall Use il Cancel im Sha oe re ser t To rd th Cre oe Manual Data System F o 10 SSE ee el Example One dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 2 303 Y 4 793 00 00 00 Pocket Finish Cycles ow o a ra o un hh Qa o oO o 3 3 oO rr S t z o 3 oO K o o o 3 oO vse cancer Use Cancel a 305 O ve O O Sa A lt O E Adding a Machining Side When a shape is created a prompt appears to adda machining side to O me ae tol a shape The machining for pockets is typically on the inside and for at Sins X
182. and Offset Tables on page 71 To use the numeric pad in the on screen menu note the following Use the nume ric keys to enter the required data Use the Back Space or Clear button to delete previously entered data Press the Enter button to save the data entered in the field ACU RITE 35001 Program Management D Wear L Wear System Program Run EER w an a a wo Ee 1 00000000 98 Fe N ooooooqoo oc Pp H eooooooqooqoooqooqo 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu sll Length D Wear L Wear 0 00018 N a eoooooocooorF eoooooeooeoo eooooooqcocoooo 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu tele E 63 E E ae 2 E H 8 z Clearing an entire line of tool data All data pertaining to a tool number can be removed at once Select the tool number oormag NO Touch the Clear Line button to remove all data Line Clearing the current tool table All data pertaining to a tool number can be removed at once onra 64 Touch the Next Me
183. and rapids to the X and Y location specitied If X and Y are not specified the tool remains in the current position Field Code Description X X X ending point Default Current position Y Y Y ending point Default Current position Type Q Specifies the type of exit move 1 Line Tangent 2 Line Perpendicular 3 Arc Tangent 4 Line Arc Tangent Length M Length of exit move Radius R Radius of exit arc Angle C Angle of exit arc G code format G176 160 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Face Mill Cycle Facing cycles simplify the programming required to face the surface 0 ue San al i n of a part 3 Preview Execution begins one tool radius from the D and E start point The selected stepover determines the approach axes Facing cycles can start in any corner of the surface and cut in any direction depending on the sign of the X Length and A Width values Program a slightly oversized X and A to ensure complete facing of the surface MU O lt 2 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 At the end of the cycle the tool rapids to H then rapids back to D and 286 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 E start position EJ sao Are Cw X 0 12908 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 209 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 0 O gt Q O D Q N N 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter
184. apter 7 7 2 Canned Cycles Tool Probe Calibration on page 149 for more information regarding tool probing cycles Tool Len and Diam Calibration TLO for Special Tools Tool Special Diameter Offset Tool Break and Wear Detection Dd I E O LL o q q Tool Radius Compensation G code Description The Tool Compensation enables Refer to Chapter 7 7 2 Canned Entry Move with Compensation Left R Cycles on page 149 for more information regarding tool radial Exit Move with Compensation Off compensation cycles Compensation OFF Compensation LEFT Compensation RIGHT ACU RITE 35001 379 Other G Functions G code Description a Other G Functions G4 Dwell GO Exact Stop G22 Stroke Limit gt G28 Reference Point Return G29 Return from Reference Point G30 Move Reference from Machine Datum G53 Fixture Offset gt G61 Exact Stop Mode G64 Contouring Mode G65 Macro Call Single G66 Macro Call Modal gt G67 Cancel Modal Macro gt G92 SetZero y 4 gt I O LL dE q q G94 Per Minute Feed gt G95 Per Revolution Feed gt G120 BlockForm G350 System Data gt G1000 Path Tolerance Select 380 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features M Functions The M Code functions have the following functional groups 3Drilling Cycles All M Codes including user defined are listed Pocket Cycles Basic M Functions 7 eae g
185. ard endmills with a flat bottom the cycle updates length and diameter tool registers clearing anything In the wear registers The following examples are described for machining centers with automatic tool changers Format G151 T tool With T cycle parameter only set The machine rapids the Z axis up picks up the tool designated in the T parameter and rapids directly over the center of the probe stylus The Z axis rapids down the distance placed in the ZRapidl oStartPositionFromHome machine setup parameter then starts feeding down toward the probe for the initial touch at the feedrate that was placed in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Fast machine setup parameter then backs up and retouches the probe at the feedrate that Is in the ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow The tool length register for that tool is now updated and that tool s length wear register is set to zero Then the Z axis rapids up to home position If you have done a single tool in Manual that tool is now measured and you are ready to measure the next tool If you have placed multiple lines in a program one for each tool the machine then grabs the next tool and repeats steps 1 through 4 until all the tools have been measured ACU RITE 35001 207 TA lt O gt Q O O Sam A N Format G151 T tool D tool rough diameter With T and D cycle parameter only set The machine rapids the Z axis up picks up the tool designated In the T cycle parameter
186. ast once before using the spindle probe Once calibrated calibration does not have to be done again unless you replace the probe stylus 220 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field Code Description Boss Q Set O to 1 if you are calibrating to a boss verses a ring gauge Otherwise do not set or set to 0 Default is O Optional Top H If setto 1 the cycle finds the top of the part before calibrating the probe If Q parameter is setto 1 H is forced to 1 as well otherwise the Default is 0 Optional DistDown E The distance to go down from the top of the ring gauge or standing boss for calibration This is only used if H parameter is set to 1 Without any E value the cycle brings the probe down past the top of the ring gauge after finding the top 0 1 Note If the stylus ball is greater than 2 5 08 mm E must be set to at least half the ball diameter Optional TA lt O gt Q O O Sam A N DistBack V The V parameter specifies the distance to back away from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it Default is 0 1 2 54 mm if not set Optional GaugeDim D The diameter of the ring gauge hole the probe stylus comes in contact with This is only to override the value in the machine setup parameter diameterOfSpindleProbeGauge if needed and should be an exact measurement Optional DistinX A The distance from the starting point to move in the X axis to f
187. ate mirroring for the Y axis Mirror Z Select to activate mirroring for the Z axis Mirror Action Choose None Use or Off None Mirror Action parameter is ignored Any previously defined Mirror Action remains active Use Turns on Mirroring on the axes checked In the Mirror X Mirror Y and Mirror Z fields Off Turns off any previously defined Mirror Action Scale Factor X Enter the scaling factor for X axis Scale Factor Y Enter the scaling factor for Y axis Scale Factor Z Enter the scaling factor for Z axis ACU RITE 35001 Manual Data Input Sample2 dxf Job Setup il Basic Advanced Comment LZ System a Program Run Shutdown ral X 0 033 Y 0 233 00 00 00 Layer DefaultLayer 293 O ve O O Sa A lt O E O Scale Action Choose None Use or Off None Scale Action parameter is ignored Any previously defined z Scale Action remains active e Use Turns on scaling and uses the scaling factors defined in the P Scale Factor X Scale Factor Y and Scale Factor Z fields O Off Turns off any previously defined Scaling Action Comment Tab 0 gt Comment lt Add a comment if needed that will be placed in program to assist the Q operator q q 294 Manual Data System x O piola el Example One dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 2 686 Y 4 793 00 00 03 Job Setup Basic Advanced Comment
188. automatic Program Run mode Touch Screen Zones O 4 Q ad A o e we 0 1 Zero Axes zone 2 Preset Axes zone 3 Target Location zone 4 Tool zone 5 Offset zone 6 Basic Modals zone 7 Feed and Speed zone Zero Axes Touching the X Y amp Z zone opens the Zero Axes dialogue allowing the operator to zero one or more axes gt Touch the X Y and Z zone or select an axis in the zone by touching that axis The Zero Axes dialogue opens and the axis that was touched is automatically selected An X will appear in the box next to the selected axes Touching a selected axis again will unselect that axis Touch Use to zero the selected axes or touch Cancel to exit without making any changes When the Use button has been selected the operator will be prompted to touch Start to run operation or Manual to cancel a Touch the Start button to execute the change or Touch the Manual button to cancel all changes Manual ACU RITE 35001 49 Program Preset Touching the numerical values in the Preset Axes zone opens the Program Preset dialogue allowing the operator to preset one or more axes Touch the Preset Axes zone or select an axis in the zone by touching that axes numerical value The Program Preset dialogue opens and the axis that was touched is automatically selected The cursor will appear in the data entry field next to the
189. ay provides a help screen graphic with each data input dialogue a This display shown is typical for Arc Engraving data input Touch the name of the data to be input The dialogue menu showing the necessary fields that require data will be displayed 1 Basic template 2 Dim Abs SESE igi 3 Unit Inch y cme nAn i 5 BlockForm XMax stow nod E 7 Offset i omic rie Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit g Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles POROS sein KA 110 6 Conversational Editing Program Editing The feature edit buttons provided for editing a program offer assistance when editing On screen functions and a description of these buttons are describe here When in Edit mode to edit a program touch the Edit Features button to access the Mark button To save the changes made touch the Exit button in the first button menu bar To cancel out of the program without saving touch the Quit button Mark a program block For many editing features the affected program block or blocks must be marked before the edit is performed In Edit Mode place the cursor at the beginning of the first block to be marked and touch the Edit Features button Edit Features e ca Use the Arrow keys to mark additional blocks Touch the Mark button to Mark the block or blocks Unmark a block or blocks Edit Features Use the Arrow keys to unmark additional blocks and
190. b Basic tab Data Entries The Job Setup dialogue is used to configure the parameters that are specific to the Job requirements The parameters in the Job Setup dialogue are completed prior to beginning the Job program Manual Data System 7 1 pissin ie Example One dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 1 334 YE ctl ee 00 00 03 oe setup AA A l E g lt lt Basic Advanced comment t da m Program Units None Fixture offset Fixture Action None Program Units Choose None Inches or Millimeters for the program units None Uses the Units that are set up in the 35001 CNC setup Caution should be taken using None as this typically applies to where the same unit of measure is consistently used A fool Action one 3 Coolant Moe Spindle Diz one 2 O ve O O Sa A lt O E Mele nn OM Puse Cancel MATAN IEA SII RAE ERA RL DH E ULA LS GE A PL al TSC DA A AAA 10584 1001 03 5 2 3 4 5 6 7 View Adjust ToolPath Create Sate Exit Type View Edit Program P Inches Program Units are set to inches Millimeters Program Units are set to millimeters Fixture Offset To control machine movement from a preset location Shape Edit Layers Enter the Fixture Offset Absolute Zero location from the machines Absolute Zero Fixture Action Choose None Use Offset Num
191. b menu for selection of type of other cycles e g Face Tool Probing Linear Engraving etc Section of a cycle opens a form for data input G code MDI toggles the 35001 between standard Manual Data Input and G code Manual Data Input mode The G code MDI opens up a text editor for the operator to allow single G code commands to be entered Blocks are inserted for multiple machining operations using the G code or ISO format Tool opens the Tool Table Touch the next menu button to activate the next button bar o208080 i F Drill Pocket Other G code Mill Linef Mill Arc Manual Cycles Cycles Cycles MDI 3 Manual Data Input Draw amp Manual bottom menu bar buttons Manual Function Touching the Draw button will view real time drawing of the work piece as It is being machined Manual button when touched will cancel the program MDI Menu Page two The following table describes the bottom bar page two menu buttons Button Record Save History Clear History Block History Teach EJE Remote Diagnose re a i Function Record is used to toggle between recording all Manual Data Input commands entered in standard MDI If record is on all commands successfully run will be recorded If a command does not run successfully it will not be placed in the block history Save History saves Manual Data Input to a program Either standard MDI or G code MDI depending on
192. be changed in the blocks that are being milled Tool diameter compensation cannot be changed from within the cycle The cycle is terminated with the EndMill G1 76 block at which point it rapids Manual Data System 3 diia 3 ba ic Mill Cycl ee Preview 0 0000 0 0000 j 0 O gt O O D O N N 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 up to the StartHgt H and rapids to the X and Y location specified If BES ES a ee X and Y are not specified the tool remains in the current position O 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 Activate a tool prior to Mill Cycle so the CNC knows the 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 tool diameter compensation the lines of code in the mill cycle must start with an uncompensated ramp on move and end with an uncompensated ramp off move as the first and last lines in the mill cycle are not automatically compensated by the gt If the D parameter is used for tool diameter cycle Field Code Description XStart X X coordinate of the start of the contour If no coordinate is provided default is set to the present position Uncompensated YStart Y Y coordinate of the start of the contour If no coordinate is provided default is set to present position Uncompensated Move XStart and YStart below ZDepth StartHgt H Absolute Z position to which the CNC rapids before feeding into the workpiece Required ZD
193. be used to create a CNC program in CAM Mode Shapes can be created from the geometry in the DXF file using a mouse and point and touch approach DXF Entities Supported Entities supported for Drawing Transformation and Information are Line Point Circle Arc and Vertex Entities supported for Chaining are Line Circle and Arc DXF Entities Not Supported Trace Solid Text Shape Insert Attdef Attribute Polyline Line3D Face3D Extrusion Dimension and Viewpoint entities are not supported Dimensions may be seen on the displayed DXF file Some DWG an AutoCad drawing file to DXF converters convert the dimension entities Into lines and arcs which are supported entities Importing a DXF File Geometry can also be imported from a DXF File Select the Shape Edit button Select Import DXF from the pop up dialogue The Import DXF File dialogue appears Locate the file to be imported using the Explorer dialogue Touch on the file to be imported to high light it and touch Ok or Cancel to exit the import dialogue ACU RITE 35001 321 O Sen O O A lt O it O Sen O O u A lt O a Modifying Tools The Modifying Tools are described in the following information providing a description of their use and application These tools have been briefly described in the table Modifying Toolbar on page 309 of buttons in the display area
194. ber or Define and Use None Fixture Offset parameter is ignored Any previously defined Fixture Action remains active Use Offset Number Use fixture offset number defined in Fixture Offset field Fixture offset values are used from the values defined in the CNC s offset tool table Define and Use Uses fixture offset number defined in Fixture Offset field and values defined in X Y and Z fields Tool Number Tool must be defined prior to running Job Setup Enter the tool number to use for the job Tool Diameter Entered automatically if tool number has been previously defined in the Tool Table Enter the tool s diameter ACU RITE 35001 291 O Sen O O u A lt O a Tool Length Entered automatically if tool length has been previously defined in the Tool Table Enter the tool s length Tool Action Choose None User Tool Number Define and Use or Use D and L None Tool Action parameter is ignored Any previously defined Tool Action remains active Use Tool Number Use the tool defined in the Tool Number field Tool values are used from the values defined in the CNC s tool table Define and Use Use the tool defined in the Tool Number field and the values defined in the Tool Diameter and Tool Length fields will override the table Use D and L Use the tool defined in the Tool Number field and the values defined in the Tool Diameter and Tool Length fields will be used but th
195. ble providing easy access Tool to the Tool Table ae Parts Counter activates the Parts Counter dialogue Counter to allow adjusting or resetting the number of completed parts E E 4 268 9 Running a Program on the Machine Block Search The Block Search feature can be used to begin program execution from a point other than the beginning of the program The 35001 will begin program execution from the selected block location skipping all previous blocks in the program This feature is only available before a program starts to run In Program Run Mode touch the Block Search button Enter the action to be taken in the Block Search pop up dialogue e g Go to Block type in the block number and touch OK Touch the START button to execute the next block or motion Remember that the block action can be paused stopped and terminated if necessary Select a Starting Block Block Search will search forward or backwards in the program Block Search will stop searching at the end or the beginning of a program depending on the direction chosen Block Search does not wrap back to the beginning or from the beginning to the end of a program Block Search can start a search at any selected location in a program Begin the search from the first or last block to search through the entire program Use Block Search to locate a specific block number or entered text The 35001 highlights the first block found that contains the specifie
196. bsolute Z position where the thread cut starts This can be above or below the finish position depending on the direction of the thread cut up or down If not set cycle uses the current Z tool position Required ZSatePosn P An Absolute safe Z position above the part for rapid moves in X and or Y Required WARNING P must be above the part to avoid a crash while positioning MajorDia D Major thread Diameter If this is a tapered thread it is the major diameter at the Z start position Hence if you have a tapered hole and you start at the top and cut down you would have a different major diameter than if you started at the bottom and cut up A plus value cuts in the CW direction and a minus value cuts in the CCW direction Required ThdDepth G Depth of thread The incremental depth of thread on one side A plus value is inside thread a minus value is outside thread Required 164 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field TPlor Lead XCenter YCenter ArclnRad StockAmt Rough Feed FinFeed Passes Code ACU RITE 35001 Description Threads per inch TPI or lead of thread in MM Required NOTE The minimum number of threads per inch is 1 Absolute X coordinate of the center of the thread If no coordinate is entered the CNC puts the center of thread at the current tool position Absolute Y coordinate of the center of the thread If no coordinate is entered the CNC put
197. c 14 Ascending BZ Descending SUB PROGRAM HERE M_Mi11 lil My Slot Prog t Sample2 sl Sample3 sl Sample4 l Sample_ArcEn M Sample ArcEn e Samle Arcs Manual Data System Program To Run Showing 9 G M ree 158 6 Sort by Name 112 Ac acu rite cnc3500 user 37 a Rie ee template conversational s Unit Inch iM 35001 Plan e XY BlockFarn jena Mie 1 ZMax 0 0000 XMin 1 YMin 1 ZMin 1 Tool al 335001 3500iSlot M 3500iSlot Proper ac is AR 3 dx Favorite 7 9 Protected H Chapter OK Cancel nes HEE A EE le example TN 11117117171 000 in MIO Dog 11777717 000 El 1 808 is Sample4 M Sample _ArcE ll Sample Arcs Sample Cvcl New Unplug Recycle 95 Y c 2 m O 5 LL D O lt n O O pS a N LO Recycle Bin When a program is deleted it is sent to the Recycle Bin The Recycle Bin Recycle Bin allows the operator to restore or permanently delete a ieee programs that have been deleted from the folder ais Touch the Recycle Bin button located on the bottom bar The pop up dialogue provides four action steps that can be taken Restore or Delete permanently the selected program Empty the bin all items or Close bin Restore Delete Empty Bin l Close
198. ccepted commands are Inserted in the program ACU RITE 35001 371 InNITIONS Ga O 75 Q T Le e d 5 Q Z O N 11 3 Edit Help Activating Edit Help G Code Assist Edit Help provides diagrams and entry fields to program move types and Canned Cycles The following describes how to activate the Help Screen for a G Code and type values in the appropriate entry fields Manual Data System 5 A susan ED i ue Code Ass 1G Code Assist a G code Description a 0 16 Functions GO Rapid Move EndPoint Ml G1 Feed Move EndPoint Basic Modal Functions G2 Arc CW Radius and EndPoint Multi Segment Blocks G3 Arc CCW Radius and EndPoint E Drilling Cycles xact Stop Pocket Cycles i an ca ipe Milling and Profiles A z A G19 YZ Plane Rotation Scaling and Mirroring gt G22 Stroke Limit Spindle Probing G28 Reference Point Return Tool Probing G29 Return from Reference Point Manh n Dates Q I O LL a q q Preview R F To The Help button is a toggle key that opens the Help screen and touched on again exits the Help screen gt A program must be open in edit mode to use Edit Help Mava Dafaranman Fueam Tool Radius Compensation Other G Functions 3 1 M Functions w i i 2 AL J 12 M3 13 G75 M76 2 W50 8 H2 Z 2 I100 J500 U1 V5 C15 K500 P30 14 T3 D9 5 L 359 160 15 GO X76 2 Y 50
199. cription Sub Modes Within the three main operating modes Manual Data Input Program O Management and Program Run there are sub modes for each The ei al ee ale Sub Modes are accessed via the horizontal menu bar along the bottom g 2990 chs l of the touch screen c n gt 2 O 2 gt N Sub modes for Manual Data Input provide data input for machining operations such as milling a line an arc engraving drilling and creating pockets All these are accessed by filling the corresponding form Manual operation can also be done here As well as access to tool management and fixture offset tables See Manual Data Input Menu Bar on page 40 for a complete description The 35001 remembers all operations which can then easily be saved to a program for later re use lt is also possible to re run a previous operation without having to re enter all the data Sub modes for Program Management provide access to edit existing programs or create a new program The CAM Draw CA ef am 2 act gees Sg ton N features can be accessed here where a program can be run in simulation mode If a program was accidentally deleted it can be recovered using the Recycle Bin See Accessing Program Management on page 88 for a complete description Sub modes for Program Run provide access to such actions as auto run a program without pausing or single step through a program and provide a drawing display of the machinin
200. ction indicated on the rotational key The 3D model can also be rotated by touching and dragging To pan the preview touch the Pan button Directional arrow buttons become available Re Start Preview will re draw the entire part graphic Clear Preview will clear any part graphics but leave the blockform in place Sim Tools loads the simulation tool table Refer to Chapter 8 Viewing Programs on page 256 The Show Hide Block Form will show or hide the block form only when in 3D solid mode Returns the user to the main preview menu im Tool and Sim Offset tables are only accessible the feature is enabled in the configuration See lation Tool and Offset Tables on page 71 A Manual Data Input Re Start Preview e Jas 1 Simple setup for easy testing 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L 1 6 7 Call sub program s 8 Call 1 9 Call 2 18 Call 3 11 Call 4 12 Call 5 13 Call 6 14 Call 7 15 Call 8 16 Call 9 17 Call 10 18 Call 11 19 Call 12 28 Call 13 21 EndMain 22 23 Sub program definition s 24 System 5 ell el 117 O E E n O d 0 6 9 m Y i gt Q m Program Display Relation A program line can be selected In the editing area or preview area fanua st 1 Dat ae az ine A i i pe 7 ane Program Run ain sae Shutdown 11 57am al When selected it is highlighted in purple in the preview area
201. ctive mode Conversational format Rapid G code format GO Rapid is overridden by the Line Move and uses the Feed Rate that has been provided Press the Other button to select the Rapid Move variant that best fits your needs Each variant is described next This figure visually depicts the Angle and Radius parameters used in some of these variants to specify the desired end point coordinate Rapid Move EndPoint Specify the desired end point coordinate using actual position designations either in absolute or incremental Field Code Description X X Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired X Axis destination Y Y Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Y Axis destination Z Z Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis destination U U Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired U Axis destination ToolComp T Select the modal tool diameter compensation to activate or select Off to deactivate comp All parameters are optional 122 Y Axis Y Position y Stopping Point Radius Distance X Axis Starting Point X Position Rapid Move EndPoin X y HE e os oe 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Rapid Move Angle and Radius Specify the desired end point coordinate using the radius and angle of the movement Field Code Radius R Angle C Z Z ToolComp T Description Absolut
202. ctual size of the finished product Select the Tool Path button from the Geometry Tools in the main Toolbar SY contour Touching on Its center will flip it to the other side p The larger small circle represents the tool side of the of the line Select the Job Setup button from the Vertical button A bar to open the Job Setup dialogue For the Program Units select Inch Enter 1 for the Tool Number Enter 375 for the Tool Diameter Enter 1 for the Tool Length Enter Define and Use Tool for the Tool Action Touch Use to accept the Job Setup tool path ACU RITE 35001 A00 1S Shape View Select Edit Layers Type Manual Data System palace el Layer DefaultLayer X 0 620 Y 0 434 Job Setup m x Basic Advanced 1 Comment 1 337 O ve O O Sa A lt O E select the Block Form button from the Vertical button a bar to open the Block Form dialogue Xmax Enter 2 000 Ymax Enter 2 000 Zmax Enter 0 000 Xmin Enter 1 000 Ymin Enter 1 000 Zmin Enter 1 000 Or Select the Estimate BlockForm button to have CAM estimate the Block Form dimensions from the defined shape s Touch Use to accept the Block form tool path O Sen O O Sa A lt O a Verify Tool Path graphic and touch Yes to accept 338 Manual Data 7 System O ai cs el Layer
203. current position Y coordinate of the island center point Defaults to current position The arc radius of all four inner corners of the island Defaults to tool radius which is the minimum value allowed The arc radius of all four outer corners of the frame pocket Defaults to U InsideRad value Must exceed tool radius The depth of each cut per pass Defaults to tool diameter Max is the full ZDepth in parameter Z less bottom finish stock A negative value will cause the finish pass to finish the side walls in steps down Preview Manual Data System e a t 2am io Lk i jase rame Pocket Cycle lo e000 0 0000 0 0000 17 ss oo EZE 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 206 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 207 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 208 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 Be aise More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview A ii jak disparas 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field FinStock SideStock RampFeed Rough Feed FinFeed RetractHgt Coarse Tool SkipRough SkipFinish Direction Code Q G code format G75 ACU RITE 35001 Description Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass This amount appl
204. d Ycenter J Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Y Axis arc center a point Required x Angle G Included polar degree angle of the arc L Required Ss Z Z Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis destination Feed F Feedrate at which to conduct the machining movement CornerRad A Positive arc radius for corner rounding negative X Y distance for chamfering ACU RITE 35001 133 Using Arc Center and EndPoint to create a circle Since the start point and end point of a circle are the same you do not need to program an end point to create a circle Position the tool at the required starting point before you execute the arc move Omit the end point parameters for X and Y Conversational example Arc CCW XCenter O YCenter 5 G code example G91 G3 I0 J 5 Basic Cycles O Arc Move Center and Angle Absolute mode C e n st Absolute 60 Position Cw Tool Path NS Ccw Tool Path x Absolute Anale LLI Center Point Reference Absolute Position Pa Startina Point Present Position Arc Move Center and Angle Incremental mode Ccw Tool Path Startina Point Present Position Incremental 60 Position Cw Tool Path Programming a full circle is not possible when using the O XYR Radius and EndPoint format 134 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Dwell Dwell G4 can be used to program a delay between block
205. d information a In Program Run Mode touch the Block Search button In the Block Search Menu it prompts for text or select Go to Block to search for a line in the program Type the required number or text and touch 0k The 3500 runs the search and highlights the first block it finds that contains the number or text Touch the START button to execute the block or motion Touch Previous to search from the cursor location to the beginning Touch Next to search from the cursor location to the end of the program Touch the START button to execute the block or motion ACU RITE 35001 O Manual Data Program Input Management System mes ia el M f p ock Search 1 Simple setu oin Abs O 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L 1 Previous tot gt E 7 Call sub pr ii SPREE 9 Call 2 19 Call 3 KE E 11 Call 4 A Ae POE a z fe le O 13 Call 6 4 View Adjust OC Gag Y Parts OIE 269 a O Q O e C a m E E O hom O e C as m Using Draw with running programs When Draw is activated a display window opens When the program is started the loaded tool movement and the action it is taking Is displayed In Program Run mode touch the Draw button to activate the display screen Choose the appropriate starting point in the program Touch the START button to run the program
206. d Features File Inclusion File inclusion is a function that allows a sub program that is not actually part of the program to be called from the main program or from another sub program in the program In this way a tool change sub program or a macro can be stored in the directory and called from any other program that has the proper tile inclusion code which allows the execution of the external sub program Format open left bracket then double quote character then the program name and Its extension This line must display somewhere in the program that is to call the included program In this way the same sub program can be used in many programs but you do not need to type it into each program Each program must contain the proper program inclusion block The program to be included must be in the form of a sub program beginning with Onnn and ending with the M99 code The format for program inclusion is FILENAME G It is especially useful for including tool change sub programs zero setting sub programs and macros Example 1 FILENAME G Example 1 shows the syntax necessary to include a program into another program ACU RITE 35001 429 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q Block N1 N2 N3 N4 N5 NG N7 O Sam O O pe A O O G gt O lt q q N33 N34 N35 N36 N50 N51 N52 430 Exam
207. d a comment if needed that will be placed in program See sample Comment tab on page 300 O ES L O O Se A lt O an 304 10 CAM Programming Pocket Finish Cycles The Pocket Finish Cycles tool path is used to generate a bottom and or side pocket finish cycle A Pocket Cycle tool path is required prior to the pocket finish cycle The Pocket Finish cycle uses the shape and islands specified in the previous Pocket cycle Bottom tab Bottom Finish Check this box to use the bottom finish parameters in the finish cycle Tool Enter the tool number to use for the cycle Ramp Feed Enter the ramp feed Automatically calculated if tool being used is defined in the Tool Table Ramp Feed Rough Feed Finish Feed 2 Finish Feed Enter the XY axes finish feed rate Coolant Choose None On M8 Off M9 or Mist M7 See Coolant on page 292 Spindle Dir Choose Forward Reverse Off or None See Spindle Direction on page 292 Spindle Speed Enter the spindle speed Finish Dir Direction of the finish pass CW or CCW Side tab Side Finish Check this box to use the side finish parameters in the finish cycle Z Depth Enter the absolute depth of the finished pocket Depth Cut Enter the Z axis increment used for each pass Side Stock Enter that amount of side stock to be left for additional finish operations If required Tool Enter the tool number to use for the cycle R
208. d offset data previously entered into the NC tables prior to entering Simulation mode By default this feature is disabled The use of the Simulation tables can be enabled disabled in the configuration via the entry usesimTables under the section UserSetup gt CfgTooltableSettings ACU RITE 35001 71 E H 8 E jad m N vr 4 2 Tool Data T Codes and Tool Activation To activate a tool program a T Code followed by the tool number The tool number corresponds to the row number in the Tool Table A program tool call example starts with a T followed by the tool number e g T1 Activating Offsets via the Program In a program 11 by itself calls the Tool Table diameter and length offsets for the specified tool 11 with D R and L address words programs a temporary diameter radius and length offset independent of the Tool Table The entered D diameter or R radius and L tool length offsets remain active until you cancel the active tool T1 Format Description T1 Activates Tool 1 diameter offset listed in the Tool Table T1 D 5000 L 1 2500 Applies a diameter offset of 5000 and length offset of 1 2500 to the active tool T1 R 2500 L 1 2500 Applies a tool radius value of 2500 and length offset of 1 2500 to the active tool The diameter offset takes effect when you program Left G41 or Right G42 All dimensions are in reference to the work surface If
209. d over the probe stylus so the tooth that sticks down the furthest is directly over the center of the probe stylus and above the stylus less than 0 100 2 0 mm 7 3 Probing Cycles If the spindle is locked you may have to unlock it to manually orient the tool tooth over the probe stylus To measure the tool length Jog the tool to the top of the probe stylus so that the tooth that sticks down the furthest is directly over the center of the probe stylus From the Manual Data Input Mode with G code MDI selected type G152 Tn Dd and touch the Start button Where T is the tool number and D is roughly the diameter of the special tool For example G152 To D25 The spindle turns on in reverse and the Z axis should go down and touch the top of the probe stylus keeping the X and Y position the same then rapid up 0 02 0 508 mm and then retouch using the slow feedrate programmed in the machine setup parameter The cycle then updates the tool length offset register clearing any value in the length wear register turn the spindle off and return the tool to the Z height where it started The Tool Length has been set and you can now change to another tool and repeat steps 1 through 3 212 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Manual Tool Diameter Measure for Special Tools Updates tool diameter register for irregular shaped tools or tools with a hole in the center of the bottom This cycle is used to measure the diameter of
210. d to be done again unless the probe is moved or a new part is being setup The cycle must always know the relationship between the top of the part and the top of the probe to set the TLO 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 38 Arc Ccw X 0 16113 Y 0 45042 XCenter 0 08062 YCenter 0 03126 31 Arc Cw X 0 10449 Y 0 48650 XCenter 0 05664 YCenter 0 02642 32 Line X 0 10443 Y 0 48650 A g A 33 Arc Cw X 0 16109 Y 0 45037 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 This cycle is used to calibrate the probe This is used to set the Z 34 Arc Cow X 0 31588 Y 0 44772 XCenter 9 07804 YCenter 0 03631 35 Arc Cw X 0 34324 Y 0 46468 XCenter 0 02764 YCenter 0 01403 datum for length preset establishing the center of the probe stylus 5 gt and the effective probe stylus diameter for setting tool diameter 1 Ta More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview registers PA inci eee E Field Code Description N 2 O gt O O E O Tim A N DiamOfStd D The diameter of the part of the calibration standard that comes in contact with the probe stylus during calibration This should be an exact measurement Optional override for the DiameterOfToolProbeGauge machine setup parameter DistDown E The incremental distance from the current Z Retract amount to go down along the side of the probe stylus when doing a diameter pick The maximum E value is 0 55 13 97 mm or the tool may crash into the probe or table If you enter
211. d tool path Update the data that require editing Select the Use button in the data dialogue to save the changes and exit A prompt appears asking to Save the modified tool path Move Up Delete Disable commands Move Down Copy Ok x Block Form Properties x max 12 000000 Y max 12 000000 Z max 12 000000 X min 0 000000 Y min 0 000000 Z min 0 000000 Comment Disabling and Enabling Tool Paths To disable a Tool Path Open the Tool Path Edit dialogue Select the tool path to disable from the numbered list of tool path buttons Select the Disable button Disabled tool paths have an X to the right of them in the Tool Path Edit dialogue Blocks will not show in program To enable a disabled tool path follow these steps but select the Enable button for a disabled tool path O ES Sen O O u A lt O a Deleting Tool Paths To delete a Tool Path Open the Tool Path Edit dialogue Select the tool path to delete from the numbered list of tool path buttons Select the Delete button A delete confirmation dialogue will pop up Select the Yes button to confirm tool path deletion or No to cancel Arranging Tool Paths Sequence To arrange the Tool Path sequence Open the Tool Path Edit dialogue Select a tool path from the numbered list of tool path buttons Select the Move Up or Move Down button This will move the selected tool path and change the
212. drate Defaults to last programmed feedrate EE oe E 163 0 O gt O O D O N N Thread Mill Cycle Manual Data System e din 3 12pm el A The first move in this cycle is a rapid move to the center of A the thread before moving the Z axis Make sure the tool is 8000 properly located before calling up this cycle Use the thread milling for cutting inside or outside threads It cuts either Inch or MM left or right hand and Z movement up or down A single tooth or multi toothed tool may be used Start can be at the top or bottom of the hole or boss The tools are set as you would normally set TLO 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 206 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 207 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 far 208 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 Y 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 Abs Inc Ye O gt O O Q N N Field Code Description 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit g Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features ZFinish Z Absolute Z position where the thread cut will finish This can be above or below the start position depending on the direction of the thread cut up or down Required ZStart H A
213. ds from the R plane to the first peck depth in Z rapid retracts the chip break increment W feeds to the next calculated peck depth initial peck less J and continues this sequence until it reaches a U depth or until final hole depth is reached The peck distance is never more than or less than K This cycle enables optimum drilling conditions for holes For maximum efficiency in deep hole drilling set parameters to accommodate the material and tool types used Generally the deeper the hole the smaller the peck distance J This prevents the binding of chips tool and workpiece Set U to retract the drill completely at set depth intervals Field Code Description ZDepth Z Absolute hole depth Required MinPeck K Minimum peck distance positive dimension Required StartHgt R Initial Z start point in rapid Required PeckDecr J Amount to subtract from previous peck positive dimension Required FirstPeck First peck distance positive dimension Required e Manual Data Input ReturnHgt P Z return point after hole depth in rapid Retract U Incremental depth between full retracts Dep positive dimension ChipBrkInc W Chip break increment positive dimension Feed F Feedrate G code format G87 154 System 16 46am to A hintaan a MM 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 286 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 287 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106
214. ds to have the machining side set to Right see block 58 gt The island must always be programmed before the Block 16 is a now an irregular pocket defined by sub program 1 Note that finish stock is specified and the cycle is requested to skip the finish pass This is required for the stand alone finish cycles Block 17 defines the finer roughing tool which a 1 4 diameter Block 18 re defines the island for the finer roughing tool Block 19 re defines the pocket for the finer roughing tool with the specification of the coarsetool 1 Specifying the coarse tool as tool 1 allows the pocket cycle to calculate the material left by the coarse tool and only machine the required material Also note that finish stock is specified and the cycle is requested to skip the finish pass This is required for the stand alone finish cycles ACU RITE 35001 253 YN z i O O 5 Q Y N Block 20 defines the finish tool which a 1 4 diameter Finishing could be done with the same tool but for illustration purposes a different tool is used Block 21 re defines the island for the side finish tool This is necessary for the finish cycle to work properly Block 22 is the side finish cycle Note that it allows leaving stock thus permitting multiple finish passes to be taken each with different tool if needed Block 23 re defines the island for the bottom finish tool This is necessary for the finish cycle t
215. e Frame Pocket Cycle Hole Mill Cycle Circular Pocket Cycle Rectangular Pocket Cycle Drill Bolt Hole Cycle 367 INITIONS Ga O Q 75 Q T Le e Q 5 Q z O N INITIONS Ga d O Q Q S Le e d Lo Q 5 O N G Code G80 G81 G82 G83 G84 G85 G86 G87 G89 G90 G91 G92 G100 G120 G133 G134 G162 368 Description Use to cancel drill tap and bore canned cycles G81 to G89 Basic drilling cycle generally used for center drilling or hole drilling that does not require a pecking motion counter bore drill cycle generally used for counter boring Peck drilling cycle generally used for peck drilling relatively shallow holes Tapping canned cycle used for tapping holes Boring cycle generally used to make a pass in each direction on a bore or to tap with a self reversing tapping head Boring cycle that allows the X axis to back off the bore surface after the spindle has stopped and oriented itself Chip breaker peck drilling cycle generally used to peck drill medium to deep holes Boring cycle generally used to program a pass in each direction with a dwell at the bottom Sets 35001 to Absolute Mode Sets 3500i to Incremental Mode Shifts the location of Absolute Zero to a preset location The preset location measured from Machine Home is specified in the G92 command G100 programmed with axis G100 X activa
216. e ae x BBa 1 90 2 0 088 T O O 1 solid Bo 01 Patines offset 1 Select the desired default template file TEMPLATE G for G Code i Sin Fred sas programs or TEMPLATE M for Conversational programs Sp Press the copy buton DOC a D Press the Paste button which will create a copy of the original file in that same location Select the new copy of the file then press and hold the new file copy to bring up the Properties dialogue Enter the new name exactly as OEMTEMPLATE and press OK Editing a custom program template is done in the same way as editing any normal program by selecting the program and pressing the Edit button am am ad O ad O 2 Y e O y LL O q o de Q 0 LO ACU RITE 35001 99 uny 0 6unsa as 3 bunip3 bunes1 eg 5 Program Management 100 iting Conversational Ed 6 1 Conversational Programming Getting Started Program blocks are written using the Edit button Regardless whether oc Caeser E na Program Run a eerie utdown 3 56pm al a new program is being created or an existing program is being edited 28 Line X 0 34902 Y 0 47550 a g Preview 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 A 38 Arc Ccw X 0 16113 Y 0 45042 XCenter 0 08062 YCenter 0 03126 31 Arc Cw X 0 10449 Y 0 48650 XCenter 0 05664 YCenter 0 02642 a See Accessing Program Management on page 88 Information for creatin
217. e 3500i displays an error message nn not defined A When a direct transfer is requested the variable on the 402 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Indirect Transfer You can indirectly transfer variables to a depth of four levels by introducing extra hatch marks before the variable number In an indirect transfer a value is transferred to one variable via another Example 1 N201 N202 N203 N204 G90 G17 G71 GO 101 51 456 102 101 X 102 At Block N204 the X axis moves to 51 456 Example 1 shows single indirection The contents of variable 101 are used by variable 102 The actual content of variable 102 is constant 101 The indirection is activated at Block N204 by the addition of the symbol to variable 102 Example 2 N210 N211 N212 N213 N214 N215 N216 N217 N218 N219 N220 N221 ACU RITE 35001 G90 G17 G71 GO 101 1 102 2 103 3 104 4 119 100 LOOP 4 119 119 1 120 119 X 120 END M2 403 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q Example 2 contains two levels of indirection N219 and shows how the contents from multiple variables can be assigned to a command or expression At Block N215 variable 119 is set to constant 100 At Block N217 one is added to the contents of variable 119 At Block N218 variable 120 Is set to constant 119 Block N219 moves the X axis to the position contained i
218. e F cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original feedrate Optional This is the override for the RPM that was set in the machine setup parameter callbAndToolMeasurementRPM This is used for the same reason as the F cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original RPM Optional 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs To use the automatic tool preset Install all the tools you wish to set In the tool changer Type in G151 T tool D tool rough diameter Q2 If run from the inside of a program this line needs to be repeated for every tool that you want to set Execute that line if you are in Manual or run the program if you have set all the tools up in a program If you have done a single tool in Manual that tool is now measured and you are ready to measure the next tool If you have placed multiple lines in a program one for each tool all your tools are measured and ready for use Shell mill style tools that have a hole in the center of the bottom do not work with this canned cycle in this case you must use the manual canned cycles G152 Manual Tool Length Measure for Special Tools for length and G153 Manual Tool Diameter Measure for Special Tools for diameter See Table 5 45 G151 Address Words This cycle is only good for drills taps reamers ball nosed endmills and stand
219. e action desired The Restart positions dialog will display the original position of the axis or axes before the manual movements were conducted The choice can be made to restart each individual axis to that corresponding position or to restart all axes to their respective positions shown Only axes that were moved will be available to restart the position Touch Restart X to return the X Axis to the original position shown Touch Restart Y to return the Y Axis to the original position shown Touch Restart Z to return the Z Axis to the original position shown Touch Restart U to return the U Axis to the original position shown Touch All Axes to return all applicable axes to the original positions shown Touch Cancel Program to cancel the program run entirely Once the desired choice has been selected press Start to move the axis axes to the original positions The 35001 will now prompt you to press Start to continue with normal program execution 276 SEES sation a k ta ve Z 1 Dim Abs 2 Unit Inch 3 Plane XY 4 BlockForm XMax 6 YMax 6 ZMax 0 0 5 RPM 2000 6 Tool 1 Diameter 5 Length 2 MC 7 MCode 3 8 Feed 300 9 RectPock Length 4 Width 2 StartH 18 CircPock Diameter 5 StartHgt 0 1 11 FramePock IslandLen 2 IslandWid 12 RingPock IslandDia 4 FrameWidth 13 HolePock Diameter 1 CCW ZDepth w 44 Clak llamarte A Lis deh 1 Chawtlnte 4 gt Restart Restart Restart All X Y Z Axes 28 9 Running
220. e are yr tae Marre re a Peer i renee tee Rr E Pete 429 Four Axis Programming AA An toast wal AR a TT 432 PMV I P tei PEA AE ere este eae io aah A A EE cece 432 O O A 432 CONVErSION TOLMIN css eu e eT aE ETT 432 Rotary Axis Programming Conventions iii da 433 POGINA A A EE 433 XXV Software Update ed Updating System Software DOMWale O En 438 Procedure Tor pdatmg the SOM Wale sentia 438 Off Line Software tol XXVI 35001 Off Line Software OLENE OI alturas dde 440 A thcticat A A 440 HS WANTON a costs todita 441 OP AP rR OM TE ee Re Pe EL 441 Mas A A IA 441 ACU RITE a 451 0000 251 2000 o 440 0000 T i NERCEDESST G Tool o 3 Diameter 6 0000 A Tool Cop OFF Length 6 6008 gt 120934 Poteet 7 LJ 5 y 7 Loop 8 Dwell blkfrm x452 y 258 245 0 1250 j Parts 1 dog FEED er 14 G53 001 X221 00 396 60 Timer Ine 00 17 18 G 0 17 48 71 90 11 G53001 FIXTURE OFFSET 61 Timer Abs 68 17 18 M 59 ril 12 102 06 L340 0 M5 TOOL CHANG pFeed 1828800 0 l gt 19 Ol SHETRIC MODE y pSpeed 9999 0 z gt EPS OFF Block i Search OA digs a el eee cis O s ENE y H iha O LO mM Ea E q 1 1 The 35001 The ACU RITE 35001 control is a touch screen workshop oriented contouring control that enables you to program conventional machining operations right at the machine in an easy to use conversational programming language The control is also ca
221. e block at a time The Cut button can also be used ER Touch the Edit Features button to access the next Features m e n U Y Touch the Cut button to remove the block or blocks selected and place them on the clipboard Cut If removing more than one block at a time is desired firstuse one of the Mark methods described in Mark a program block Highlight multiple blocks then press the Cut button to remove them Inserting a program block Inserting a program block or blocks in an existing program is typically done by adding a feature at the correct location in the program Place the cursor where a new block is to be inserted Add the feature that is required at that location See Conversational Data Input Cycles on page 105 which provides a list of features available 112 e Manual Data System 3 Input See sea ol 1 Simple setup for easy testing 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L 1 6 7 Call sub program s 8 Call 1 9 Call 2 18 Call 3 11 Call 4 12 Call 5 13 Call 6 14 Call 7 15 Call 8 16 Call 9 17 Call 10 18 Call 11 19 Call 12 28 Call 13 21 EndMain 22 23 Sub program definition s 24 ES e Manual Data System 1 ES 2 Dim Abs A 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 a 5 T1 D 01 L 1 T 6 7 Call sub program s 8 Call 1 9 Call 2 18 Call 3 11 Call 4 12 Call 5 13 Call 6 14 Call 7 15 Call 8 16 Call 9 17 Call 10 18 Call 11
222. e current position of the stylus as an actual value ACU RITE 35001 23 Tn D Q 7 7 qd O O lt Y q Tn D Q 7 9 qd O O lt Y q TT 140 tool touch probe for tool measurement The TT 140 is a triggering 3 D touch probe for tool measurement and inspection Your CNC provides three cycles for this touch probe with which you can measure the tool length and radius automatically either with the spindle rotating or stopped The TT 140 features a particularly rugged design and a high degree of protection which make it insensitive to coolants The triggering signal is generated by a wear resistant and highly reliable optical switch HR electronic hand wheels Electronic hand wheels facilitate moving the axis slides precisely by hand A wide range of traverses per hand wheel revolution is available Apart from the HR 130 and HR 150 integral hand wheels HEIDENHAIN Corp also offers the HR 410 portable hand wheel Electronic Edge Finder The Electronic Edge Finder enables the ability to teach positions find the center point of a circle or locate datum work piece zero by touching off on the part Advantage of an electronic edge finder is that it instantly senses when contact is made with the point even if the axis over traveled 24 1 Introduction Machining Fundamentals itioning YN 0 ma aL 4 eb O Ga LL To N 2 1 Fundamentals of Positionin
223. e current position to a calculated point based on being tangent to an arc of a given Radius R then feeds through the arc to the compensated starting point of the contour and enters the i contour tangent to the first move of the contour To create an arc A tangent in the opposite direction use a negative Radius R All l programmed Z movements occur during the entry move G41 Xx Yy Radius l Zz G36 O4 Rr Current Tool e le Contour Start Point Contour End Point Position S NY The line arc tangent exit move is executed the same as the entry but Calculated Point Programmed Path in reverse order G37 O4 Rr Xx Yy Zz gt Compensated Tool Path ii Entry Move E Tool Compensation with Line Arc Tangent Entry Move ACU RITE 35001 79 Special Code Temporary Change of Tool Diameter To change the tool radius in order to leave stock for a finish pass program the stock variable The variable assigned for this function is 1030 Example 120 1030 015 When the CNC reads the above block 0 015 is added to the active tool radius The value in the Tool Table for that tool is not updated and tool compensation is affected only until the tool is cancelled 1030 is temporary When the tool is cancelled TO 1030 Is also cancelled jad m N vr Example 120 1030 015 In this case 0 015 is subtracted from the active tool s radius gt Also a negative number can be used You mu
224. e defined center point as Strictly a point to rotate about Default is YES Specify YES to mirror the sub program pattern and movements across the X Axis Specify YES to mirror the sub program pattern and movements across the Y Axis Specify YES to mirror the sub program pattern and movements across the Z Axis X Axis scale factor Multiplies all X Axis positions by the number specified Y Axis scale factor Multiplies all Y Axis positions by the number specified Z Axis scale factor Multiplies all Z Axis positions by the number specified 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Pocket and Islands example The pocketing and islands features are very powerful programming features that provide the user the ability to program the machining of parts from a simplified nature to a very complex design By providing examples of using these features the user can better understand and take advantage of these features The following examples consist of a sample program an explanation of the key blocks in the program and accompanying graphics showing the expected result in the line view and 3D solid graphics display These examples do not necessarily reflect actual cutting conditions An estimated machining time is given at the end of each program The machining time is only for reference and to illustrate the benefit of some features for example the coarse tool feature These example programs have been created using conver
225. e finish stock by calling the appropriate finish cycle To leave finish stock during the pocket cycles to be removed with later finish passes select the option Yes for the SkipFinish parameter This will leave finish stock but not remove it Pocket cycles with the exception of Frame allow the use of island definitions using the island command Please refer to the Islands section for a detailed description of its usage ACU RITE 3500i 171 desired Field Bottom Length Ye O gt O O Q N N Bottom Width Z Depth Z Step Rough Start Height Draft Angle Lower Left Rad Lower Right Rad Upper Right Rad Upper Left Rad 172 Code X Draft Angle Pocket Cycle Use the draft pocket milling cycle to machine a draft angle on the outer contour of a pocket The tool must be positioned at the center point of the lower left corner radius at the bottom of the draft pocket prior to running the draft pocket cycle This is where the machining begins You can program a rectangular pocket cycle to mill out an initial pocket prior to the draft angle pocket block if Description X length at the bottom of the pocket Required Y width at the bottom of the pocket Required Z absolute pocket depth Required Z axis roughing step down Required Z absolute rapid start height must be 0 1 or 2 mm above surface Required Draft angle to be machined on vertical walls o
226. e intersection of a line tangent to an arc Corner rounding can be used to blend inside or outside radii Tool diameter compensation can be active during corner rounding When you blend inside radii with diameter compensation active the blend radius must be greater than the tool radius G code format G59 Line to Line Corner Rounding When the first move contains a CornerRad value the CNC automatically finds the radius center and the tangent points necessary to calculate the tool path The resulting tool path follows the solid line 120 Second Move End Point Radius Tangent to Second Move Su Radius CornerRad Value Intersection Between Two Line Moves Radius Tangent A to First Move First Move Solid Line Path of Tool Starting Point 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Line to Arc Corner Rounding When the first move contains a CornerRad value the CNC automatically finds the radius center and the tangent points necessary to calculate the tool path The resulting tool path follows the solid line If the line move is already tangent to the arc move the CNC ignores corner rounding Arc to Arc Corner Rounding When a CornerRad value is programmed into the first move the CNC automatically finds the radius center and the tangent points necessary to calculate the tool path The resulting tool path follows the solid line Chamfering Chamfer between two consecutive line moves A cha
227. e island or use the X Y words Q A A 7 i A 0 0000 0000 0 0000 0000 5 Activate the tool prior to programming so the cutter diameter is known 0 Field Code Descripti le ode escription 5 IslandDia D Diameter of island in X Y axes Required N StartHgt H Z absolute starting height 0 1 or 2 mm 9 CN above surface Executed in rapid bee Required ys i Call sub program s SS SS _ OU ZDepth Z Absolute depth of frame pocket Required A O Frame C Width of removed trough or frame l l Width Required StepOver A The distance the tool steps over width of cut in the X and Y axes as it mills out the pocket Defaults to tool radius which is the max XCenter X X coordinate of the island center point Defaults to current position YCenter Y Y coordinate of the island center point Defaults to current position DepthCut B The depth of each cut per pass Defaults to tool diameter Max is the full ZDepth in parameter Z less bottom finish stock A negative value will cause the finish pass to finish the side walls in steps down 184 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field FinStock SideStock RampFeed Rough Feed FinFeed RetractHgt Coarse Tool SkipRough SkipFinish Direction G code format G212 Code Q ACU RITE 35001 Description Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass This amount applies to the sides and bottom unless R SideStock is def
228. e must be equipped with spindle M functions Z axis depth can be changed by placing a new Z depth on the same line as the X and or Y axis location of the hole you want the new depth applied A Z address on a line of its own causes the control to drill the new depth at the current location Call sub program s Basic Drill Cycle Modal cycles remain active until canceled Use Drilloff G80 to cancel 9 me Shutdown ol drill tap and bore canned cycles AR 3 m Basic drilling cycle is generally used for center drilling or hole drilling that does not require a pecking motion lt feeds from the start height R to the specitied hole depth Z at a given feedrate F then rapids to the return height P Field Code Description ZDepth Zz Absolute hole depth Required munu StartHgt R Initial Z start point in rapid Required ES A ReturnHgt P Z return point after hole depth in rapid cs ane More Delete Pocket Edit Preview A G code format G81 150 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Counterbore Drill Cycle 3 Counterbore drill cycle generally used for counterboring It feeds shutdown 2 56pm MEA from the R plane to Z depth dwells for specified time then rapids E S to the return point n 2 Field Code Description go ZDepth Z Absolute hole depth Required 2 StartHgt R Initial Z start point in rapid Required ReturnHgt P Z return point after hole depth in rapid EIEEE O _
229. e or incremental distance to the desired destination Required Polar degree angle of the radius from the start point to the desired destination Required Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis destination Select the modal tool diameter compensation to activate or select Off to deactivate comp Rapid Move Angle and X Specify the desired end point coordinate using the angle of the movement and the actual X Axis position designation Field Code X X Angle C Z Z ToolComp T ACU RITE 35001 Description Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired X Axis destination Required Polar degree angle of the radius from the start point to the desired destination Required Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis destination Select the modal tool diameter compensation to activate or select Off to deactivate comp Rapid Move Angle and Radius lo 0000 ss os oe Rapid Move Angle and X FIS lo 0000 e E en 123 Basic Cycles ining 7 1 Expla Rapid Move Angle and Y Specify the desired end point coordinate using the angle of the movement and the actual Y Axis position designation Field Code Description Y Y Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Y Axis destination Required E EN Basic Cycles Angle C Polar degree angle of the radius from the start point to the des
230. e table will not be updated A It is important to define a tool prior to doing any tool paths Coolant Choose None On M8 Off M9 or Mist M7 None Coolant parameter is ignored On Turns coolant use on Off Turns coolant use off Mist turn on coolant mist Spindle Direction Choose Forward Reverse Off or None Forward Turns the spindle on in the forward direction Reverse Turns the spindle on in the reverse direction Off Turns the spindle off None Spindle direction parameter is ignored Any previously defined spindle direction remains active Spindle Speed Use recommended RPM speed from the manufacture Spindle Speed field Enter the spindle speed automatically entered If tool specified is entered in the tool table 292 10 CAM Programming Job Setup Advanced tab Advanced tab Data Entries This allows the toolpath to rotated scaled or mirrored Rotation Angle Enter rotation angle X Center Enter the center of rotation in X axis Y Center Enter the center of rotation In Y axis Rotation Action Choose None Use or Off None Rotation Action parameter is ignored Any previously defined Rotation Action remains active Use Rotates tool paths by angle defined in the Rotation Angle field and centers the rotation on the X Center and Y Center fields Off Turns off any previously defined Rotation Action Mirror X Select to activate mirroring for the X axis Mirror Y Select to activ
231. e the Pocket Cycle for the Tool Path 10 1 CAM Programming OINA 340 10 CAM Programming CAM Example 2 Example Two Creating a Rough Pocket Finish Pocket Specifications Units Inch Material Mild Steel 1020 Tool 1 4 flute roughing end mill Tool 2 4 flute finish end mill Tool 1 Path 1 Rough pocket Z depth 0 740 Tool 2 Path 2 Finish pocket Z depth 0 750 O ve O O Sa A lt O E Create Circle Geometry Select the Circle button from the Geometry Tools in CANSample2 dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 3 356 Y 1 236 00 00 00 O the main Toolbar Acova e Select the Create Circle button for the method to be used to define the geometry from the side Toolbar Enter the following information on the Create Circle pop up dialogue see Geometry on page 316 for reference to the pop up dialogue BIKIRA either touch ENTER or click the next field with the mouse gt To move to the next dialogue field in the pop up dialogue button Start X field Enter 2 Start Y field Enter 1 75 Radius field Enter 1 Touch the USE button on the pop up dialogue or Enter from the numeric key pad Setup Exit Adjust ToolPath Create View Edit Program Shape View Select Edit Layers Tone ACU RITE 35001 341 O Sen O O u A lt O a The Circ
232. e the shape to that location 324 Shape Edit Shape Edit 10 CAM Programming Tool Table The CAM Mode tool table is used to define parameters for machining CAN Setup tools used in the program Entering parameters into the tool table a E Tool Tool Tool Number Surface Spindle ChipLoad Feed Chia enables you to manage tool information from one location AA m m w When a tool that is setup in the tool table is specified in a tool path the information for that tool is automatically loaded into the tool parameter fields Parameters that can be automatically entered into tool path parameters are tool diameter tool length spindle speed oil feed rough and finish Z feed and ramp feed This is done when entering the corresponding tool number in the Tool parameter field of Inport Export Cancel appty use a tool path form gt en Heee O ve O O Sa A lt O a Z Feed used in Mill Cycles and Ramp Feed used in Pocket Cycles are parameters that can be automatically calculated and entered in their respective tool path fields but are not parameters included in the tool table These parameters are calculated as follows Z Feed Finish Feed Ramp Feed Rough Feed Finish Feed 2 ACU RITE 35001 325 Tool Table Parameters Tools are numbered from 1 to the maximum number of tools The maxim
233. e to the theoretical corner or has an obstruction interfering with the default move Default is 0 4 10 16 mm Optional DistBack V Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it Default is 0 1 2 54 mm if not set Optional ACU RITE 35001 223 YN Q gt O O O pe A m N Field Code DistInxX A DistinY B X Y J Z K Offset W Description The distance from the starting point to move in the X axis to find the top of the part The default is toward the corner being found 0 4 10 16 mm Optional The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to find the top of the part The default is toward the corner being found 0 4 10 16 mm Optional This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the coordinate entered relative to the current active work coordinate before finding the corner Optional Same as only for the Y axis Optional Same as only for the Z axis Optional Work Coordinate to update with edge location in X and Y axes If set work coordinate is updated Work coordinate register is not updated if not set and a warning message tells the operator no update has taken place if W is not set Optional To use the Outside Corner Finding Cycle Place the probe in the spindle with its tool number active and the tool type set to Touch Probe Manually jog the probe stylus less than 0 1 2 54 mm
234. e tool probe cycles are only supported on machines with automatic spindle forward reverse and spindle speed and homing with a permanent X Y and Z machine position The method described assumes the use of negative tool length offsets In this method the Tool Length Offset TLO in the length column for each tool represents the distance from the tool tip at machine home to top of work piece and is anegative number This method does not require the use of any Z work coordinate offset to be active This procedure finds the effective tool diameter by turning the spindle on in reverse and touching two sides of the probe stylus then storing the tool s diameter in the tool s diameter offset table The spindle probing cycles are designed to assist in part setup Using these cycles one or more features edges of a part can be measured Using the data obtained with these measurements calculations are made that can be used to set a given fixture offset It is also possible to find the orientation angle of a part so as to not always have to align the part exactly Tool and spindle probing does not allow rotation scaling and mirroring Plane is set to XY when these cycles are complete requires the purchase of the Touch Probing Cycles Software Option D 648809 01 These cycles will not execute and will generate program stop errors If attempted to be used without this option enabled on the system SIK p The use of all Tool Probe and Spindle Pr
235. e variables They are divided into four categories Local variables 1 to 99 These variable numbers can be used only within the body of a sub program or macro The 35001 generates an error message if you program these variables in the main program Values do not hold from one sub program to another In this way the same variables can be used in separate sub programs with different values Common global variables 100 to 219 Read Write These variables can be used anywhere in the program or sub program and their value remains Read only variables 220 to 249 These variables can only be set in the main program Once set the variables can be used in sub programs or macros as read only variables Static global variables 260 to 279 Read Write These variables can be used anywhere in the program or sub program and their value remains across shutdowns or software resets and 260 269 for any custom macros End users should use 151 220 and 270 279 for your custom macros This avoids conflicting usage of the global variables AN OEM and machine tool builders should use 100 1 50 398 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Variable Programming Parametric Programming Variable or parametric programming enables you to create macros to generate geometric shapes that are not already available in a canned cycle Conditional loops jumps and GOTO commands can be used to control program execut
236. eate and simulate programs in the background while running another program in the NC Program Run mode without any interference between the two modes The Simulation Tool Table and Offset Table are structured and behave the same as the regular NC tables When this feature is enabled additional soft key buttons are available for accessing and altering the Simulation tables in Preview mode in the Editor and in Simulation Draw When this feature is disabled the buttons are not available When this feature is enabled programs being running in Simulation mode will utilize these special Simulation tables and thus will appear to behave exactly the same as they would in Program Run mode Write operations within Tool Call blocks and Offset definition blocks will be applied and saved to the Simulation tables just as they would normally do in Program Run mode with the NC tables There are also features available which allow the user to copy the data from the Simulation tables to the NC tables and vice versa When this feature is disabled programs in Simulation mode will instead retrieve the tool and offset data from the standard NC tables In order to eliminate the possibility of a simulated program altering the NC tables all write operations in Simulation mode are ignored such as the H UpdTable parameter in the Tool Call block In this context programs being simulated must have all tool and offset data defined within the program or all tool an
237. ected tool path and places a copy of that tool path at the end of the programming order The copied Tool path can be re ordered by using Move Up and Move Down buttons Edit Activates the selected Tool Path s parameters dialogue Use the parameters dialogue to edit any parameters for the Tool Path Disable Disables the selected Tool Path A disabled tool path will not be used when the program is generated and is marked with an X in the tool path list OK Closes the Tool Path Edit dialogue Use Existing Shape When editing tool paths that require shapes an existing shape associated with the tool path can be used or select an entirely different shape To use the existing shape touch inside the Use Existing Shape checkbox To use a new shape leave this box unchecked After touching the Use button you will be prompted to select a new shape for the tool path ACU RITE 35001 x Block Form Properties X max 12 000000 Y max 12 000000 Z max 12 000000 X min 0 000000 Y min 0 000000 Z min 0 000000 Comment Move Up Delete Edit Disable Move Down Copy Ok 329 O pe O O A lt O a q Editing a Tool Path To edit a Tool Path Select the Tool Path Edit button to open the Tool Path Edit dialogue Select the tool path to edit from the numbered list of tool path buttons Select the Edit button A Data dialogue opens displaying the data for the selecte
238. ection of the original pattern MM Rotation G72 Scaling G code formats G100 gt G100 Mirroring Use Scaling to enlarge or reduce patterns commanded by the program If a variable word is not given It is assumed to be x1 factor Axes for circular motion must have the same factor Tool length offsets diameter offsets tool wear factors and tool diameter compensation are not affected by scaling G code format G72 Select Field Code Description Sub P The number designation of the sub program to be used required LOOpS M The number of times the sub program will execute before returning back to the main program StartAngle F Polar degree angle which the pattern will rotate for the first Loop Defaults to same as Angle Angle C Polar degree angle which the pattern will rotate for the remaining Loops Defaults to same as StartAngle XCenter X Axis coordinate for the point of rotation the point about which rotation occurs YCenter J Y Axis coordinate for the point of rotation the point about which rotation occurs ACU RITE 35001 239 YN z i O O 5 Q Y N Field Code ZCenter K PivotPoint E MirrorX U MirrorY V MirrorZ W XScale X YScale Y ZScale Z 240 Description Z Axis coordinate for the point of rotation the point about which rotation occurs Specify YES to use the defined rotation center point as a pivoting point for the rotation Specify NO to use th
239. edited Select the Edit button in the Program Manager to open the program for editing 1 Basic template conversational 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Plane XY 5 6 BlockForm XMax 1 5 YMax 1 5 ZMax 0 0000 XMin 1 YMin 1 ZMin 1 7 Tool 1 MCode 6 8 orreet Fixture 1 a RPM AAAA Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit g Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features peic ACU RITE 35001 97 e am ad O a O 0 Y e O LL O d Q LO Selecting a Program To Run You must select a program before you can run it Only one program can be selected at a time Program Management Select a program to run From the Manual Data Input screen default screen touch the Program Management button to activate the program directory When a program is selected the program name will be highlighted Program selection With a program highlighted touch the Program To Run button The CNC now loads the program The name of the currently loaded program is displayed in the Program To Run button Touch the Program Run button The CNC loads the program and is ready to run refer to Chapter 9 98 O Manual Data Input Program To Run AR 3 m ll Showing r 9 G M Av user 34 System ED el B Sort by Name 14 1135001 M 35001 sl 3500iSlot H 3500iSlot iM AR 3 cam test M Chapter 6 DAVESDXF Drilling_TST Engraving 3500iTST
240. efault Layer X 1 343 Y 2 452 00 00 03 Coolant Choose None On M8 Off M9 or Mist M7 See o Coolant on page 292 Pa Spindle Dir Choose Forward Reverse Off or None See Spindle None Y Direction on page 292 J None Spindle Speed Enter the spindle speed Comment tab Add a comment if needed that will be placed in program See sample Comment tab on page 300 We Use il Cancel 10 1 CAM Programming Program Directive The Program Directive Tool enables you to add any programming code notes or comments OO0Mm y Add Directive Adding a Program Directive Select the Add Directive button Enter code or text into the Add Directive dialogue Text requires a before the text for a comment Touch on the Use button to add the directive to the tool path sequence Use at Cancel E Ii DL e E E A LU E 81 tA 0 105 159 dS E a i CRIA AA AL E A EA A FLD Pra 1 in 1 ah et RE E RL at Jal VET 1 a 1 2 3 4 5 l 6 7 Shape E View Adjust ToolPath Create ase ue tee ust ar eos see NC ee 308 10 CAM Programming Modifying Toolbar In the following table is a brief description of the Modifying Tools located in the Modifying Toolbar These buttons provide the ability to Modity existing geometry They are described in more detail later in this chapter See Modifying Tools on page 322 Modifying Tools Buttons But
241. efined then S FinStock only applies to the bottom Default is no stock left Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass This amount applies to the sides and bottom unless R SideStock is defined then S FinStock only applies to the bottom Default is no stock left Manual Data System 5 O PPP Plunge Circular Pocket Cycle Preview Jo 0000 Se a n 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 206 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 207 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 208 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit 9 Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field Plunge Feed FinFeed Rough Feed RetractHgt Coarse Tool SkipRough SkipFinish Direction G code format G177 Code Q ACU RITE 35001 Description The feedrate at which the tool will olunge into the pocket in the Z axis Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during finish passes Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during roughing passes Default is last programmed feedrate Z axis absolute start and finish height must be equal to or above
242. eing machined from the above stock definition gt Even if there is no tool diameter compensation being Field Code Description XMax X Absolute position of the most positive edge of the part stock in the X Axis with respect to Absolute Zero Required YMax AS Absolute position of the most positive edge of the part stock in the Y Axis with respect to Absolute Zero Required ZMax Z Absolute position of the most positive edge of the part stock in the Z Axis with respect to Absolute Zero Required XMin Absolute position of the most negative edge of the part stock in the X Axis with respect to Absolute Zero Required YMin J Absolute position of the most negative edge of the part stock in the Y Axis with respect to Absolute Zero Required ZMin K Absolute position of the most negative edge of the part stock in the Z Axis with respect to Absolute Zero Required ACU RITE 35001 a O E 141 Basic Cycles ining o gt Lu q N Temporary Path Tolerance The PathTol command is used to temporarily override the parameter for path tolerance This should only be used in a program and should be programmed by itself The value in the system configuration is restored at the end of the program The typical default is 0 010 mm 0 0004 This can be useful if the 35001 hesitates between small moves such as with a 3 D surface output from CAD CAM The feed rate for corners and curvatures is limited so that err
243. ength Offsets on page 73 The Outside Corner Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or from the Manual Data Input Mode N 2 O gt O O E O Tim A N Field Code Description E 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 Search Q Quadrant of corner to find o1 Arc Cu X 0 19449 Y 0 48650 XCenter 6 05664 YCenter 0 02642 Quad 0 upper right 1 upper left Mi e fl eomnntiren eee ol er ee 2 lower left 3 lower right 3s Arc Ou X 8 34324 Y 6 46468 Xoenter 0 62764 YCenter 0 01493 Required Top H If set to 1 the cycle finds the top of the part mane main gf tte Sout cote coe eae ete e before finding the X Y corner coordinate Default is O If H is not set or is set to O the Z axis must be at the picking depth If H 1 then the Z axis must be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part The probe stylus must be positioned within 0 1 2 54 mm from the outside of the corner in X amp Y Optional DistDown E The distance to go down from the top of part to find X amp Y coordinate of the corner This is only used if H parameter is set to 1 Without any E value the cycle brings the probe stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the top 0 1 2 54 mm Optional DistSide D The distance over from the corner to find X amp Y edge This allows for a part corner that has a large chamfer or radius where you cannot pick the edge clos
244. enter of the slot The XY plane must be selected prior to the slot cycle block otherwise an error is displayed Activate a tool prior to programming slot cycle so that the CNC will know the cutter diameter Field Length Width StartHgt ZDepth StepOver DepthCut Angle XCenter YCenter 186 Code M W Description Length of pocket in X axis Required Width of pocket in Y axis Required Z absolute starting height 0 1 or 2 mm above surface Executed in rapid Required Absolute depth of pocket Required The distance the tool steps over width of cut in the X and Y axes as It mills out the pocket Defaults to tool radius which is the max The depth of each cut per pass Defaults to tool diameter Max is the full ZDepth in parameter Z less bottom finish stock A negative value will cause the finish pass to finish the side walls in steps down The angle in degrees by which the slot is rotated The center of rotation lies in the center of the slot Default is O degrees X coordinate of the pocket center point Defaults to current position Y coordinate of the pocket center point Defaults to current position Manual Data System e 3 Jia EED to Slot Cycle lo 0000 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 se oe EZE 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 206 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 207 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 208 Arc Cw X 0 12900
245. entered into the tool table its tool number can be entered here Feed The tool feed rate is entered here This is automatically calculated if tool being used is defined in the Tool Table Coolant Choose None On M8 Off M9 or Mist M7 See Coolant on page 292 O ue Manual Data Input Example One dxf Deen Basic Setup AUP ANCE i in System E das el Layer DefaultLayer E ade Ve eal pall 00 00 03 oe 9 Spindle Speed Spindle Dir Choose Forward Reverse Off or None See Spindle Direction on page 292 Spindle Speed Specify spindle speed See Spindle Speed on page 292 Use Cancel O ve O O Sa A lt O E Bolt Hole tab The Bolt Hole tab must have the appropriate data filled in to use the 00 er ma al Bolt Hole option in the Drill Location selection Se f Drilling a 7 Diameter The diameter of bolt hole circle pattern can be entered m Bolt Hole Cy A here Cae OE Holes The number of holes in the pattern are entered in this field Start Angle The starting angle of the pattern is entered in this field Path Choose the machine movement required Linear or Radial X Center Location of the center of rotation in the X axis Y Center Location of the center of rotation in the Y axis End Angle The end angle of the last hole Index Angle This is the angle to rotate the Polar Coordinate System by
246. enu Conversational format Unit G code format G70 Inch or G71 IMM z Code Description e Unit U The desired modal unit of measurement to ue More oS activate Inch or MM Required a it Dimension Abs Inc q mN You can change the program mode to Absolute Incremental Specify Absolute or Incremental mode at the start of a program Refer to chapter 3 Manual Data Input MDI on page 38 for more information regarding Absolute and Incremental programming concepts E Conversational format Dim G code format G90 Abs or G91 Incr ere TOS se 7ESCription Dim D The desired modal dimensional programming method to activate Absolute ue Wo More or Incremental Required ACU RITE 35001 139 Absolute Zero Set Absolute Zero is the XO YO ZO position for absolute dimensions Refer to chapter 3 Manual Data Input MDI on page 38 for more information on Absolute positioning A SetZero block sets the Absolute Zero Reference of one or more axes to a new position Use SetZero in one of two ways to reset XO YO ZO or to preset the current location to the specified coordinates Basic Cycles In axis presetting non zero values set the current machine position to the specified coordinates In axis resetting XO YO and ZO values set the current machine position as the new Absolute Zero Reference In G code programming the equivalent G92 Absolute Zero cancels use More Mirroring G100 Axis
247. enu button opens the next menu bar for these additional Cam Tool buttons Button Function Quit will exit CAM without saving any recent changes since last saved Quit Save will save any current changes without having to exit CAM J Pressing the Previous Menu button will return to the main menu bar With an external keyboard attached to the control or in the off line software CTRL S will perform the Save without entering the second menu bar 10 1 CAM Programming The Shape Edit button is used to copy move and import a shape Select the geometry in the display area to create a shape Touch the Shape Edit button which activates the Shape Edit pop up dialogue Select the desired action to be taken and proceed Move or Copy Layers button The Layers button is used for viewing selected layers turning off layers re arrangement of geometry layers and setting the drawing layer To activate the layers dialogue Select the geometry in the display area Touch the Layers button which activates the Layers pop up dialogue Select the desired action to be taken to proceed 312 10 CAM Programming CAM Setup The Setup button opens the CAM Setup dialogue There are four tabs in this dialogue used for setting up the CAM program Preferences required values and parameters are input here Selection tab Start Shape Default value is 1 The starting shape number during shape selection Cha
248. epth Z The absolute depth of the finished pocket Required DepthCut B Z axis increment used for each pass ToolComp D Tool Compensation Use Left or Right only All other are no compensation Compensation LEFT Compensation RIGHT ZFeed Z axis feedrate plunging feedrate Rough J XY axes roughing feedrate Defaults to last Feed programmed feedrate 158 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field Code Description FinFeed K XY axes finish feedrate Defaults to last programmed feedrate FinStock S Finish stock amount per side including bottom If not programmed no finish stock is left Type Q Specifies the type of entry move 1 Line Tangent 2 Line Perpendicular 3 Arc Tangent 4 Line Arc Tangent Length M Length of entry move Radius R Radius of entry arc Angle E Angle of entry arc When you enter a value the CNC executes the number of passes required to get from the H StartHat to the Z ZDepth cutting the B DepthCut on each pass When you do not enter a J RoughFeed or K FinFeed the CNC executes feed moves at the current feedrate J RoughFeed controls the feedrate of the roughing cycle K FinFeed controls the feedrate of the finishing cycle G code format G175 ACU RITE 35001 159 0 2 O gt O O D Q N N T O gt O O D Q N N EndMill Cycle The mill cycle is terminated with the EndMill block at which point it rapids up to the StartHgt
249. er of passes required to get from the H StartHgt to Z ZDepth cutting to the Depth Cut B Z Max cut on each pass When you enter an S FinStock value the CNC leaves the specified stock on the profile and depth for a finish pass The CNC finishes to the entered diameter on the finish pass Enter a negative S FinStock to leave the finish stock without making a finish pass If you do not enter a J RoughFeed or K FinFeed value the CNC executes feed moves at the current feedrate J controls feedrate of the roughing cycle K controls the feedrate of the finishing cycle G code format G171 168 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Rectangular Profile Cycle The Rectangular Profile Cycle cleans up the inside or outside profile said al a of a rectangle When run the CNC rapids to the Ramp 1 starting 3m position rapids to H Z StartHgt and then feeds to the depth of the coath TO first cut The machine feeds into the profile along Ramp 1 cuts the rectangle to the M Length and W Width specified then ramps away from the work along Ramp 2 When cutting an inside profile the Graphic Menu displays ramp 0 O gt O O D Q N N moves me E oe i Wh tti tsid file the tool into th fil 0 E e Oe en cutting an outside prollle e tool ramps into the promle along 297 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 Ramp 1 and away from the profile along Ramp 2 0 aia Arc Ow X 9
250. er the required data Use the Back Space or Clear button to delete previously entered data Press the Enter button to save the data entered in the field Tool Life Management Tool Life Management is a feature that tracks the lifetime use of a tool while the spindle is running and the system Is in feed mode Based on parameters set by the user it verifies if a tool is valid prior to mounting and disables a tool once it has worn beyond its useful life Tool Life Management parameters are accessed In the Tool Table When a program starts running the active tool must have ts Tool Life Management activated so that any machining done with it can be tracked If a replacement tool is specified in the RT column it should also have Tool Life Management active Activate Tool Life Management In the Tool Table select the tool to be managed Enter the maximum tool life in minutes in the Time1 column Enter the maximum in use tool life in minutes in the Time2 column If a replacement tool has been specified in the RT column enter in the Time1 and Time2 for the replacement tool also When a tool s usage limits have been exceeded the tool is locked If a replacement tool RI has not been specified Time or Time2 will cause the program to stop An error message will appear 84 4 Tool Management Lock or Unlock a Tool In the Tool Table select the tool to be locked or unlocked Ope
251. ers Edit y View Edit Program Setup Exit Adjust E Create Select Layer DefaultLayer B uy 2 CAMSample2 dxf Shape View Adjust ToolPath Create Select Edit Layers Type View Edit Program Setup Exit 10 CAM Programming To complete the trimming select the Trim button from the CANSanple2 dxf Layer DefaulltLayer 39000 00 Modifying Toolbar to complete the geometry OC O gt o Mo Select the Trim button from the Modifying Toolbar in the main Toolbar Select the large circle and touch in an open area in the display The Prompt will ask what geometry the objects should be trimmed against Select the two smaller arcs The Prompt bar will ask what objects to keep Select the radius between the smaller circles Now touch in an open area in the display The outside radius of the larger circle will be removed SNE ES View Adjust ToolPath Create Shape Select Type View Edit Program Before creating the tool paths the shape must be created as described below and previously in this chapter See Creating the shape on page 320 Layers Setup Exit O ve O O Sa A lt O E Creating the shape Touch the Select button from the bottom button e Ez me n u 5 example 2 dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 2 389 Y 4 090 00 00 00 Select the top line between the two arc s Moo y Ox Mu Notice that a
252. es This defines an expression b GOO Y amp A 102 103 LOOP 5 2 01 Example of multiplication division and modification C G01 X 3 2 100 122 105 Addition and Subtraction d IF 101 gt 0 THEN Greater than gt less than lt e IF 144 143 GOTO Equal to not equal to O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q f TOMM n convert n to mm If n s type is inch TOMM n n 25 4 g TOIN n convert n to inch If n s type is mm TOIN n n 25 4 h TODE n convert to current IN or MM mode i TONU n force the type of n to the modal inch or mm j ROUND n rounds the value of n up or down depending if its fractional part is equal or greater than 0 500000 or less than 0 500000 100 1 500 G01 X round 100 moves to X2 0000 101 1 499 G01 X round 101 moves to X1 0000 k FIX n rounds the value down to the next whole number 100 5 2 G01 X fix 100 moves to X2 0000 FUP n rounds the value up to the next whole number 100 5 2 GO1 X fup 100 moves to X3 0000 m VAR n is used to check If a user variable has been defined ina program IF var 100 THEN If 100 has been defined by the user then true If not then false ACU RITE 35001 395 O Sam O O pe A O O G gt O lt q q 396 Example SIN n gives the sine of n n is assumed t
253. es on page 199 Example 1 Offset See Fixture Offset Work Coordinate System Select on page 138 for more information on using the Offset cycle Use the Offset command to apply a Fixture Offset of the absolute zero datum to the corner of WorkPiece 1 Format Offset Fixture 1 X10 Y10 Offset Fixture 1 Machining positions are now referenced from the lower left corner of WorkPlece 1 Use the 0ffset command to apply a Fixture Offset of the absolute zero datum to the corner of WorkPiece 2 Format Offset Fixture 2 X60 Y10 Offset Fixture 2 Machining positions are now referenced from the lower left corner of WorkPiece 2 32 MIN WorkPiece 1 WorkPiece 2 XO YO Programmatic X10 Y 10 Actual X50 YO Programmatic X60 Y10 Actual WorkPiece 1 WorkPiece 2 X 50 YO Programmatic X10 Y 10 Actual X0 YO Programmatic X60 Y10 Actual 2 Machining Fundamentals Example2 SetZero O See Absolute Zero Set on page 140 for more information on using the SetZero cycle The work piece drawing shows holes 1 to 4 whose dimensions are shown with respect to an absolute datum with the O coordinates X 0 Y 0 Holes 5 to 7 are dimensioned with respect to a k relative datum with the absolute coordinates X 450 Y 750 With the YN SetZero cycle you can temporarily set the datum to the position O X 450 Y 750 to be able to program holes 5 to 7 without further A calculations tj Format SetZero X450 Y
254. ext Enter the text to be engraved Upper and lower case characters numbers and punctuation are allowed Start Height Enter the Absolute Z position before beginning the engrave cycle Z Depth Enter the Z absolute depth of engraving Radius Circular Enter the radius for circular engraving Direction Circular Choose a direction Downward or Upward for circular engraving Start X Enter the X coordinate for lower left corner of the text Start Y Enter the Y coordinate for lower left corner of the text Height Enter the letter height Angle Enter the angle in degrees for rotating the text to be engraved Font Choose Simple Stencil or Stick Mirror X Select to mirror the engraving on the X axis Mirror Y Select to mirror the engraving on the Y axis ACU RITE 35001 0 150 aan Input Example One dxf gran 12 Tel System lea i Layer DefaultLayer X 1 334 Y 2 881 00 00 03 ae Basic Setup Comment Linear 52 0 000000 0 000000 Angle y font site CD Mirza o izxor Y Coma La rs 7 LA A AAA IA AAA DA UA AL FEAT TEL J aL J ae ey 2 3 4 5 6 7 Shape E View Adjust ToolPath Create am e e e frame e see NOT oe J 307 O ve O O Sa A lt O E Setup tab Tool Enter the tool number to use for the cycle la Feed Enter the feed rate used while engraving Example One dxf Layer D
255. f pocket Required Lower left corner radius Cannot be less than tool radius Required If only A is used then the A value is used for all four corners Lower right corner radius Cannot be less than tool radius Upper right corner radius Cannot be less than tool radius Upper left corner radius Cannot be less than tool radius Manual Data System A PP Angle Pocket Cycle 0 0000 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 206 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 207 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 208 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 4 gt Abs Inc MIA More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit 9 Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Continued Y Q Field Code Description ET Max XY V Maximum XY tool stepover Used if angle is Step so great that the amount of XY step per Z step exceeds 70 of the tool diameter E Z Step Q Z axis finishing step down Finish amm Finish STK S XY finish stock amount sides only Q XY N Finish K Finish pass feedrate Feed Rough J Roughing feedrate Feed Tool Type W Flat or Ball end mill G code format G73 Draft Angle Pocket Example This program cuts the draft angle pocket
256. fied in the callbAndToolMeasurementrRPM machine setup parameter and then the calibration standard moves over an incremental amount that is equal to Half the value entered in the D cycle parameter Half the value entered in the nominalProbeStylusDiameter machine setup parameter The value in the XYRetractAmount machine setup parameter The direction the probe moves over depends on what is placed in the probeOrientation machine setup parameter Example 1 Go first to the left 1 Go first to the right 2 Go first to the front 2 Go first to the back N 2 O gt O O O S A M N 202 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs The Z axis then does a guarded Z move down 0 1 2 54 mm or whatever amount was placed in the E cycle parameter and then moves over toward the probe stylus 0 3 7 62 mm or until it touches the probe stylus If contact is not made with the probe or if contact is made during a guarded move then an alarm is generated and the canned cycle terminates After the probe stylus is touched on the first side the machine then rapids up and over the stylus then down on the opposite side then over to the other two sides until it has touched the probe stylus on all four quadrants This establishes the center of the probe stylus The spindle then turns off and the machine touches off on two sides of the probe with the spindle off finding the effective probe stylus diameter Then rapids up above the probe s
257. g Position encoders and reference marks The machine axes are equipped with position encoders that register the positions of the machine table or tool Linear axes are usually equipped with linear encoders rotary tables and tilting axes with angle encoders When a machine axis moves the corresponding position encoder generates an electrical signal The CNC evaluates this signal and calculates the precise actual position of the machine axis If there is a power interruption the calculated position will no longer correspond to the actual position of the machine slide To recover this association incremental position encoders are provided with reference marks The scales of the position encoders contain one or more reference marks that transmit a signal to the CNC when they are crossed over From that signal the CNC can re establish the assignment of displayed positions to machine positions For linear encoders with distance coded reference marks the machine axes need to move by no more than 20 mm for angle encoders by no more than 20 With absolute encoders an absolute position value is transmitted to the control immediately upon switch on In this way the assignment of the actual position to the machine slide position is re established directly after switch on 26 2 Machining Fundamentals Reference system A reference system is required to define positions in a plane or in space The position data are always referenced
258. g a new or editing an existing program is explained in this section 32 Line X 0 10443 Y 0 48650 33 Arc Cw X 0 16109 Y 0 45037 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 34 Arc Ccw X 0 31588 Y 0 44772 XCenter 0 07804 YCenter 0 03631 35 Arc Cw X 0 34324 Y 0 46468 XCenter 0 02764 YCenter 0 01403 36 Line X 1 49426 Y 0 47509 37 Arc Cw 1 55024 Y 0 38370 XCenter 0 00056 YCenter 0 06250 38 Line 51000 Y 0 30650 39 Line 48 Line 45300 Y 0 21750 38900 Y 0 13350 31800 Y 0 05550 24100 Y 0 01650 When in the Program Manager having the program selected touch E X xX 1 X 1 X 1 gt 41 Line Aal 42 Line XI the Edit button The program will open in the display and can now be 42 Line X 1 24100 Y 0 01650 44 Line X 1 07000 Y 0 14050 edited 45 Line X 0 97700 Y 0 19150 46 Line X 0 88100 Y 0 23350 X 0 78100 Y 0 26850 X 0 55242 Y 0 26850 y X 0 51775 Y 0 27900 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 y e X 0 51400 Y 0 28150 y X 0 51000 Y 0 28450 z 47 Line 48 Line 49 Arc Ccw 58 Line 51 Line If it is preferred to edit a program in Draw mode touch the Draw button Edit mode can be selected at anytime while in Draw mode As described above use either of the following methods to enter Edit O E e O hom 0 CS C 9 oa Y gt Q m pe O poca o Direct Program Select the Program Management button Management Select the program for editing example program shown k AR 3
259. g depth If H 1 then the Z axis must be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part The probe stylus must be positioned within 0 1 2 54 mm from the outside of the corner in X amp Y Optional DistDown E The distance to go down from the top of part to find X amp Y coordinate of the corner This is only used if H parameter is set to 1 Without any E value the cycle brings the probe stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the top 0 1 2 54 mm Optional DistSide D The distance over from the corner to find X amp Y edge This allows for a part corner that has a large chamfer or radius where you cannot pick the edge close to the theoretical corner or has an obstruction interfering with the default move Default is 0 4 10 16 mm Optional DistBack V Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it Default is 0 1 2 54 mm if not set Optional ACU RITE 35001 Manual Data System e Nine t oan io nside Corner Find Preview 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 38 Arc Ccw X 0 16113 Y 0 45042 XCenter 0 08062 YCenter 0 03126 31 Arc Cw X 0 10449 Y 0 48650 XCenter 0 05664 YCenter 0 02642 32 Line X 0 10443 Y 0 48650 33 Arc Cw X 0 16109 Y 0 45037 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 34 Arc Ccw X 0 31588 Y 0 44772 XCenter 0 07804 YCenter 0 03631 35 Arc Cw X 0 34324 Y 0 46468 XCenter 0 02764 YCenter 0 01403 Abs Inc Milli
260. g taking place It is also possible to use all Program Management features while the machine is running See chapter 9 1 Running a program on page 266 for a complete description A When a sub mode key is activated it is not possible to change to another main mode ACU RITE 35001 9 E gt O gt N Upper Menu and Status Information Bar The 3500 display screen upper bar always remains the same regardless of the operation or function that is being preformed and general status information See Manual Data Input on page 20 for a complete description of the screen layout Help button ABC button to hide or unhide the on screen keyboard amp numeric keypad Manual Data Input button Program Management button Program Run button System Maintenance button Shutdown button 12 Clock Program running status Red Machine is idle E Green System is running 10 Message Indicator E Yellow Red flashing Error or Warning Green All OK 11 Screen Lock Touch Screen can be locked while a program is running or at anytime the operator chooses Press the CLEAR key on the keypad to unlock the touchscreen 12 Message Bar Messages will pop up e g an error or warning and can be cleared by touching the message bar The message bar appears in all modes and sub modes of operation SOON OO AW N 10 Program Pr aram R n System Management g Maintenance T 8 9 10 11 Shutdown
261. ge 73 illing oc ycles ycles ycles seme ane The Protected Probe Positioning Cycle can be run from within a program or from the Manual Data Input Mode N 2 O gt O O E O Tim A N Field Code Description X X X Target position relative to current active work coordinate Y Y Y Target position relative to current active work coordinate Z Z Z Target position relative to current active work coordinate combined with the current active tool length offset Feed F Feedrate at which to travel to target F is only active for the current move so it must be restated every time or the default takes precedence The default is set in the machine setup parameter positioningFeedrate_Normally Optional To use the Protected Probe Positioning Cycle Place the probe in the spindle and make sure that its tool and work coordinate offsets are active and the tool type set to Touch Probe Type G146 Xn Yn Zn Fn If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated for every move you wish to make Execute the line in Manual Data Input Mode by touching Start ACU RITE 35001 231 N 2 O gt Q O O ES A Mm N Skew Compensation G68 axis rotation cannot be used with skew compensation find Skew compensation is only supported for along the side edge of a part relative to the X Y plane Skew compensation is only supported for along the side edge of a part relative to the X Y plane
262. gram MU 0 wcu rite oncS500i u user 35 I Jaa001e9c4db6 i a i 35001 fl a 1Acu rite oe en od 9 3500iSlot M 3500iSlot amp usr e MFB Lanc_gu servis templi M Chapter 6 DAN_C_Tool o user _ dell Y example 2 Example One 4 m lt Delete is AR 3 ld cam test ACU RITE 35001 57 Rapid Line Modal Delete Block Quit O 4 ad A C e m Mm Exit 2 LE Ly 58 Once in Teach mode the operator can use the control jog keys to move the machine to the desired locations and then use the menu bar buttons to create the commands to be saved Function Rapid creates a rapid move using the current position Line creates a line move using the current position Modal creates a modal using the last programmed move command and the current position Delete Block will delete the highlighted block Quit will quit Teach mode without saving Exit will exit Teach mode saving the part program 3 Manual Data Input Tool Management 4 1 Tool Table Tool Table Tool Management When the CNC executes a program block that activates a tool number the values on that row of the Tool Table are activated US Program System Management Program Run maintenance Shutdown 9 25am io Tool Table values are automatically converted to their inch or millimeter equivalents when t
263. h pass feedrate Feed FinFeed K Finish pass feedrate DepthCut B Maximum Z axis increment used for each pass FinStock S Amount of stock left by the machine before the finish pass Default O If the programmer enters a negative value the CNC leaves the stock without making a finish pass RetractHgt P Retract height When you enter a value the CNC executes the number of passes required to get from the H StartHgt to the Z ZDepth cutting the B DepthCut on each pass When you enter an S FinStock value the CNC leaves the specified stock on the profile and depth for a finish pass The CNC cuts the rectangle to the M Length W Width and Z ZDepth dimensions on the finish pass Enter a negative S FinStock to leave the finish stock without making a finish pass When you do not enter a J RoughFeed or K FinFeed the CNC executes feed moves at the current feedrate J RoughFeed controls the feedrate of the roughing cycle K FinFeed controls the feedrate of the finishing cycle G code format G172 170 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Pocket Cycles Pocketing cycles eliminate extensive programming One block of programming mills out the described pocket Activate a tool before programming a pocket cycle All pockets use the current tool diameter from the Tool Table When using a course tool for roughing passes the course tool must be defined in the Tool Table XY positioning may be necessary
264. hTol SysData Feed FeedU Comment Unit Touch the name of the data to be input This will open the dialogue menu showing the necessary fields that require data O e O E 0 o e 2 sj Y oes gt e Q m do ACU RITE 35001 107 Drill Features Button aa Select the Drill Cycles button to display the more milling button features in the pop up menu Drill Cycles Basic Pecking CounterBore Bi Dir Bore Uni Dir Bore Flat Bottom Bore Chip Break Tapping Drill0ff Pattern Bolt Holes Thread Mill When a drill cycle has been selected the Conversational Data Input display provides a help screen graphic with each data input dialogue This display shown is typical for counterbore data input 6 1 Conversational Programming Touch the name of the data to be input This will open the dialogue menu showing the necessary fields that require data cycle The X Y locations must be programed This can be done directly with X and Y data a bolt hole or linear pattern When done programming X Y locations 3 Plane XY 4 BlockForm XMax 1 YMax 1 ZMax 0 0000 XMin 1 YMin 1 ZMin 1 program a Drill Off block 5 Tool 1 NCode 6 6 Offset Fixture 1 gt Drilling cycles are modeled after programming the desired 7 RPM 1000 8 MCode 3 108 6 Conversational Editing Pocket Cycles Button ois Select the Pocket Cycles button to display the pocket milling features in the pop up menu
265. hand wheel 24 TT 140 touch probe 24 Address Words 371 Advanced Programming Block Separators 389 Contouring 387 Exact Stop 387 Expressions 393 Macro Body Structure 410 Moditiers 389 Move Reference 388 Speed 384 Stroke Limit 388 System Variables 397 Tool Offset Modification 390 User Variables 398 B Basic Cycles Arcs 130 Dwell 135 Fixture Offset 138 Plane Selection 136 Reference Point Return 137 C CAM Block Form 295 CAM Mode 278 Circle Tools buttons 286 Creating the tool path 337 346 Drill Cycle 296 Drilling Cycles 296 DXF Import 321 Engraving Cycles 307 Geometry 316 Geometry buttons 282 Job Setup 291 Line Tools buttons 284 Mill Cycles 301 Pocket Cycles 303 Point Editing 283 Point Tools buttons 283 Shape Tool buttons 287 Tool Path buttons 288 Tool Paths 328 Tool Table 325 ACU RITE 35001 Canned Cycles Boring 153 Boring Unidirectional 153 Chip Break 154 Circular Pocket 176 Circular Profile 167 Draft Angle Pocket 172 EndMill Cycle 160 Face Mill Cycle 161 Flat Bottom Boring 155 Frame Pocket 182 lands 192 Irregular Pocket 190 Mill Cycle 158 Peck Drill 151 Plunge Circular Pocket 180 Plunge Rectangular Pocket 178 Pocket 171 Rectangular Pocket 174 Rectangular Profile 169 Slot 186 Tapping 152 Thread Mill 164 Console Key Pad 19 Conversational Programming Data Input Cycles 105 Direct 102 Drill Features Button 108 Edit Screen 103 Editing 111 Editor Buttons 104 From Draw 102 Getting Started 102
266. hapes and to create tool paths from shapes The following table describes the buttons that are available in each Toolbar Geometry Toolbar buttons Button 282 Function Select Point Tools to activate the Point tools menu bar see page 283 Select Line Tools to activate the Line tools menu bar see page 284 Select Circle Tools to activate the Circle tools menu bar see page 286 Select Shape Tools to activate the Shape tools menu bar see page 287 Select Tool Paths to activate the Tool Paths menu bar see page 288 10 CAM Programming Point Tool buttons Touching the Point Tool button activates the o i i following buttons in the Vertical button bar Button Function A Select X Y Coordinates to create a point by 2 specifying X and Y coordinates Select Incremental distance point to create a point at an incremental distance from another point Select Polar coordinate Point to create a point using polar coordinates radius and angle AN Select Center Point to create a point as the center of an existing circle or arc O L O O Sen A lt O aie Select Intersection Point to create a point at the intersection of any two basic geometry items line line line circle circle circle STC ee Select Free Hand Point Location to create points by bc using the left mouse button and touching in the graphics area Point Edit
267. hat is to have text inserted and will keep the existing text Place the cursor in the text where new text will be added Touch the Insert button to enable it if it is not already enabled and then enter the additional text Overwriting Text VVhen the Insert button Is not activated all new text being added ina block will overwrite the existing text Each character added will overwrite the next existing available text Any text that is not overwritten will have to manually be deleted if it is not going to be used Locate the block that is to have text inserted and will overwrite any existing text Place the cursor in the text where the new text will be added Touch the Insert button only if it is active and enter the new text ACU RITE 35001 361 O Lu hom O O A 5 O q O pi lt O Lu hom O A d O 2 O Find Specific Text or Code in a program Use the Find Replace button in Edit Mode to search for blocks or for specific text previous to search from cursor location to the beginning of the program or next to search to the end of the program gt Depending on cursor location in the program touch Text or Program Codes can be searched for throughout the entire program or at specific locations The following examples show how to use the Find Replace button to search for blocks or for specific text First open
268. he 35001 mode is changed All typed values must match the current unit mode of the 35001 4 1 Tool Table Type 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu Y Diameter Length D Wear L Wear 0 5 a Nje TE 0 The Tool Table is the only place where the 3500i converts A values from Inch to MM or MM to Inch Programmed positions are not converted when the unit mode has been changed 0 gt on a ii wo Pp 1 eooooqococooorr oo00000000n0n nN OOO0OO0OO0OOOOGO Pp pa Define and store up to 100 tools on the tool table Type of data stored on the tool table is information specific to each tool e g tool number Mi diameter length offset tool type etc e Offsets Speeds Adiust Teach The Tool Table is used by all machining programs Tool Compensation Required Data You usually program the coordinates of path contours as they are dimensioned in the work piece drawing To allow the CNC to calculate the tool center path e g the tool compensation you must also enter the length and diameter of each tool you are using Tool data can be entered either directly in the part program with or separately in the Tool Table In the Tool Table you can also enter additional data for the
269. he operator is allowed to adjust the current modal settings of the system plane absolute incremental inch mm Sees 2G0 Rapid and rapid feed mode i OG1 Feed Touch the Basic Modals Location zone G70 Inch G90 Abs The Basic Modals dialogue opens OG71 MM G91 Incr Adjust the current modal settings of the system by touching on fields that require adjustment Touch Use to enter the changes or press Cancel to exit without making any changes When the Use button has been selected the operator will be prompted to Press Start to run operation or Manual to cancel Press the Start button to execute the change or O 4 ad A nm e y Mm Touch the Manual button to cancel all changes Manual 54 3 Manual Data Input Feed and Speed This allows the operator to adjust the current feed and speed There Feed and Spee are two modes for this each having it s own dialogue When the current active tool has values entered for the feed and speeds in the tool table the Feed and Speed Calculator dialogue will open Enter new values This dialogue allows the operator to use the feed and speed values as is from the Feed and Speed tool table The operator can also manually enter new values or adjust the feed depending on a new speed value entered Touch the Feed and Speed Location zone This example describes the Feed and Speed Calculator dialogue sh
270. he part is read and passed to system variables 1060 to 1063 for X to U G31 is aborted if any of the following events occur The primitive is issued while the probe is still deflected touching the part The ready signal is not present Hardware malfunction Trigger signal engaged but no position is latched Start pulse is issued but probe is not ready after 2 seconds Only cordless probes Cordless probe still in sleeping mode Low battery signal becomes active Only cordless probes M9387X0 Selects the Tool touch probe X13 M9387X1 Selects the 3 D touch probe X12 default M9387Y0 Copies Tool touch probe state deflected or not into a system variable 1066 M9387Y1 Copies 3 D touch probe state deflected or not into a system variable 1066 M9387Z0 Turns off cordless probe M93872Z1 Turns on cordless probe Canned cycles are available for the most common probe functions Using the G31 primitive parametric programming and the M Code described here it is possible to write additional cycles to perform custom probing functions 422 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Conditional Statements This subsection discusses the conditional statements IF THEN ELSE GOTO and WHILE IF THEN ENDIF N300 IF expression THEN N360 ENDIF If the expression in N300 Is true the program continues at N310 If the expression is false the program continues at N370 In place of an expressi
271. he spindle and coolant Block 15 defines an island in sub program 1 The actual island is then defined in blocks 23 through 31 Y i O O T Q Y N The island must always be programmed before the corresponding pocket Also note that the island must specify the machining In this case since the island profile is defined in a clockwise orientation the machining side is to the left see block 26 Block 16 is a 4x5 rectangular pocket with center at 0 0 Note that finish stock is specified and the cycle is requested to skip the finish pass This is required for the stand alone finish cycle Block 17 defines the finer roughing tool which a 1 4 diameter Block 18 defines the island for the finer roughing tool Block 19 defines the pocket for the finer roughing tool with the specification of the coarsetool 1 cycle to calculate the material left by the coarse tool and only machine the required material Also note that finish stock is specified and the cycle is requested to skip the finish pass This is required for the stand alone finish cycles p Specifying the coarse tool as tool 1 allows the pocket Block 20 defines the finish tool which a 1 4 diameter Finishing could be done with the same tool but for illustration purposes a different tool is used Block 21 re defines the island for the side finish tool This is necessary for the finish cycle to work properly Block 22 is the side fin
272. he stock from part zero Zmin Enter the depth of the part from top to bottom in relation to part Zero Comment Tab Comment To add a comment If needed that will be placed in program to assist the operator Typical to most dialogues ACU RITE 35001 295 O Sen O O u A lt O a Drilling Cycle The Drilling tool path defines a drill cycle type location and parameters for drilling Certain parameters apply only to specific cycles These parameters appear as needed based on the selected Drill Cycle The following describes the various Drill Cycles available Drill Cycle Basic A basic drilling cycle is generally used for center drilling or hole drilling that does not require a pecking motion It feeds from the Start Height to the specified Z Depth at a given Feed then rapids to the Return Height Drill Cycle Counterbore A counter bore cycle is generally used for counter boring It feeds from the Start Height to Z Depth dwells for specified time then rapids to the Return Height Drill Cycle Peck A peck drilling cycle is generally used for peck drilling relatively shallow holes The peck drilling cycle feeds trom the Start Height to the first peck depth calculated so that all pecks are equal and do not exceed the maximum peck distance programmed in Peck Then rapid retracts to Start Height to clear chip rapids down to previous depth less 02 and continues this loop until i
273. he tool Calculated value for recommended Spindle Speed calculated using the tool diameter and surface speed Rough chip load of the tool Calculated value for recommended roughing feed calculated using the tool diameter surface speed rough chip load and number of teeth Finish chip load of the tool Calculated value for recommended finish feed calculated using the tool diameter surface speed finish chip load and number of teeth come from the Tool table Changing them in the Feeds S The diameter and length in the Feeds and Speeds table and Speeds table will also update the Tool table ACU RITE 35001 69 E 8 ae Using the Feeds amp Speeds Table The 35001 can calculate spindle speed rough feed and finish feed for Program System Deol a oi 4 E M FS eeds amp Speeds Surface Speed Number ChipLoad Feed ChipLoad Feed of Teeth Rough Rough Finish Finish To calculate the spindle speed enter the tool s diameter and the desired surface speed The initial diameter shown is from the tool EE cool A A ee ete ee table Changing the diameter in the Feeds amp Speeds table also mp e changes it in the Tool 0 0000 0 0000 Spindle Speed The surface speed is in feet min in inch mode or meters min in metric mode The calculated spindle speed is shown for the entered surface Speg et The spindle speed in inch mode
274. height is 0 1 the safe rapid Z ZFinish height is 0 5 the major thread diameter is 1 and depth of thread is 0 0625 The arc in radius is 0 1 and the stock amount for the finish pass is 0 002 The rough feedrate is 20 0 and the finish feedrate is 5 0 rapid set E Passes to a negative number The idea is to initially set E as a positive number and after proving out the program change E to a negative number for faster production If you only need one pass to size and you want the positioning moves to be rapid set E to 1 gt If you would like all non cutting positioning moves to be G code format G181 166 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Circular Profile Cycle The Circular Profile Cycle cleans up the inside or outside profile of an Shutdam e MO existing circle TEE When executed the CNC rapids to Ramp 1 starting position rapids to H StartHgt then feeds to the depth of the first cut The machine feeds into the profile along Ramp 1 cuts the circle to the specified D Diameter then ramps away from the work along Ramp 2 When cutting an outside profile the tool ramps into the work along Lal Ramp 1 and away from the work along Ramp 2 ws Line x 0 00100 Y 0 02650 i 286 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 The Circular Profile Cycle automatically compensates for tool gt imo kre Ou X 0 12900 Y 0 09550 XCanter 6 09152 Yosnter 0 08632 diameter Activate the c
275. hine power cycles see page 13 689 871 01 03 Rotation cycles G68 and RMS now allow user to specify if the rotation center is a pivot point for the rotation or not see page 239 A circle of the format XYR with start end now generates an error because it cannot be properly calculated see page 134 The M98 Help Form now includes the previously missing Loop parameter see page 238 689 871 01 04 The Conversational Editor now always ensures that a blank line exists at the end of programs in order to make it easy to insert new blocks at the end of the program see page 112 When turning OFF Edit Preview the active program preview run is now cancelled Also the Preview Features menu is now available while the program preview is running see page 116 689 871 01 05 Added description of estimated machining time in preview image see page 93 Outdated estimated machining times are now displayed on the preview image in RED colored text see page 93 689 871 01 08 Corrected total number of available tools 100 see page 61 Additional information has been added for islands see page 192 Added examples of pockets with islands see page 241 689 871 01 09 Pocket cycles now allow changing the direction of the Roughing Pass and as such the previous FinishDir parameter has been superseded by a new Direction parameter which now applies to both the Roughing and Finishing passes see page 171 Vill Contents ACU RIT
276. i ANDE rogram Run Peta utdown 2 28pm fell Program Manager having the program selected touch the Edit 3500 ot button The program will open in the display and can now be edited LEA 3 O Lu O O A O O Q O A program can also be edited trom the Draw mode This is also ee clases sl ls El o Y E id od fe 2 9000 Y2 6690 71 0680 1 0099 3 1 0060 0 0000 OUC e Draw button en in Draw mode tne Edit button Is rra avallable for editing the Program Touch the Edit button and the lt gt El 32 end pr program will open in the display and can now be edited E estes tat See Use either of the following methods to enter Edit mode Jiili Bae E d aoe ne Select the Program Management button Delete Find Edit Preview xi Select the Folders button to locate the program for BAe N ecc M e editing and select the program Program Management Touch the Edit button in the bottom menu bar to maak enter the Edit mode olor WO Program Select the Program Management button Management Select the Folders button to locate the program for editing and select the program ey Touch the Draw button in the bottom menu bar to enter the Draw mode Draw From the Draw Program touch the Edit button in the Edit bottom menu bar to enter the Edit mode 352 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features
277. ies to the sides and bottom unless R SideStock is defined then S FinStock only applies to the bottom Default is no stock left Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass on the sides only This amount overrides the value in S FinStock A value of zero can force stock to be left only on the bottom Default is equal to S FinStock The feedrate at which the tool will ramp into the pocket in all three axes Default Is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during roughing passes Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during finish passes Default is last programmed feedrate Z axis absolute start and finish height must be equal to or above H used as a safety clearance Z position before making X Y moves Executed in rapid at start and end of cycle Defaults to current Z position at beginning of cycle Number of tool used for previous roughing cycle Yes Roughing pass is skipped only finish pass is performed No Roughing pass is performed Default Yes Finish pass is skipped only rough pass is performed No Finish pass is performed Default Select Cw or Cow 183 0 2 O gt O O D Q N N Ring Pocket Cycle Y omen Use the ring pocket cycle to mill a circular frame or trough around a ie EE Data Program Run T ETA Sukiem o S circular island of material You must position the tool directly over Oe the center of th
278. ieve a specific result for a given set of constraints For example a rectangular pocket of any size always has four sides four corner radii and a depth Therefore you can cut many pockets of different sizes using a similar tool path with longer or shorter moves for the tool path If a suitable program processes the constraints of the pocket the 35001 calculates a tool path to cut a particular pocket Such a program is called a macro The G78 rectangular pocket cycle is an example of a macro that cannot be edited The constraints of the pocket or the feature required are Its parameters Parameters for any feature vary as dimensions change therefore the parameters are often called variables The data for each parameter must be stored as an entity known as a variable register also called variables Parameters passed to a macro are called parameters in this manual Contents of Variables PRINT Format PRINT xxx variable Format N Block number PRINT xxx variable You can verity the contents of a variable This is useful when you are debugging a program Use the PRINT command to display the contents of a variable on the screen in Manual Single Step and Auto Modes Example 1 PRINT 200 Displays the contents of the variable 200 Example 2 N180 PRINT 110 To display variable contents during program execution use the PRINT command as part of the program Example 2 prints the contents of variables 110 to the screen To disp
279. ill style O ae Pare tol NN tools or shell mill tools that have a hole in the center of the bottom 3 A Preview This cycle is used to measure the length of large face mill style tools that have a hole in the center of the bottom of the tool Field Code Description Tool T Tool number Required With only the T parameter present the spindle turns on in reverse and the canned cycle comes straight down measuring the 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 38 Arc Ccw X 0 16113 Y 0 45042 XCenter 0 08062 YCenter 0 03126 31 Arc Cw X 0 10449 Y 0 48650 XCenter 0 05664 YCenter 0 02642 32 Line X 0 10443 Y 0 48650 I 33 Arc Cw X 0 16109 Y 0 45037 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 N 2 O gt Q O O ES A Mm N tool length and storing it in the tool length ss Are Cu X 0 34324 Y 0 46468 XCenter 0 02764 YCenter 0 61493 register The T parameter must the same as the current tool in the spindle l saa More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview A EstDiam D This is the rough diameter of the tool and is only used in this cycle to determine if the spindle should be turned on in reverse or forward If you have a left handed tool you would give a negative value to the diameter If this parameter is left off the control always turns on in reverse by default Optional OvrMed M This is the override for the medium Feed feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medi
280. inStock The feedrate at which the tool will ramp into the pocket in all three axes Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during roughing passes Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during finish passes If entered as negative finish pass will mill in conventional CVV direction Default is last programmed feedrate Z axis absolute start and finish height must be equal to or above H used as a safety clearance Z position before making X Y moves Executed in rapid at start and end of cycle Defaults to current Z position at beginning of cycle Number of tool used for previous roughing cycle Yes Roughing pass is skipped only finish pass is performed No Roughing pass is performed Default Yes Finish pass Is skipped only rough pass is performed No Finish pass is performed Default Select Cw or Cow 191 0 2 O gt O O D Q N N Islands This cycle allows islands in pockets Pockets with Islands must be 05 renee a A II programmed using sub programs 3 More than one Island cycle can be programmed ata time They may ds be strung together or on separate lines Islands can be programmed inside of islands Five islands can be put on a line The sub program number is used as inputs Islands that are defined to be avoided on the Inside of a pocket are done so by using the Island code followed by a list of up to 5 sub program label names If mo
281. ination roy U U Absolute position of or incremental s distance to the desired U Axis destination Lu Feed F Feedrate at which to conduct the machining movement m CornerRad A Positive arc radius for corner rounding negative X Y distance for chamfering ToolComp T Select the modal tool diameter compensation to activate or select Off to deactivate comp All parameters are optional 126 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Line Move Angle and Radius Specify the desired end point coordinate using the radius and angle of the movement Field Code Description Radius R Absolute or incremental distance to the desired destination Required Angle C Polar degree angle of the radius from the start point to the desired destination Required Z Z Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis destination Feed F Feedrate at which to conduct the machining movement CornerRad A Positive arc radius for corner rounding negative X Y distance for chamfering ToolComp T Select the modal tool diameter compensation to activate or select Off to deactivate comp Line Move Angle and X Specify the desired end point coordinate using the angle of the movement and the actual X Axis position designation Field Code Description X X Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired X Axis destination Required Angle C Polar degree angle of the radius from the start
282. incremental coordinates you thus program the tool to move by the distance between the previous and the subsequent nominal positions Incremental coordinates are therefore also referred to as chain dimensions Example 2 Holes dimensioned in incremental coordinates Absolute coordinates of hole 4 X 10 Mmm Y 10 mm Hole 5 with respect to 4 Hole 6 with respect to 5 X 20 mm X 20 mm Y 10 mm Y 10 mm ACU RITE 35001 31 itioning 2 1 Fundamentals of Pos itioning YN 0 ma aL 4 C eb O Ga LL To N Setting the datum Fixture Offsets A production drawing identifies a certain form element of the work piece usually a corner as the absolute zero datum When setting the datum you first align the work piece along the machine axes and then move the tool in each axis to a defined position relative to the work piece Set the display of the CNC either to zero or to a known position value for each position This establishes the reference system for the work piece which will be used for the CNC display and your part program If the production drawing is not dimensioned for that particular CNC set the datum at a position or corner on the work piece which is suitable for deducing the dimensions of the remaining work piece positions The fastest easiest and most accurate way of setting the datum is by using a 3 D touch probe from HEIDENHAIN Corp Refer to chapter 7 3 Probing Cycl
283. ind the top of the gauge The default if Q is not set or set to 0 is 0 1 2 54 mm beyond the edge of the ring gauge hole If O is set to 1 the default is the current probe position Optional DistInY B The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to find the top of the gauge The default is the current probe position Optional You must have The probe in the spindle with its tool number active and the tool type set to Touch Probe The Ring Gauge mounted on the machine table ACU RITE 35001 221 Edge Finding Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle 0 ue Shutdown al A Pl A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work probe and that tool offset and work coordinate active before using this cycle in a program See Section 4 Tool Length Offsets on page 13 The Edge Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or from Manual Data Input Mode N 2 O gt Q O O ES A Mm N Field Code Description a 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 Search Q Axis and direction to find edge Es ee a Line X 0 10443 Y 0 48650 Dir 0 X la X rA Y 3 Y uE Z Z Y a Arc Cw X 0 16109 Y 0 45037 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 34 Arc Ccw X 0 31588 Y 0 44772 XCenter 0 07804 YCenter 0 03631 35 Arc Cw X 0 34324 Y 0 46468 XCenter 0 02764 YCenter 0 01403 Offset W Work Coordinate to update with edge location i
284. ined then S FinStock only applies to the bottom Default is no stock left Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass on the sides only This amount overrides the value in S FinStock A value of zero can force stock to be left only on the bottom Default is equal to S FinStock The feedrate at which the tool will amp into the pocket in all three axes Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during roughing passes Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during finish passes Default is last programmed feedrate Z axis absolute start and finish height must be equal to or above H used as a safety clearance Z position before making X Y moves Executed in rapid at start and end of cycle Defaults to current Z position at beginning of cycle Number of tool used for previous roughing cycle Yes Roughing pass is skipped only finish pass is performed No Roughing pass is performed Default Yes Finish pass is skipped only rough pass is performed No Finish pass is performed Default Select Cw or Cow 185 0 2 O gt O O D Q N N Ye O gt O O Q N N Slot Cycle Use the Slot Cycle to mill a slot A slot is defined by a center X Y length width and depth If Xand Y variable words are not programmed the CNC will use the current position as the slot center The tool needs to be positioned at the c
285. ing Existing points can easily be edited To edit a point Point X 3 711138 Select the Properties button S Entity Layer DefaultLay Use Cancel Select the point to be edited The Point properties dialogue opens Edit the parameters to be changed Select the Use button to save the changes and close the Vertex properties dialogue or Cancel to quit without saving The first two steps can also be achieved by right clicking on the geometry to be edited and selecting Properties trom the pop up ACU RITE 35001 283 Line Tool buttons 7 Touching the Line Tool button activates the following buttons in the Vertical button bar O C E Button Function O 44 Select Parallel line in the Y axis to create a line parallel to the Y axis at an X coordinate z QA Select Parallel line in the X axis to create a line s fal sa parallel to the X axis at an Y coordinate lt Select Line between two points to create a line Q going through two points tr P Select Angular Line from a point to create a line O going through a point at a specific angle q Ay Select Line Offset to create a line offset from 2 another line E Select Tangent line from a point to create a line tangent to a circle and going through a point s Select Tangent line between two circles to create Ma a line tangent to two circles A Select Tangent line at a specific angle to create a line tangent to a circle at a specific
286. ing information or adding a new tools information Find the required tool by using the arrow keys and or scroll bars Touch the desired field to make changes Type in a new value and touch the Enter button or touch another field E H 8 z The bottom bar menus are described on the following pages y Tool Table Menu Bar The following is a description the lower menu bar buttons available Program ystem Shutdown 25am El based on the data input e g Number of Teeth Surface Speed and Spindle Speed in calculated sais ry ee en Offsets Speeds Adjust Teach Ne Adjust opens the dialogue to adjust the current data of a tool in any column that is highlighted Button Function Tools button when activated displays the tool table E showing all tools that have been programmed into o the 35001 E Fixture Offsets opens the offset table for data Sama Leth Or L venr 7 oO g wilds entry Up to 100 fixture offsets can be stored on the TAO 0 0000 table 3 0 o 0 9 Milling Cu 0 0000 a 4 0 0 0 0 Milling Cu L J 5 0 0 0 0 Milling Cu a 6 0 0 0 0 Milling Cu FEED Feeds 8 Speeds opens the table where data can be 7 8 8 SSO M lling Cu e a Speeds x 8 0 0 0 0 Milling Cu aeS ae entered for each tool in the tool table when in Tool 9 8 8 9 ET m ma a ia r mode Certain fields will be calculated by the 3500i u o e o TD ing Cu rc E Exit
287. ining Accuracy Accuracy parameter for chaining geometry objects during shape selection Default value is 0 000100 Picking Accuracy Accuracy parameter for selecting geometry objects with mouse Default value is 6 000000 pixels Geometry Tolerance Accuracy parameter for geometry tolerance for internal geometry creation algorithms Default value is 0 010000 Output tab Output Dimensions Determines to output position values as either absolute or incremental Default value is Absolute Output Warnings Output warnings as comments when generating program Default value is No Output Resolution Output resolution in positions after decimal point when generating program Default value is 4 Program Name Program name to use when generating program Default value is the name of the program currently active Auto Generate Automatically generate program when CAM exits Default value is Yes Overwrite Program Automatically overwrite the program when saving file and not prompt to overwrite Default value is Yes Shift X Shifts all shape and tool path X values by the entered amount in the CNC program Shift Y Shifts all shape and tool path Y values by the entered amount in the CNC program Auto Block Form If checked it will automatically calculate an estimated block form toolpath when creating a program but only if a block form toolpath is not manually programmed Default is on ACU RITE 35001 0 000100 6 000000 0
288. inished touch the Use button to enter the data or touch the Cancel button to cancel out of the current dialogue Touching either button will remove the numeric touch pad from the screen Drill Locations gt BL O E gt N Copy button Paste button Clear button Backspace button Enter button Calculator On Off Button Drag Bar NO oR WN ACU RITE 35001 15 nD gt S O 2 gt N Calculator The on screen numeric keypad has a built in calculator feature The 35001 on screen numeric touch pad calculator feature is available whenever the on screen numeric keypad is open To open the calculator feature touch the Calculator button 1 Calculator button 2 Advanced Calculator button 3 Calculator result window The calculator works like a normal handheld calculator When using the calculator touching puts the result in the result window Touching Enter puts the result in the active field Advanced Function buttons When using the on screen numeric touch pad calculator feature additional advanced function buttons are available Touch the advanced icon button SIN COS X to access the advanced calculator features Touch the advanced icon button SIN COS X2 again to return to the basic calculator feature To close the calculator feature touch the Calculator button to return to the numeric keypad 16 1 Introduction Context Sensitive Hel
289. ion Block Skip Any block preceded by a slash code is omitted if the corresponding block skip switch is set ON in the program previous to the code The switch is set on by programming variable 1000 to the value of 1 A value of 0 sets the switch OFF Example N11 1000 1 Note O OFF 1 ON N12 G81 Z 5 R 1 F12 P 1 N13 X1 Y1 N14 X2 N15 X3 N16 X5 N17 G80 In this example the hole at N15 is skipped If N11 read N11 1000 0 Then N15 would be executed The slash code can be placed anywhere in the block provided it does not exclude code necessary to complete that operation It is recommended the code be used as shown above 1000 is reserved for block skip use ACU RITE 35001 399 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q Select Block Skip The 35001 control has nine 9 optional block skip switches The code followed by a number 1 through 9 activates the corresponding In this example the hole at N15 is skipped If N11 read N11 1002 0 O z switch Example N11 1002 1 Note O OFF 1 ON N12 681 25 Ra Fiz Pa Sem o N13 X1 Y1 po N14 X2 Er 2N15 X3 gt N16 X5 E N17 G80 Y q q Then N15 would be executed 1001 through 1009 are reserved for optional block skip use 400 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Parameters and Variable Registers A macro is a series of instructions designed to ach
290. ions of the User Manual To close the window and return to normal operation E press the Exit button at the top of the window ACU RITE 35001 17 nD gt 2 m gt N The following buttons are available when using Help Jeee 18 Function Help button activates the User Manual Help screen window Back moves back through the current viewing history Next moves forward through the current viewing history Show Hide Tree toggles the view of the left tree view section Maximize Minimize toggles between window and full screen views Exit closes the User Manual help window and returns to current operating screen 1 Introduction Console Key Pad The following keys are located on the console key pad There is also a quick reference guide located at the beginning of this manual see Controls of the 35001 on page ii 1 A 10 Axis keys use to select the required axis Numeric keys use to enter numeric data included is the toggle key for Plus Minus data entry CLEAR key use to clear selections such as values entered ENTER key use to activate selections and entries Arrow keys use to navigate around the screen and highlight dialogue fields HAND key use to cycle the CNC through manual movement modes RAPID JOG JOG FEED JOG 100 JOG 10 JOGO 1 Manual move Jog Axis keys use to manually move Jog the machine axis in the direction required SERV
291. ired N When using a Modal Drilling Cycle with the Repeat feature a DrillOff or non move command must be included as the final block Repeat Cycle Program example blocks 7 12 and block 15 Block Description 1 Dim Abs 2 Unit Inch 3 Offset Fixture 0 4 Rapid X 0 0000 Y 0 0000 D Tool 1 6 Rapid Z 0 1000 7 BasicDrill ZDepth 0 50000 StartHgt 0 10000 Feed 15 8 Rapid X 1 00000 9 Y 1 0000 10 X 0 0000 ACU RITE 35001 147 YN ET Block ES 2 r Y 13 a 14 O S 15 S 16 O 17 A LL q mN 148 Description Y 0 0000 DrillOff Offset Fixture 1 X 3 0000 Y 0 0000 Offset Fixture 1 Repeat 7 Thru 12 Rapid Z 0 5000 EndMain This program will drill four holes A Fixture Offset is used to relocate X Y zero When the Repeat Cycle is encountered it will drill four more holes at the offset location 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs 7 2 Canned Cycles Canned Cycles A canned cycle is a preset sequence of events initiated by a single block of data Canned cycles are part of the CNC software and cannot be altered They simplify the programming of complicated cycles One block of data can instruct the CNC to perform the necessary moves to drill a hole or mill a pocket A canned cycle is in Conversational format and G Code The Conversational format describe parameters such as peck distance retract height pocket depth and tool stepover Each canned cycle has its own con
292. ired destination Required ining Z Z Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis destination ToolComp T Select the modal tool diameter compensation to activate or select Off to deactivate comp 7 1 Expla Rapid Move Radius and X Specify the desired end point coordinate using the radius of the rari Move A movement and the actual X Axis position designation Field Code Description X X Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired X Axis destination Required Radius R Absolute or incremental distance to the E desired destination Required Z Z Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis destination ToolComp T Select the modal tool diameter compensation to activate or select Off to deactivate comp 124 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Rapid Move Radius and Y Specify the desired end point coordinate using actual position Rapid Move Radius and y Y designations either in absolute or incremental Bej S Field Code Description Q Y Y Absolute position of or incremental 2 distance to the desired Y Axis destination AL Required 00 Radius R Absolute or incremental distance to the ae O desired destination Required c Z Absolute position of or incremental amp distance to the desired Z Axis destination ToolComp T Select the modal tool diameter lt compensation to activate or select Off to LLJ deactivate comp
293. is calculated using es rom surfacespeed 12 m toolDiameter For example with a tool diameter of 0 5 and surface speed of 250 ft min the resulting use cancel ai spindle speed is 1910 RPM EN R fue NX eae The spindle speed in metric mode is calculated using rem surfaceSpeed 1000 1 toolDiameter 4 1 Tool Table Lit A ajil Feedrates can be calculated once the Spindle Speed is known Enter the number of teeth for the tool and a desired chip load for roughing and finishing The corresponding feedrate is calculated for each chip load eeds amp Speeds The feedrate is calculated using wa ag a a a n feedrate spindleSpeed numberOfTeeth chipLoad For gt PA example with the previously calculated spindle speed a 4 tooth too pe ee and chipload of 0 007 the resulting feedrate is 53 4 in min The calculated spindle speed can be overridden In this case the feedrate calculations use the new value The calculated feedrates can also be overwritten After doing all the needed feeds and speeds calculation touch the USE button to save changes or CANCEL to exit without saving In both cases the Feeds and Speeds table closes 70 4 Tool Management Simulation Tool and Offset Tables The 35001 includes the advanced ability to utilize a second set of the tool and offset tables which apply only to Simulation mode This allows a user to cr
294. is e AA EAA E E ae ea 140 A O O eo ean ee em eT 141 temporam Fathi Ole racer aa 142 SST Data nadie tddi sec 143 o O eT Dee Te Om TIED 144 PEC Cae IATA SA Mate tea ceanl foe eth Packt Sa a 144 A 145 Me FUne UON tee meee ren Op rant MU nC ON ET cy Te OREO Toe Mercer rE HCE Or at POT Oe Pre ee 145 SO DST AMON CU VAIO Nasa dsd 146 MeO Cal DOCKS neo AR a on Nue A A 147 xvii 7 2 Canned Cycles xviii Canned VC OS a T E E T TAE 149 DB E 150 WB igt ete Pane ale and BONN deem emeenen ne aermne E 150 FNM CS iach aap as lash ected tacit ascend ates see eee 150 Eat A A II O eae 151 POC DIIGO csi dr 151 Ei eaa aa A A A a A ier tes erecener Ta ary ene rarer Te 152 Borno Bdrectonal CY Cl sosia S 153 BOM Oe MGiIneCHOnial Cy Cle arna e e lanier cael eRe ae 153 CH Biel CVC E renn ld cda 154 Fat Boton BONnNg vel r a Me is Seo UDS 155 Dio E O 156 Did tard e AAA n a An a ene tach el aac Me tae n 157 MIRIC E Soiu E AN 158 UA A A A 158 EAE VO E T 160 A e a ee ee a eee ee 161 POTS ESO src lll 163 Tread AE A ne Pi ren er ey ener ene ee ne ECE Te 164 ARC OAT PIO TNE Cy ClO tias 167 Rectangular Promesa ita bes es 169 POCKET CIO pesticida rta 171 POCKET EMS OVI ted 171 Dratt Angle FOCKE Vcc 172 Rectangular rocker CYCle rest a a a a a 174 creuar POCKET Cy ClO estalla 176 Plunge Rectangular Pocket Cycle ita dci 178 Elinge Circular POCKET CYC aida 180 Frame 00 et Eyclie ct ei veileteaatctade alee S 182 RIO Rocket EVO unio 184 A O RSE TTS we C
295. is position designation Field X Radius Feed CornerRad ToolComp 128 Code X Description Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired X Axis destination Required Absolute or incremental distance to the desired destination Required Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis destination Feedrate at which to conduct the machining movement Positive arc radius for corner rounding negative X Y distance for chamfering Select the modal tool diameter compensation to activate or select Off to deactivate comp ne Move Angle and Y l o oo00f GIO E E ne Move Radius and X E EE E 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Line Move Radius and Y Specify the desired end point coordinate using the radius of the lo 0000 movement and the actual Y Axis position designation Basic Cycles Field Code Description Y Y Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Y Axis destination Required Radius R Absolute or incremental distance to the E O desired destination Required c Z Z Absolute position of or incremental amp distance to the desired Z Axis destination Feed F Feedrate at which to conduct the lt machining movement LLI CornerRad A Positive arc radius for corner rounding negative X Y distance for chamfering Se ToolComp T Select the modal tool diameter compensation to activate or se
296. ish cycle Note that it allows leaving stock thus permitting multiple finish passes to be taken each with different tool if needed Block 23 re defines the island for the bottom finish tool This is necessary for the finish cycle to work properly Block 24 is the bottom finish cycle The bottom finish cycle will remove bottom and side stock If a bottom finish cycle is used first it may not be necessary to use a side finish cycle They are both used in this example for illustration purposes This is the rendering of the program after being ran in Draw The top view is the line draw and the bottom view is the 3D solid model Approximate machining time is 15 minutes 250 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Pocket Island example 6 Example 6 shows a more complex contour with three islands one of which is nested This will also use the coarse tool feature Stock will be left to be removed with a finish cycle The initial roughing tool has a1 diameter A roughing finer tool with 1 4 radius will be used for further roughing Finally a finish tool is also specified The structure of the program is similar to the previous examples 1 Basic template conversational 2 Example 6 shows a more complex contour with three islands one which is 3 nested This will also use the coarse tool feature Stock will be left 4 to be removed with a finish cycle The initial roughing tool has a 1 inch 5 diameter A finer tool with
297. issues an error message If E is not set the cycle uses a default value of 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Default 0 1 Ball nose cutters and special cutters that require a move down more than 0 55 13 97 mm are not supported NOTE Z Retract Amount is set in the Tool Probe Parameters OvrMed M This is the override for the medium Feed feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium Sometimes there may be a tool that has a large diameter making it necessary to slow it down to prevent the touch probe trom being hit too hard This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original feedrate Optional ACU RITE 35001 213 YN Q gt O O O pe A m N Field Code Description OvrSlw S This is the override for the slow feedrate Feed that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow This is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original feedrate Optional OvrRPM R This is the override for the RPM that was set in the machine setup parameter calilbAndToolMeasurementRPM This is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original RPM Optional set too fast For this reason the cycle parameters M S
298. ition without overwriting the existing text Delete Block deletes a single block located at the cursor Find Replace will search and replace a specified code with another specified code ReEdit opens the Edit Help form to assist with modifying the block where the cursor is currently located If re edit is not allowed a message will be displayed in the message bar If ReEdit is used on blocks with multiple commands separated by a semi colon the Edit Help form for the first command will be loaded After saving the form the rest of the commands will automatically be placed at the end of the block as it was before the ReEdit This also applies for comments at the end of a line The comment will be placed at the end when the Help Form is closed Edit Features opens a new bottom menu bar with additional task options for editing the program This menu is described in the following table Exit will exit from the Edit Help screen and saves any changes made 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Edit Features menu When editing a program the following buttons are available in the Edit Features menu Button Function Insert Block inserts a blank line for a program block Dai at the cursor This differs from the Insert key on the Edit Menu A Mark is used to mark and unmark program blocks rd Copy will copy program block s or part of a block A Paste will paste copied or cut block s into another i section
299. ity Machine function button actual buttons displayed depend on the features of your machine Program running status 10 Red Machine is idle E Green Program is running Message Indicator 11 E Yellow Red flashing Error or Warning Green All OK 12 Screen Lock The touch screen can be locked at any time Y e 0 hom O Y o O O a hom 0 O dE q QO a A W N m 20 1 Introduction Program Management Screen The Program Management screen displays several windows and buttons The following list maps what is being viewed on this screen See Accessing Program Management on page 88 1 6 TA Manual Data r System e ay Program pn y Neen a i Program To Run hinge plate 1 g J Showing w 9 M Free 193 8 GB Sort by Name 12 A I 03 J 1 97 K 49 a G_Dril1 Program Management main mode button A Program List window PA Program Text Preview area B gSample Program Display area lShinge plate 1 ls include Horizontal Button Bar li M_Cycles Program Type Information Display and available computing Fae i atere space Program Sort Button Touch Program To Run button to select program M_Mi11 MM Mill On O C1 RP WD ni M_ Pockets y y New Program 00 12 17 Unplug Recycle eg om oom cos ka lower left corner is activated by touching it for two p
300. l Press the Start button to execute the change or Manual Touch the Manual button to cancel all changes 52 3 Manual Data Input Offset Offset allows the operator to activate a new offset from the Offset Tse table or modify existing values in the Offset table If only a fixture offset number is entered the system will activate the offset provided from the offset table If any of the other values are entered e g X Y Z etc the offset settings for the fixture offset number will be modified and the new values are stored in the offset table Touch the Offset Location zone to open the Offset dialogue To deactivate the current fixture offset touch the Clear Fixture Offsets button To use an existing Fixture Offset enter the Offset number from the table in the data field Modify any of the values e g X Y Z etc in the data field if necessary new values will update the current values in the Offset table Touch Use to enter the values or press Cancel to exit without making any changes 3 1 Manual Data Input MIDI When the Use button has been selected the operator will be prompted to Press Start to run operation or Manual to cancel Press the Start button to execute the change or Touch the Manual button to cancel all changes Manual ACU RITE 35001 53 Basic Modals Basic Modals allow the operator to set some of the basic modals for the system In this dialog t
301. l 233 TA lt O gt Q O O Sam A N Field Code Description DistinX A The distance from the starting point to move in the X axis to find the top of the part The Default is 1 0 25 4 mm toward the part at the angle specified in the S cycle parameter Optional DistInY B The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to find the top of the part The Default is 1 0 25 4 mm toward the part at the angle specified in the S cycle parameter Optional YN Q gt O O O pe A mM N X This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the coordinate entered relative to the current active work coordinate before finding the skew angle Optional Y J Same as only for the Y axis Optional Z K Same as only for the Z axis Optional To use the skew compensation Cycle Place the probe in the spindle with its tool number active and the tool type set to Touch Probe Manually jog the probe stylus to the appropriate start position relative to the part as specified by the S parameter in Table 5 56 skew compensation above X or Y should be within 0 1 2 54 mm of the part edge If H 1 the Z axis should be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part otherwise the Z axis should be at the side picking depth If run from within a program probe must be pre positioned Skew compensation Qn Sn If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated every ti
302. lable memory Block separators can also be used in programs Example 1 executes five moves on the machine when you touch Start Each move is separated by the block separator Example 1 G90 G01 X0 YO F30 X3 Y 2 X0 YO Example 2 moves the axes linearly to XO YO then CW to X1 Y1 then linearly to X2 Example 2 G90 G01 XO YO F10 G02 X1 Y1 11 JO F8 G01 X2 ACU RITE 35001 389 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q O z Sam O O pee A O O gt O lt Y q q Tool Offset Modification You can modify a tool diameter or length offset in the program without using the Tool Page This is useful when rough milling a profile where cutter diameter compensation requires different diameter definitions for the same tool to step the width of the cut Tool modification can be either temporary or permanent To make it temporary choose not to update the Tool Page To make it permanent choose to update the Tool Page Temporary Format 11 D 5500 L 1 1000 Changes Tool 1 diameter offset to 5500 and length offset to 1 1000 Do not update the Tool Page for Tool 1 Permanent Format 11 D 5500 L 1 1000 H M6 Changes Tool 1 diameter offset to 0 5500 and length offset to 1 1000 Updates the Tool Page for Tool 1 to entered values D and L values are absolute and replace the previous offsets They are not added to existing offsets The H command instructs the 3500i t
303. lay variable contents during program execution use the PRINT command as part of the program Example 2 prints the contents of variables 110 to the screen In Manual Data Inout Mode tyoe PRINT 110 then touch Start to display the contents on the screen The PRINT variable can be abbreviated as follows P ACU RITE 35001 401 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q Setting and Direct Transfer Variables When using parametric programming with axis addresses and expressions including unary minus the complete expression needs to be in parenthesis For example X 151 is correct X 151 or X 151 Is not correct Variables are loaded or set when they display on the left side of an equation That is the left side of the equal sign Example 1 N200 100 5 56 Variable 100 contains number 5 560000 until changed Example 2 N200 100 25 4m Variable 100 sets variable 100 to 25 4mm Similarly 100 5i sets variable 100 to 5 inches If neither i nor m is used when assigning a variable then the value of the variable is modal For example 100 8 sets variable 100 to 8 no unit Example 3 N200 100 20 Variable 100 contains the number held by 20 until changed Equating one variable with another is called a direct transfer O z Sam O O pee A O O gt O lt Y q q right side of the equation must contain a value Otherwise th
304. le button remains selected until another Toolbar button is selected O Select the Create Circle button for the method to be used to define the geometry from the side Toolbar Enter the following information on the Create Circle pop up dialogue Start X field Enter 4 2 Start Y field Enter 4 Radius field Enter 75 Touch the USE button on the pop up dialogue or Enter from the numeric key pad With the Circle button still selected z Select the Circle Tangent button for the method to 3 be used to define the geometry trom the side Toolbar Select both circles previously created Multiple geometry solutions appear see page 334 regarding multiple geometry Enter the following information on the Create Circle pop up dialogue Radius field Enter 2 touch Use Select the circle highlighted in the example shown Touch on an empty area in the display The required tangent circle is now added and all other possible solutions are removed from the display 342 EEN 10 CAM Programming Create Line Geometry 34 Select the Line button from the Geometry Tools in the main Toolbar Select the Line Tangent between two circles button from the side Toolbar then select the two smaller circles With all possibilities shown select the line highlighted in the example shown and touch in an open display area to accept the line chosen removing the o
305. lect Off to deactivate comp ACU RITE 35001 129 Basic Cycles ining o gt LLI q N Arc Arc Move An Arc block initiates a feed motion and is used to cut an arc in a part The 35001 executes arcs in the XY plane by default For an arc in the XZ or YZ plane program the plane change before the arc move After you make all of the required moves in the XZ or YZ plane return the 35001 to the XY plane Refer to the section Plane Selection for more information on plane selection and arc directions One to four axes can be Included on a block with an Arc X Y Z and U reach the target simultaneously Arc is modal and remains in effect until canceled or overridden Arcs can be programmed in absolute or incremental and follows the active mode Specify the feedrate of the movement on or prior to the Arc block Conversational format Arc CW or Arc CCW G code format G2 or G3 differs from the start point a helix is generated Helical interpolation adds a third dimension to CW or CCW moves For the XY plane the tool moves in a circular motion in the XY axes and linearly in Z simultaneously You can use helical interpolation for rough boring applications as an example gt If the Arc block contains a value for the Z Axis which Press the Other button to select the Arc variant that best fits your needs Each variant is described next Specify the arc movement to the desired end point at the designated r
306. leted and rapids up to the Start Height and returns to the X End Y End location Activate a tool E 0 000000 prior to a Mill Cycle so the CNC knows the tool diameter Basic Setup 2 Comment Basic tab Start Height Enter the absolute Z position to which the CNC rapids before feeding into the work piece Z Depth Enter the absolute depth of the finished pocket ape q Depth Cut Enter the Z axis increment used for each pass f Finish Stock Enter the finish stock amount per side including O SAIS bottom eel es e SY e A A g Edit Type View Edit Program Entry Type Choose Line Tangent Line Perpendicular Arc Tangent a Line Arc Tangent or None for the entry move Line Tangent The tool enters the contour in a line move tangent to the first move of the contour Line Perpendicular The tool enters the contour in a line move perpendicular to the first move of the contour Arc Tangent The tool enters the contour in an arc move of a given radius and angle and tangent to the first move of the contour Line Arc Tangent The tool enters the contour in an arc move of a given radius and tangent to the first move of the contour None Entry move Is ignored Length Line Tan Line Per Enter the length of the entry move Angle Arc Tan Enter the angle of the entry arc Radius Arc Tan Line Arc Tan Enter the radius of the entry arc Exit Type Choose Line Tangent Line Perpendicular Arc Tangent
307. licking the mouse on any geometry item A pop up dialogue appears with three choices Delete Delete All and Delete dialogue Properties button To view the properties of an existing geometry select the Properties button and select the geometry to be viewed ACU RITE 35001 323 O ve O O u A lt O ae Shapes Geometry items are the basic element of CAM programming Shapes are created from geometry and tool paths are generated from these shapes For an example of how to create a shape see Geometry on page 316 The following describes copying and moving an existing shape Copying a Shape Copying shapes allows easy recreation of similar shapes without having to recreate the geometry To copy a shape Select the Shape Edit button from the Bottom Toolbar In the pop up dialogue select Copy Shape Select the shape that is to be copied In the pop up Copy Shape dialogue enter the X and Y coordinates that the shape is to be copied to Touch Use to copy the shape to that location Moving a Shape Moving shapes allows easy repositioning of shapes without having to recreate the geometry To move a shape Select the Shape Edit button from the Bottom Toolbar In the pop up dialogue select Move Shape Select the shape that is to be moved In the pop up Move Shape dialogue enter the X and Y coordinates that the shape Is to be moved to Touch Use to mov
308. location specified If X and Y are not specified the tool remains in the current position Use the plunge circular pocket cycle for carbide tooling when a multiple axis ramp in move is not possible The Z axis plunges single axis to programmed depths Use the plunge rectangular pocket cycle for carbide tooling where a multiple axis ramp in move is not possible The Z axis plunges single axis to the programmed depth Use the automatic hole pattern canned cycle to program partial or full pattern hole grids Also used for a corner pattern when holes are required only on four corners Use the thread mill cycle for cutting inside or outside threads It cuts either Inch or MM left or right hand and Z movement up or down A single tooth or multi toothed tool may be used Use the engrave cycle to engrave part numbers legends or any aloha numeric inscription The usual type of cutter is a sharp point or center drill type tool Use the arc engrave cycle to engrave part numbers legends or any aloha numeric inscription in an arc The usual type of cutter is a sharp point or center drill type tool Use the slot cycle to mill a slot Use the circular slot cycle to mill a slot along a circular path Use to set the feed rate Label Irregular Pocket Cycle Face Mill Cycle Circular Profile Cycle Rectangular Profile Cycle Mi11 Cycle End Mill Cycle Plunge Circ Pocket Cycle Plunge Rect Pocket Drill Pattern Cycle Thre
309. lues or press Cancel to exit without making any changes A 4 Q ad O e we mM When the Use button has been selected the operator will be prompted to Press Start to run operation or Manual to cancel Press the Start button to execute the change or Manual Touch the Manual button to cancel all changes ACU RITE 35001 51 Tool The tool dialogue allows the operator to temporarily adjust tool settings or mount a new tool If only a tool number is entered the system will mount the tool and use the values stored in the tool table If any of the other values are entered e g diameter length etc the tool settings for the tool number provided will be modified The new values will not be stored in the tool table as they are temporary manual settings Touch the Tool Location zone The Tool dialogue opens If a Tool has not been selected the cursor will appear in the Tool entry field When a tool was previously selected then the cursor will be present in the data entry field that was touched e g Diameter length To clear the current tool touch the Clear Tool Offsets button Enter the data required for the tool Touch Use to enter the values or press Cancel to exit without making any changes O 4 ad A nm e y Mm When the Use button has been selected the operator will be prompted to Press Start to run operation or Manual to cance
310. mber of usages after which a dongle is required The off line software can be started by using either the 3500i Off Line shortcut created on your desktop during installation or from the Start menu Once the software is running It is operated in the same manner as the machine Itself Similarly it should be shut down using the same sequence of selecting Shutdown and confirming Shutdown in the pop up dialog It for some reason the software becomes unresponsive a force quit can be done using the ShutDown 35001 shortcut created on your desktop during installation or from the Start menu Normal shutdown procedure should be used unless the force quit method is absolutely required i i i Drill Pocket Other G code T Weel SEE HEGGA Programs created in the off line software can be copied to the CNC and with the correct setup run on your machine d S s E Q Y d e O LO mM E Mm Updating It is not necessary to un install the current installation before applying updates Running the new setup program will update the existing installation to the newer version Although your created part programs will remain intact it is always recommended to make a backup of your programs and or configurations before updating the software installation ACU RITE 35001 441 918MYOS SUNT HO 1009 LEL 13 Off Line Software 442 A Absolute work piece positions 31 Accessories 3 D touch probes 23 HR
311. me you wish to find a skew angle When positioning the probe from within the program you should always use the G146 Protected Probe Positioning cycle see G146 instructions above in this document or use the I J or K parameters for the same purpose Execute the line in Manual Data Input Mode by touching Start 234 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Using the Z Work Offset Update Feature If you would like to calibrate all your tools to a fixed Z axis location on the machine and then use the Z Axis Work Offset to shift all the tools to the top of a part you must use the G141 Edge Finding cycle with Spindle Probing parameter update TloOrWorkOffsetZAxis set to WorkOffset Only 04 05 and 06 cycle parameters will affect the Z axis First use Q6 to set the spindle probe tool length offset to the fixed surface on the machine where all the tools are calibrated Next use Q4 or Q5 on the top of the work piece or to where you want the Z zero to be located to set the Z axis work offset shift to that Z position be active before the Z part zero point will be correct If either one of these is not active at the same time a collision could occur A Both the tool length offset and the G53 work offset must ACU RITE 35001 235 N O gt O O 2 de A N YN i O O 5 Q Y N 7 4 Sub programs Sub program information Overview Program repetitive sequences or pa
312. meter is set to 1 H is forced to 1 as well otherwise the Default is O Optional The distance to go down from the top of part to find X or Y coordinate of the center This is only used if H parameter is set to 1 Without any E value the cycle brings the probe stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the top 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it Default is 0 1 2 54 mm If not set Optional The distance from the starting point to move in the X axis to find the top of the part The default if Q is not set or set to O is 0 1 beyond the edge of the web If Q is set to 1 the default is the current probe position Optional Manual Data System e solo t 10am io A nside Outside Web Preview In v In 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 38 Arc Ccw X 0 16113 Y 0 45042 XCenter 0 08062 YCenter 0 03126 31 Arc Cw X 0 10449 Y 0 48650 XCenter 0 05664 YCenter 0 02642 32 Line X 0 10443 Y 0 48650 33 Arc Cw X 0 16109 Y 0 45037 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 34 Arc Ccw X 0 31588 Y 0 44772 XCenter 0 07804 YCenter 0 03631 35 Arc Cw X 0 34324 Y 0 46468 XCenter 0 02764 YCenter 0 01403 Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit 9 Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features 229 N 2 O gt O O E O Tim A N Field Code Descripti
313. mfer starts at a specified distance before the endpoint of the first move and ends the same distance from the starting point of the second move To program a chamfer move enter a negative value into the CornerRad field of the first move The entered value is the chamfer distance The resulting tool path follows the solid line ACU RITE 35001 Radi Intersection Between Line Tangent Move and Arc to Arc Radius a Tangent oo a Arc Move to Line er End Point Basic Cycles Line Move tai Starting Point Radius CornerRad Value O Solid Line Path Of Tool Radius Tangent gt to Both Arcs LL Radius CornerRad Value q First Arc te rbd Intersection Between Arcs Sond A oin End Point Solid Line Path of Tool First Move End Point Dist Second Move Starting e a 9 Distance o Chamfer Distance Negative CornerRad Value Solid Line Path of Tool 121 Basic Cycles ining o gt Lu Es N Rapid Rapid Move Rapid Move initiates rapid traverse The machine builder sets the actual rapid rate in the Setup Utility Use Rapid Move to position the tool prior to or after a cut Do not use Rapid Move to cut a part One to four axes can be included on a block with Rapid Move X Y Z and U reach the target simultaneously Rapid Move is modal and remains in effect until canceled or overridden Rapid Move can be programmed in absolute or incremental and follows the a
314. mpensation value for tool length Tool diameter wear value Tool length wear value Tool type A pop up dialogue appears where you can select the type of tool being used Option to make a comment or notation regarding the tool that does not affect the program Maximum tool life in minutes This function can vary depending on the individual machine tool Your machine manual provides more information Maximum tool life in minutes during Tool Call If the current tool age exceeds this value the CNC changes the tool during the next Tool Call see also Cur_time Current age of the tool in minutes The CNC automatically counts the current tool life CUR_TIME A starting value can be entered for used tools Permissible deviation from tool length L for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the CNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Permissible deviation from tool diameter for wear detection If the entered value is exceeded the CNC locks the tool status L Input range O to 0 9999 mm Maximum length of tool to be used for roughing cycle Default O Angle of plunge cut 67 E H 8 E Feeds amp Speeds Table Feeds amp Speeds Overview The Feeds amp Speeds Table allows the user to enter additional tool data tor each tool so that the control can calculate Feeds and Speeds to be used in MDI Feed and Speed MDI Touch Screen Feature Dialog or programs Based on the To
315. n More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit g Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features 225 N 2 O gt O O E O Tim A N YN Q gt O O O pe A m N Field Code DistInxX A DistinY B X Y J Z K Offset W Description The distance from the starting point to move in the X axis to find the top of the part The default is toward the corner being found 0 4 10 16 mm Optional The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to find the top of the part The default is toward the corner being found 0 4 10 16 mm Optional This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the coordinate entered relative to the current active work coordinate before finding the corner Optional Same as only for the Y axis Optional Same as only for the Z axis Optional Work Coordinate to update with edge location in X and Y axes If set work coordinate is updated Work coordinate register is not updated if not set and a warning message tells the operator no update has taken place if W is not set Optional To use the Inside Corner Finding Cycle Place the probe in the spindle with its tool number active and the tool type set to Touch Probe Manually jog the probe stylus 0 1 2 54 mm away from the inside of the corner you wish to find in X amp Y If H 1 the Z axis should be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part otherwise the Z axis sho
316. n X or Y axes If set work coordinate is updated if O through 3 are specified for Q or Z work offset or TLO if update TloOrWorkOftsetZAxis is set to TLO if O is set to 4 or 5 and Z TLO if O is set to 6 Before any tool length offset is active you must re call that tool Work coordinate register or Tool length register is not updated if W is not set and a warning message tells the operator no update has taken place except when Q is set to 6 in which case the Spindle Probe TLO will always be reset Optional To use the Edge Finding Cycle Place the probe in the spindle with Its tool number active and the tool type set to Touch Probe Manually jog the probe stylus less than 0 1 2 54 mm away from the surface to be found Type G141 Qn Wh If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated for every surface you wish to find When positioning the probe from within the program you should always use the G146 Protected Probe Positioning cycle see G146 instructions later in this document Execute the line in Manual Data Input Mode by touching NC Start 222 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Outside Corner Finding Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle 0 r ces a A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work oo probe The tool offset and work coordinate must be active before diia using this cycle in a program See Section 4 Tool L
317. n bar Button Function O Select Rectangle to create a rectangular shape a Select Polygon to create a polygon with three or more sides IN Select Triangle to create a right triangle amp Select Random to create an irregular shape Select Plus sign outline to create an outline of a plus sign Select Frame to create a frame E The user is prompted to enter the required parameters y ACU RITE 35001 287 O ve O O Sa A lt O a O Sen O O u A lt O a Tool Path Buttons Button A B B E 7 gt oo Ce 288 Touching the Tool Path button activates the following buttons in the Vertical button bar Function Select Job Setup to define specific job setup feature Select Block Form to create a block form used for the program Select Drilling to create a drilling cycle Select Mill Cycle to create a milling cycle Select Pocket Cycle to create a rough pocket cycle Select Pocket Finish Cycles to create a pocket finish cycle bottom or side Select Engraving to create an engraving cycle Linear or Circular Select Program Directive to add a program directive Select Machining Side to add a machining side to a shape 10 CAM Programming Tool Path Data Input Selecting a tool path type opens a data input dialogue The dialogue ape Manual Data Pe os MN al will have tab sections f
318. n is touched a sub menu of the types of operations that are available in that category are listed Touch the name of the type of cycle that is to be executed by the machine to display the dialogue These buttons are typical to all dialogues Some dialogues have additional buttons such as the Line dialogue shown here which also has the Other button allowing variations of the cycle to be selected Use is available on all dialogues This accepts the form data and enters the block into the program More is only available on dialogues that allow additional optional parameters Cancel is available on all dialogues This exists the form discarding the data and no block is entered into the program ACU RITE 35001 Manual Data System 0 3 ic Ham el 1 Simple setup for easy testing Preview 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 e 0 5 T1 D 01 L 1 6 7 Call sub program s gt 8 Call 1 al 9 Call 2 18 Call 3 11 Call 4 12 Call 5 13 Call 6 14 Call 7 e 15 Call 8 16 Call 9 17 Call 10 18 Call 11 19 Call 12 28 Call 13 21 EndMain uy 22 23 Sub program definition s e 24 E Coen 15 Call 8 16 Call 9 17 Call 10 18 Call 11 19 Call 12 28 Call 13 21 EndMain opboD Aa0 Manual Data System 3 A al Line Move Preview y o 105 O e O E 0 e 9 sj Y oes gt c Q m O E e O hom 0 c
319. n needed to create the geometry required to generate the tool paths for your program Information can be in the form of paper drawings which you will use to create geometry entities in CAM or a DXF file which can be used to import geometry data into CAM Job Setup Use the Job Setup feature to set parameters specific to the current job see page 291 Define a block form to aid in viewing the generated tool paths in CAM s solid model viewer or line graphics CNC Program CAM automatically generates CNC programs The program can be further verified using the Draw feature before cutting the part The program generated is based on cycles This allows the NC program to be easily edited before execution Examples are changing the depth of a pocket or the feed rate for an engraving cycle ACU RITE 35001 279 O Sen O O A lt O it O ve O O u A lt O ae CAM Mode Mouse Operations CAM works with the touch screen but for ease of use it is recommended to use a mouse or other pointing device be used Along with the standard method of touching to select items CAM mode offers special mouse functions that allow you to manipulate the graphics area and edit geometry In this section It is being assumed that a mouse Is being use The following table are available actions when using a mouse Graphics Area 2D View Refer to Viewing Tools Left Click amp Drag Zoom
320. n several modes as long as the modes do not conflict Before making a manual move make any necessary mode settings Modes set from the Manual screen remain active if the CNC is put in a program mode until the program or operator changes the mode Modes set from the Manual Data Input screen See Basic Modals zone on page 49 Examples Absolute or Incremental Rapid or Feed A 4 ad O e E Mm Active tool tool length offsets and tool diameter compensation Inch or MM Basic Modals allowing adjustment of current modal settings ACU RITE 35001 39 Button l Manual Data Input Menu Bar The following table describes the bottom bar menu buttons Function Mill Line Mill Arc Drill Cycles EI Pocket Cycles O 4 ad A C e m Mm Other Cycles G code MDI Tool 40 Mill Line opens the Mill Line pop up dialogue where information can be entered to mill a line Mi11 Arc opens the Mill Arc pop up dialogue where information can be entered to mill an arc or radius Drill Cycles opens a sub menu for selection of type of drilling cycle e g Basic Pecking Counter Bore etc Selection of a cycle opens a form for data Input Pocket Cycles opens a sub menu for selection of type of pocket cycle e g Circular Rectangular Slot etc Selection of a cycle opens a form for data Input Other Cycles opens a su
321. n the column field under TL Select No to unlock the tool or Yes to lock the tool When a tool s usage limits have been exceeded the tool is locked If a replacement tool RT has not been specified Time or Time2 will cause the program to stop An error message will appear Replacement Tool RT A replacement tool is used when the original tool is unable to mount typically due to Time or Time2 limitations Having a replacement tool available allows the program to continue running The original tool can then be replaced at a more convenient time Open the column field under RT for the tool requiring a replacement available and specify that tools number ACU RITE 35001 85 jad O 8 N vr jad O 8 N vr 86 4 Tool Management 4 O Som O SL Q c 9 or O O om a a eb o O e hom O hom 0 E LO 5 1 Program Management Introduction Accessing Program Management The Program Management mode provides access to all of the program utilities These functions include creating selecting editing deleting and copying programs The Program Management also provides access to network or USB memory devices Eere To activate the programming display touch the Management Program Management button in the top menu bar The Program Manager s User
322. n to their previous status String variables e g EPSI SAVEFRT can be set and used in place of regular variables Symbol or name variables can be used to make a macro program easier to understand They can represent a value or a variable They can be used only in sub programs and must be defined before use in the following format TEXT value or variable Examples PI3 141592654 PI is read as the value given TFLAG 1041 TFLAG represents system variable 1040 current tool comp Open bracket must start line Do not use equal signs p in string variables You can use a variable to print values 35 Pl print35 3 141592654 is printed There must be at least one space preceding and following the string variable in a program In the following examples Pl is the variable 35 PIl 23 Produces error 35 P 423 Correct format Once set string variables can be used in any macro within the same program ACU RITE 35001 417 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q O Sen O O Sa A O O gt lt Y Example G90 G70 GO G17 TO ZO XO YO 11 F30 X1 5 YO MOVE TO HOLE CENTER Z 1 G1 Z 5 MOVE Z TO DEPTH G65 P76 D2 0 S 010 J35 K20 GO Z 1 RAISE Z TO CLEARANCE PLANE TO ZO XO YO M2 O76 HOLE MILLING MACRO D 7 HOLE DIAMETER CCW CW J 5 ROUGH FEEDRATE S 19 FINISH STOCK AMOUNT K 6
323. n variable 120 via two levels of indirection The first level is the content of variable 119 The second level is the content of variable 101 which is incremental in the loop at Block N217 to introduce the contents of variables 102 103 and 104 The X axis moves to X1 X2 X3 and X4 Storing Result of Computation When a mathematical expression is programmed variables on the left side of an equation store the computed result N250 110 20 35 N260 120 18 2 At N250 110 contains the sum of the contents of 20 and 35 At N260 120 contains the result of the contents of 18 divided by 2 Parentheses establish an order of operations or denote special functions 11 4 Advanced Programming Multiplication operations must be in parentheses or the A 3500i treats the multiply command as a comment sign and disregards the rest of the line following the sign N300 140 11 115 2 N310 141 sin 45 N320 142 141 140 142 is shortest side 404 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Variable Programming Examples This program uses common variables in the range of 50 to 149 The program mills a pocket with a three degree draft angle on the sidewalls The dimensions at the bottom of the pocket are 15 5730 X axis x 13 8850 Y axis The pocket is 1 0000 in deep The tool begins at the upper left corner of the pocket and at full depth Part Zero is set in the center of the
324. nates XY ZU spindle codes S feed rates F tool codes T and preparatory codes G Use the following procedure From the Main Edit Help screen or from a Helo Template Menu type the required commands Edit Help displays the tyoed commands in the center of the screen If the address word requires a parameter the software displays an entry field in which the appropriate value or selection needs to be entered Type the value or selection if required Accept or cancel commands just the same as in the Help Graphic Menus Touch Use to enter the block into the program Touch Cancel to cancel your entry and clear the screen Accepted commands are inserted in the program Example Entering G Codes From the Main Edit Help screen type G77 and touch ENTER The3500i activates the Help Graphic for Circular Pocket Milling G77 Typing in M Codes Manually type in M Codes listed in the table Most M Codes except M30 and M98 do not require additional parameter settings For M Codes that do require additional parameter settings M30 and M98 Edit Help displays the Help Graphic for the M Code Type the required parameters and touch Use to insert the M Code into the program From the Main Edit Help screen or from a Help Template Menu type the entire M Code Example M2 etc The Edit Help displays the typed M Code Touch Use to enter the block into the program Touch Cancel to cancel your entry and clear the screen A
325. nd end of cycle Defaults to current Z position at beginning of cycle Number of tool used for previous roughing cycle Yes Roughing pass is skipped only finish pass is performed No Roughing pass is performed Default Yes Finish pass is skipped only rough pass is performed No Finish pass is performed Default Select Cw or Cow 187 0 2 O gt O O D Q N N Ye O gt O O Q N N Circular Slot Cycle Use the circular slot cycle to mill a slot along a circular path You must position the tool directly over the circle center prior to the circular slot cycle block or use the X and Y words Activate a tool prior to programming circular slot cycle so that the CNC will know the cutter diameter Field Diameter StartAngle Sweep Angle Width StartHgt ZDepth StepOver DepthCut XCenter 188 Code D Description Diameter of the slot circle The diameter must be larger than the slot width Required The angle in degrees to the slot s first end Required Sweep angle of the slot measured in degrees between the two ends SweepAngle F is applied CCW from StartAngle E regardless of the sign of its value Must be non zero Required Width of slot in Y axis Required Z absolute starting height 0 1 or 2 mm above surface Executed in rapid Required Absolute depth of slot Required The distance the tool steps over
326. nds FirstIsl 1 XX Y O O Aa oo mn Oe pd pd pd pd pd pd pd pd pd pd 10 0 OA une wo MCode 9 Endllain Sub 1 ENTER OPTIONAL SUB PROGRAM HERE MN AD N MN MN mn mn NA Ah unne DD O Dn 5 3 m a D o gt Z ToolComp Left 0 ho RO RS o oOo TEA ESA RE 0 3 DOOM gt lt x x or lt lt lt 1 Line X 1 Y 0 EndSub oo 00 OO N ACU RITE 35001 RectPock Length 4 Width 5 StartHgt 1 ZDepth 5 XCenter 0 YCenter CornerRad 75 RoughFeed 20 CoarseTool 1 247 YN i O O a Y N Blocks 1 through 5 are comments Blocks 6 through 8 define common defaults Block 9 defines the blockform or stock size This is only needed for the 3D solid The stock defined is 6x6 with center at 0 0 Block 10 defines the initial roughing tool which has a 1 diameter tool table or be saved in the tool table This is a gt The parameters for this tool must either come from the requirement for the coarse tool feature Blocks 11 through 13 define RPM and turn on the spindle and coolant Block 15 defines an island in sub program 1 The actual island is then defined in blocks 23 through 31 7 4 Sub programs corresponding pocket Also note that the island must specify the machining In this case since the island profile is defined in a clockwise orientation the machining side is to the left see block 26 gt The island must always be prog
327. ng at the intersecting point between two segments of geometry To Trim existing geometry perform the following Select the Trimming button from the Modifying Toolbar Select the geometry to be trimmed Only 2 geometry items can be selected to trim in a single trimming operation After the second geometry item is selected CAM will move on to the next step of selecting geometry to trim against Select additional geometry or touch in a empty space on the display to complete the selection process Now select the geometry be trim against and touch in a empty space on the display Only 2 geometry items can be selected to trim against After the second geometry item is selected CAM will move on to the next step of selecting which geometry to keep Select the portion of the trim geometry that is to be kept and touch in a empty space on the display The existing geometry is now trimmed O ve O O Sa A lt O E Delete button The delete tool is used for removing geometry from the display and al from the program sl To delete existing geometry perform the following steps Select the Delete button from the Modifying Toolbar Touch on a geometry item As the geometry Item is selected It is deleted immediately The delete tool stays active and can continue to delete geometry items To terminate deleting touch on the delete button again to toggle it off Deleting can also be completed by right c
328. nnronononanonnnnnns 239 Pocketand Islands exa 241 Pocket lsland asas 241 Pocket lsland EXAMPLE A Pasion ude alent Meatless 243 POCKEUISIANO CxO Sir iii tnd aborts 245 POCKEUISIANG example A kau denies E A tances 247 Pocketislind Cx A i E AN 249 Pocket lsland example Discs A ti 251 X X Drawing Programs 3 1 Draw VSN FO Ce race s 256 Sn N 257 MWewWOpuons MENU aasan a N de 258 PROMISE VIC VT MEN eara A pe enra mines 259 POTS Ca OG IO Sitges aca hee escent aa it 260 LOA A dae 260 notate IOAN WS Westin ati 261 PAM MTS adidas 261 Lime VIEW Ad Usted dicas 262 Ds A T ome POR me ae Be Rear ee ER Le 263 O A A A A aT A 264 Running a Program on the Machine 9 1 Running a program Modest Programmed OPEN dias 266 AULA On tros 266 po IA 267 Pause OF SLOP arunning POT Mia ita 267 dearing a MES SES e ee tee 267 ARA 268 PIO CI 5 T ra a ins EA A A AN a 269 selecta taria BIO tearan A 269 USING Draw With TUNING PO MS sis die 270 Pooran A En 271 A A O een a aa 272 POTS AUR INS aii 273 Accessin the Tool aleta arras ld 273 PONS OOS ins AA tate iad ela sola a es atta tesa Saas aa aaa manera ouaaa tan eutaa aes 274 Mla FOOTE AS ION rs ia 275 CAM Programming 10 1 XX CAM Programming CANTOU siria rote li no 278 Recommended CAM Programming Sequence cccccccccnnncccoccnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnononennnonos 279 A RO O A 279 SENS tano 279 JO rl 279 35001 es A A me 279 CAM Mode Moyse OPENS ni A 280 CAMNIMOGE SCE ioen a a E
329. ntify that particular sub program sub programs need to be entered after the end of the main program Era Select Sub Programs and then Sub from the pop up Programs menu Conversational format Sub G code format Oln Field Code Description Lo o io Sub O The number to be used to uniquely identify the sub program Required YN O O T Q Y N Ending a sub program To designate the end of the sub program use the EndSub command gt Select Sub Programs and then EndSub from the Programs pop up menu Conversational format EndSub E G code format M99 Calling a sub program To execute a sub program use the Call command in the main program or in another sub program The 3500 will leave the current program position execute the sub program and then return back to that program position and continue program run from that point e Select Sub Programs and then Call from the pop up Programs menu Conversational format Call G code format M98 Pn Ln Field Code Description More Call P The uniquely identifying number of the sub program to be called and executed Required ACU RITE 35001 237 YN ve O O TA 2 Y N Looping a sub program Use the Loop command to repeat the execution of a sub program the specified number of times It is possible to optionally conduct each sub program iteration in a new location by specif
330. ntr leelo t o wesnnenites 384 Miscellaneous MECO et a etna aie aa 384 CONTO I HC ODES idad ddrocolaaclenedds 385 XXIV 35001 ica o AE EEEE EEE ala ate SOs eines a einen E ET 386 Programming Non modal ExXaGT STOD curada 387 In Position Mode Exact Stop Check iia 387 Contouring Mode Cutting Mode one DoS 387 SMO TOKE E tidad 388 RSU TOn ReIerTence FONE oriire e Ga chet E T 388 Move Reference from Machine DatuM srcu uzsrssi uertat N 388 DOV OGIO N Sis seca ascii a a da A a N 389 BLOCK SCP arado at es 389 Tool Ofset Modificato Nesnenin tios 390 EXPrESSIONS ana FUNGUO aa 393 PP T 397 o ile EEE oe oh ahs ha AN i EEE ies ee 398 Variable Programming Parametric Programming occooccccccocncccnccnconnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnnnos 399 Bil 6 6 OKD a S E A 399 Select BIOCK ORD ua id E A Ea NEN 400 Parameters and Variable RegiSters oo oooccocccccnoccnnonconncocnnccnonnnonnnnononononnnnnnnoos 401 Setting and Direct Transfer Varlables ooccooccccocccoccnoncncncncononenencnoncnncnnnononoss 402 o A aac eed esdd Seelloehaepead A aa 403 DIOIMGiMeSUIE Or COMPUTO Nimri id EENE ER 404 Variable Programming Examples iia bid 405 User Macros GOS DOS GO ll 409 Macro Body TUI petra dent Wee tive estab tse can canted 410 Setting and PASSING Parameters iii AA thane 411 PODC US SS A Ee TP Be Pn ee 422 aae SRE ESEE E A E E E E E A 423 Unconamional LOOPS Luca dos 425 Shore FOM Address lots title 426 ouicalland Comparative Tessa 427 o o EE rer
331. nu button in the lower tool bar Touch the Next Menu button in the lower tool bar mae Touch the Clear Table button to remove all data Table 4 Tool Management Find The Find button provides a search of the Tool Table using either the Tool number or text Searching for text is case sensitive As an example if searching for end mill but the text was inserted in upper case letters END MILL Find will only search for lower case text Find in Table fh Touch the Find button to locate a tool number and ii enter the Line 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 A Touch the 0k button to go to that line E E ae Finding a tool using text Touch the Find button Find Find text gt Touch the Find in Table button The Find in Table o0s00M90M0009 900N0090 dialogue with keyboard is displayed O obrador LL aaa Type in the text to be searched for keeping in mind that the search criteria is case sensitive AAA Touch the Ok button to locate the text ACU RITE 35001 65 2 E H 8 ae Clear Feature The Clear Feature button is available in the Tool Table and also in the Fixture Offsets feature In the Tool Table feature it s application is not the same as in the Fixture Offsets feature The following description is for the Tool Table feature e Select the Clear Feature button to clear the active tool and reset to TO Teach and Teach Program
332. o update the Tool Page offsets to the programmed values and must come between the M6 and the D amp L addresses if an M6 is required by the tool change of your machine 390 L ee ee 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Tool Modification Programming Example This program mills the square shape four times The 35001 executes the first pass using the tool diameter entered in the Tool Page Each subsequent pass uses a different modified tool diameter as programmed in Blocks 8 10 and 12 T D L and H are the only word addresses allowed on the block Block Block N1 041 TOOL MOD G N2 G90 G70 GO G17 N3 TO N4 ZO N5 XO YO N6 T1 8000 DIA N7 M98 P1 N8 T1 D 6 N9 M98 P1 N10 T1 D 4 N11 M98 P1 N12 1112 N13 M98 P1 N14 TO N15 GOZO ACU RITE 35001 391 O Sen O O Sen A O O e gt 5 lt O c p Block Block z N16 M2 N17 Sn N18 O1 SUBPGM 1 N19 6123510 po 20 G41 Y1 9 N21 X 1 N22 Y 1 gt E N23 X1 Si N24 Y1 q oa N25 xO N26 G40Y0 N27 M99 The main program calls the sub program that contains the compensation on off commands between each tool modification When tool modifiers are activated the 3500i still applies any wear offset entered in the Tool Page 392 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Expressions and Functions You can program some values as expressions Parenthe
333. o be in degrees G01 X cos 15 Y sin 15 moves along the hypotenuse of a 15 degree angle with a hypotenuse of 1 COS n gives the cosine of n TAN n gives the tangent of n ASIN n gives the arcsine of n ACOS n gives the arccosine of n ATAN n gives the arc tangent of n ABS n gives the absolute value of n SORT n gives the square root of n LN n is natural logarithm LOG n is logarithm EXP n is exponential function EXP n is exponential function unary logical not not equal to Positive 100 means positive whatever value is in 100 Negative 100 means negative whatever is in 100 Example of indirection N30 200 51 456 N40 201 200 N50 G90 G1 X 201 F200 At Block N40 variable 201 200 Only when the second level of indirection is used at N50 does variable 201 contain the contents of variable 200 causing the X axis to move to position 51 456 Up to four levels of indirection can be used 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features System Variables Certain variables are set aside as 35001 system variables Some may be useful for you to know when programming macros The system variables range trom 1000 to 1099 Most of these variables are read only You cannot write information to them There are a few exceptions to this rule Variable Description 1000 Block skip variables read write 1010 to 1013 Commanded ABS tool position x y z u
334. o set the reference axis for the c polar angle PA Coordinates of the pole Reference axis of the angle Y plane X Y X 0 jan Y Z Y O YN Z X Z sad E O Absolute and incremental polar coordinates Absolute polar coordinates always refer to the pole and the reference LL axis q Incremental coordinates always refer to the last programmed nominal N position of the tool ACU RITE 35001 29 Angle Measurements Polar measurement of angles is referenced from the 3 o clock position 90 deg 0 degrees Positive angles rotate in a counterclockwise direction 270 negative angles rotate in a clockwise direction itioning 180 deg 180 W negative angle 270 deg YN 0 ma aL 4 9 0 POLARG68 O amm LL ve N 30 2 Machining Fundamentals Absolute and incremental work piece positions Absolute work piece positions Absolute coordinates are position coordinates that are referenced to the datum of the coordinate system origin Each position on the work piece is uniquely defined by its absolute coordinates Example 1 Holes dimensioned in absolute coordinates Hole 1 Hole 2 Hole 3 X 10mm X 30mm X 50mm Y 10 mm Y 20 mm Y 30 mm Incremental work piece positions Incremental coordinates are referenced to the last programmed nominal position of the tool which serves as the relative imaginary datum When you write a part program in
335. o work properly Block 24 is the bottom finish cycle The bottom finish cycle will remove bottom and side stock If a bottom finish cycle is used first it may not be necessary to use a side finish cycle They are both used in this example for illustration purposes On the previous page is the rendering of the program after being ran in Draw The top view is the line draw and the bottom view is the 3D solid model Approximate machining time is 30 minutes 254 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Drawing Programs gt a A ar 00 8 1 Draw Viewing Programs Draw Graphics part graphics is a method by which to prove a program before you cut any material It allows you to view the part edge and or tool path from different angles inspect the moves the machine is programmed to make without necessarily moving the axes This reduces waste and the chance of damaging a part In Draw Simulation Mode the 35001 runs programs and simulates machine movements in the viewing area The machine does not move A Always prove a program in Draw before running the machine Program name View Option vertical button menu Bottom menu bar with programing buttons View display with rulers activated Top menu bar Status indicator showing if the program is stopped red or running green Estimated machining time of the program O OOP WD 256 Manual Data System m pia pal R 3 M 00 01 01
336. obe cycles ACU RITE 35001 199 N O gt QO O 2 de A N N 2 O gt O O O S A M N Tool Probe Cycles Before using your tool probe and tool probe cycles you must setup the probe following the probe manufacturer s specifications The tool probe updates the tool registers only If you are going to use the tool being measured after the probing cycle you must recall that tool for the new offsets to be active For tool probing Tool Length Offset TLO is the distance from machine home to top of work piece or wherever you wish to set your part Z zero or if used in conjunction with a Z axis work offset a fixed surface on the machine Before starting to set your tools you must calibrate the probe Once the probe has been calibrated calibration does not have to be done again unless you remove the probe or replace the stylus Recalibration may also be required if the Z location of the top of the part changes and is not compensated by a Z work offset shift 200 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Tool Probe Calibration Cycle This is used to set the Z datum for length preset the effective probe Shutdown to SN aasasasasaa stylus diameter for setting tool diameter registers and establishes 3 the center of the probe stylus Proview Calibration must be done at least once before using the tool probe Once the probe has been calibrated calibration does not nee
337. of the program Cut will remove program block s or part of a block and place them onto the clipboard 11 1 G Code Program Editing f 1 Undo will undo the previous step s sequentially gt Redo will redo the previous step s sequentially Quit exits the program without saving any changes Quit Previous Menu returns to the previous menu ACU RITE 35001 355 Preview Features menu In the Edit screen the Preview button is available on the side bar This is a toggle key that when activated opens the preview screen Also other available types of preview buttons become active Each button provides a different type of view that allows the programmer to preview the tool paths that are best suited for the action being taken Function Preview toggles the preview screen on or off Preview 2D Top Plane Solid View is a two dimensional 2D top plane view of a solid block form model 3D Solid View is a three dimensional 3D view of a solid block form model Touch drag preview to change angle of view 2D Wire Frame Top View is a top two dimensional 2D top plane view shown as a wire frame and displays the tool path O LL La O O A Q 5 Q z O BOB ib 3D Wire Frame View is a three dimensional 3D view shown as a wire frame and displays the tool path Touch drag preview to change angle of view Q 3D Shaded View is a three Dimensional 3
338. ogram placing the CNC in motion Pause or Stop a running program Press the STOP key to stop or pause the program and machine motion Press the START key to resume the program placing the CNC in motion or Touch the Manual button to cancel a program that Is stopped z a O O C a t Clearing a Messages A Only Error messages will stop a program Warning messages can be cleared and the program will continue Go to System Maintenance and select Messages to clear or review messages that have been displayed Touch the message bar on the screen to clear a Warning message This removes it from the screen but a copy is saved in the Messages screen until it is deleted To delete error messages go to System Maintenance and select Messages Highlight a message and touch the Delete button All error messages can be deleted in one step by touching the Delete All button One or more error messages may be generated from a program error Re load the program after it has been corrected and restart at the appropriate block ACU RITE 35001 267 Single Step Single Step Mode runs a program block by block This mode enables e us mame you to step through the program and verify the moves before you cut an actual part Once a program has been selected and the Program Run mode has been activated touch the Single Step button Touch the START button to execute each block or moti
339. ol Diameter and Tool Length as well as other entered tool parameters the Spindle Speed Rough Feed and Finish Feed can be automatically calculated for each tool For more information on the Feed and Speed Calculator in MDI see page 55 Enter new values 4 1 Tool Table Feeds amp Speeds Table Structure The Feeds amp Speeds Table can be accessed from the Manual Data HE spa Input screen s Touch the Tool button in the bottom menu bar A ae om ake as gt gt Tool S gnp of Teeth Speed Speed Rough Rough Finish Finish a winie Touch the Feeds amp Speeds button to open the table cm oom Feeds amp Speeds ee oD Be Ree Aa wre SO pa an a jas N D F ixture A Offsets Teach Exit 68 4 Tool Management Data can be entered based on the Tool Diameter and Tool Length as well as other entered tool parameters the Spindle Soeed Rough Feed and Finish Feed can be automatically calculated for each tool in the Tool Table Column Tool Number Tool Diameter Tool Length Number of Teeth Surface Speed Spindle Speed ChipLoad Rough Feed Rough ChipLoad Finish Feed Finish Description Number of the tool corresponding to the Tool Table Compensation value for the tool diameter from Tool Table Compensation value for tool length from Tool Table Number of physical teeth on the tool Maximum surface speed of t
340. on DistIny B The distance from the starting point to move in the Y axis to find the top of the part The default is the current probe position Optional X This causes the cycle to make a protected X move to the coordinate entered relative to the current active work coordinate before finding the web center Optional YN Q gt O O O pe A m N Y J Same as only for the Y axis Optional Z K Same as only for the Z axis Optional Offset W Work Coordinate to update with the center location in X or Y axes If set work coordinate is updated Work coordinate register is not updated if not set and a warning message tells the operator no update has taken place if W is not set Optional To use the Inside Outside Web Finding Cycle Place the probe in the spindle with Its tool number active and the tool type set to Touch Probe Manually jog the probe stylus the approximate center in X or Y within 0 1 2 54 mm If H 1 the Z axis should be within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part otherwise the Z axis should be at the side picking depth Type G145 On Xn Wan If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated for every web you wish to find or whose position you want to reestablish When positioning the probe from within the program you should always use the G146 Protected Probe Positioning cycle see G146 instructions later in this document or use the I J or K cycle parameters f
341. on Touch the STOP button to stop or pause the block or motion in Are u X 21608 Y 0 29359 XUE X X 0 172 Arc Cw X 0 42700 Y 0 09950 XC X 0 Z Touch the Manual button to cancel a program that is on hold a ee tance 174 Rapid 1 00000 175 EndSub When you cancel a program the 35001 terminates tool 176 i 177 Sub 11 compensation and canned cycles All other modal settings remain aE Cu aoe Mie a A i i i 182 Line X The following table list the active buttons in the Single Step and Auto om screen ta 0 1224 Y 0 1235 2 2 0000 e l m ou A ta se Z 2200 Y 0 12350 5400 Y 0 12350 23800 Y 0 09650 0 21000 Y 0 09650 w 0 T 0 0 g O 1 E E O hom O e C as m Block Auto Search Button Function Draw activates the real time graphic view window The View Type button activates the sub menu of view options The Adjust View button activates the sub menu for view adjustment for the Draw screen Refer to Chapter 8 View Options Menu on page 258 ne Manual cancels the currently active program run session Single Single Step changes to Single Step Mode Step Nd Auto Changes to Auto Mode Use to run part programs for production Auto Block Search activates the Block Search feature a Refer to Using Block Search to Select a Starting Block Jog displays the Jog menu Jog Tool activates the Tool Ta
342. on you can use a variable that while not zero is treated as a true expression Zero equals false Any other value equals true IF THEN ELSE ENDIF N400 IF expression THEN ACU RITE 35001 423 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q O z Sam O O pee A O O gt O lt Y q q If the expression is true the program continues at N410 then to N440 where a jump is made to N480 If the expression is false the 35001 skips Blocks N410 to N440 and executes Blocks N450 to N470 In place of an expression you can use a variable that while not zero is treated as a true expression Zero equals false Any other value equals true IF GOTO N500 IF expression GOTO nnnn the block number with the character N S When you program IF GOTO statements do not precede For example IF GOTO 487 skips to block number N487 If the expression is true the program jumps to the block number specified nnn If the expression is false the program continues at Block N510 In place of an expression a variable can be used which while not zero is treated as a true expression Zero equals false Any other value equals true WHILE DO END N550 IF expression DO nnnn N590 ENDIF If the expression is true the program repeats between N550 and N590 until the expression becomes false Similarly if the expression is false when Block N550 is executed the 3
343. onfiguration data When entering values in the probing machine parameters keep in mind that all values are entered in metric To access the settings select Config from the System Maintenance menu If prompted enter the full access password 222 and then press Ok Press the Config Data button on the horizontal menu bar to enable the tree view Navigate to System gt Probing gt CfgSpindleProbingParamaters In this section you should verify the following settings spindleProbeType set to Corded for wired probes or Cordless for wireless probes nominal ProbeStylusBal Radius set to the radius of the probe tip diameter0fSpindleProbeGauge set to the diameter of the ring gauge that is to be used for calibration The ring gauge diameter can also be specified as a parameter in the calibration cycle later on if desired Some spindle probing cycles will also use the following settings for which the defaults are typically fine but that you may prefer to alter ACU RITE 35001 219 positioningFeedRate Normally set to the feedrate the control will use while normally positioning the probe around the part positioningFeedRate FirstTouch set to the feedrate the control will use while making Its initial touch to find the surface It is measuring dwel1TimeAfterProbeActive for wireless probes set to the time to walt after the probe is turned on before attempting a probe move as recommended by the probe manufacturer
344. ool Table diameters are still required tor compensated moves and when using cycles that have built in compensation You can run all Jog features from the Tool Table Tool Table offsets activate when you program a T Code 74 4 Tool Management Tool Radius Compensation When tool compensation is not active the CNC positions the tool s center on the programmed path When programming a part profile Left G41 the cutting edge must be half a diameter away from the path Using radius compensation moves the cutting edge half a diameter away from the path When tool compensation is active the CNC offsets the tool by half a diameter to position the cutting edge of the tool on the programmed path This enables you to program the coordinates along the part profile You do not need to adjust the path to compensate for tool diameter Most moves can be compensated Specify right hand or left hand compensation Right or Left refers to the side of the path to which the tool offsets as viewed from behind a moving tool If the tool is to the left of the work use Left G41 If the tool is to the right of the work use Right G42 Refer to chapter 11 G Code on page 366 A Use tool compensation with lines and arcs only Contouring without radius compensation The tool center moves in the working plane along the programmed path or to the programmed coordinates Applications Drilling and boring pre positioning ACU RITE 35
345. or None See Spindle Direction on page 292 Spindle Speed Enter the spindle speed Automatically calculated if tool being used is defined in the Tool Table Comment Tab 10 1 CAM Programming Kal Et E EJ J Coe Coa AA ASS ASS Shape E View Adjust ToolPath Create Add a comment if needed that will be placed in program See sample Comment tab on page 300 302 10 CAM Programming Pocket Cycle The Pocket Cycle tool path is used to generate a pocket cycle with or Manual Data no without islands from defined shapes Islands within islands are OL Sis z allowed The cycle rapids to the X Start Y Start point rapids to the Pocket Cycle Start Height and then feeds to the first Depth Cut using Ramp Feed Basic a ae The selected shape and islands are milled using Rough Feed This E y cycle continues until Z Depth is reached Finish Feed and Finish Stock 0 000000 are used for the final pass if specified The cycle then rapid retracts to Retract Height Basic tab Step Over Enter the distance the tool steps over width of cut as it mills out the pocket Start Height Enter the Absolute Z position before beginning to mill the pocket Z Depth Enter the absolute depth of the finished pocket X Start Enter the X position to start the pocket Y Start Enter the Y position to start the pocket Retract Height Enter the Absolute Z position at the start and end of
346. or Program Codes can be replaced throughout the entire program or at specific locations The following examples show how to use the Find Replace button to make the required changes First open the program for editing using the Edit button To replace only certain instances in a program ly Place the cursor in the program where the changes Replace are to be made and touch the Find Replace button In the Find input field type in only the text or code that is to be replaced In the Replace input field type in only the text or code that is to replace the existing text or code Touch the Next button or Next Previous button to jump to the next previous instance of text Choose the Replace button to replace that instance of Replace text or Touch the Next or Previous button to jump to the next previous instance of text To make a global change throughout the entire program Ani Place the cursor anywhere In the program and touch Replace the Find Replace button In the Find field type in only the text or code that is to be replaced throughout the entire program In the Replace field type in only the text or code that is to replace the existing text or code throughout the entire program Touch the A11 button A global change throughout the All entire program has now been made ACU RITE 35001 Manual Data Input System 3 1 2 example 2 g 3 coea Car 17 Shape 1 subprogram
347. or additional parameters for that tool path OIE CA RAR Pocket Cycle Tool path data input dialogues have a Basic tab and a Comment tab resto AMA except Drilling 7 ae 0 000000 0 000000 as shown on the Pocket Cycle Basic tab dialogue The upper section is always the minimal input requiring each field to be filled in The lower section s field inputs are for additional or optional information ee ae S Tab dialogues may be divided into more than one section Basic lab The basic required data input per tool path is located on the Basic tab a aay eS ee 7 i Required fields may have default entries 0 000000 in the top box gare saves vice gust re este EnA area which can be modified Setup Tab O ve O O Sa A lt O E Allows additional data input and or additional required data input for that feature Comment Tab Any comments for the tool path being created are entered on this tab and is included with the part program output to provide additional information for the operator A Setup or Advanced tab is included with some tool paths that allow for additional data input The data input dialogue contains two buttons Cancel and Use Cancel Select to cancel the new tool path Use Select to use the tool path with the entered data If a tool path command requires a shape Mill and Pocket cycles the user Is prompted to select the shape after to
348. or does not exceed Basic Cycles D this value gt Select the More Milling button and then PathTol c Milling from the pop up menu T Cancel Conversational format PathTol pa a G code format 61000 it Field Code Description Path Tol X The path tolerance for contour transitions m The MM range is from 0 0001 to 10 Required 142 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs System Data The SysData command can be used in a program to override system configuration data during the program execution The new value is only in effect during the program run and reverts back to the original value after program completion This is an advanced feature that should be used with extreme caution and only when absolutely necessary ie Select the More Milling button and then SysData from the pop up menu Conversational format SysData G code format G350 Field Code Description X X The group id of the configuration parameter to override Y Y The data number of the configuration parameter to override Z El The new value of the configuration parameter to be used U U The index of the configuration parameter to override if an index exists All parameters are optional ACU RITE 35001 so 143 Basic Cycles ining o gt Lu q N FeedRate A Feed block sets the feedrate for Line moves arcs and cycles that do not contain specifically programmed feed rates Feed blocks also set the
349. or milling a pocket or an island Once defined this can be copied used as a pattern array or another application may apply Before creating the tool paths the shape must be created as described here ACU RITE 35001 319 Creating the shape Touch the Select button from the bottom button Nanual Data System O EET Opie Sr menu cam test dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 0 383 Y 0 299 00 00 03 Select the bottom line between the two arc s Notice that a small circle appears at the end of the line This circle appears on the closest end to where the line was touched on Select the geometry on the other side of the circle This selects all geometry completing the shape Add Machining Side Ok Cancel Selecting the path this way eliminates selecting each individual geometry All geometry is now yellow in color and is considered a shape or contour O Sen O O u A lt O a Touch 0k to accept machining side to shape or touch Cancel complete the shape without the machine side Exit out of CAM to save the program Re open the program contour machining side Touching on its center will flip it gt The larger small circle represents the tool side of the to the other side of the line 320 10 CAM Programming DXF Import Feature The DXF import feature allows information in a Drawing Exchange Format DXF extension to
350. or the same purpose Execute the line in Manual Data Inout Mode by touching Start 230 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Protected Probe Positioning When an X Y and or Z move is programmed using the Protected Positioning Cycle the control stops the axis travel and program and Manual Data System ere io i Sam to alarm if the probe stylus is triggered before reaching the target set a in the X Y and or Z parameters 1 E Lo pa a This cycle is intended to offer some degree of safety when moving pe p the probe around the part however It is not fool proof and does not protect against gross bad programming where the probe body would encounter an obstruction before the probe stylus is triggered Extreme care should be taken to avoid this condition as probe n Ma da mage May result 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 38 Arc Ccw X 0 16113 Y 0 45042 XCenter 0 08062 YCenter 0 03126 31 Arc Cw X 0 10449 Y 0 48650 XCenter 0 05664 YCenter 0 02642 Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle 32 Line X 0 10443 Y 0 48650 33 Arc Cw X 0 16109 Y 0 45037 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work Are Ov X 0 34904 Y 0 46468 XCenter 0 02764 Yoanter 0 0149 probe The tool offset and work coordinate must be active before using this cycle in a program See Section 4 Tool Length Offsets on pa
351. order in which it is executed in the program 330 10 CAM Programming Smart Programming CAM Mode creates Smart Programs Smart programs are arranged by cycle blocks Edits to machining characteristics can easily be made from the machine by editing the cycle block that requires changes Changes can also be made in CAM Mode and the program regenerated Files Created CAM Mode creates four CNC files distinguished by their file O Sen O O A lt O it extension CAM Mode file types G Program generated by CAM DXF Contains definition for all geometry data created or imported into CAM SEL Contains shape selection information XML Contains the tool path information used to generate the G program ACU RITE 35001 331 g Z O 2 a lt QO gt S m a S 3 J D Creating basic geometry for tool path usage In this exercise a pocket slot will be created and completing the slot will require the use of a tool path for clean up The slot will be 500 wide by 1 000 long on center and 375 deep A 375 diameter end mill will be used Exercise One The first steps are to set up a new program for this exercise Program In Manual Data Input Mode select the PROGRAM MANAGEMENT button to activate the Program Directory Program button Touch the G Code IS0 box as the new program type and then touch Ok Touch the New Program button to create
352. orrect tool diameter before the cycle block RIES re cow X 0 11508 Y 6 11350 7 2 Canned Cycles 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 hd El Field Code Description TE pon 05 uf StartHgt H Z absolute starting rapid height must be Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles oR Features 0 1 or 2 mm above surface to be cut into Executed in rapid Required ZDepth Z Absolute depth of the finished profile Required Diameter D Finished diameter of circle If you enter a negative value both the direction of cut and the starting and endpoints reverse Required Ramp R Ramp distance used for each pass Required XCenter X X coordinate of the center Default Present position YCenter Y Y coordinate of the center Default Present position DepthCut B Z axis increment used for each pass ZFeed Z axis feedrate ACU RITE 35001 167 T O gt Q O D Q N N Field Code Description Rough J Rough pass feedrate Feed FinFeed K Finish pass feedrate FinStock S Amount of stock left by the machine before the finish pass Default O Enter a negative value to leave the stock without making a finish pass Side A Setting for cutting on the inside of the profile In or the outside Out Selection required O In 1 Out RetractHgt P Retract height If you enter B DepthCut the CNC executes the numb
353. ou use tool compensation Compensated arcs must be on the active plane XY XZ YZ Fixture Offset and Zero Set are not permitted during compensation In Manual Data Input Mode any active compensation deactivates Jog Return is permitted during compensation System variable 1032 is available to change the number of blocks the CNC can look ahead while in tool comp This is used for collision detection jad m N vr path This variable enables further look ahead to prevent undercut excessive tool diameter At default the CNC looks ahead far enough to find a valid intersection between the current and next move Set the variable 1032 before you turn on the compensation p Changing this value can change the compensated tool ACU RITE 35001 83 With the display screen open data can now be entered or edited by changing existing information sS Fixture Offsets Tool menu Q In the Tool menu bar the Fixture Offset display screen is provided to Es allow data entry in the display fields to set fixture offsets 5 E Touch the Fixture Offsets button to open the offsets S be N J Press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to select a offset line number the entire row is highlighted To add or change information select the column X Y or Z where the data is to be entered using the RIGHT or LEFT arrow keys Press the Enter key to activate the field in the required column Use the numeric keys to ent
354. owing the current active tool having values entered for the feed and speed in the tool table First select the type of operation that is to executed in the Type field drop down menu To adjust the values directly check the Enter New Values check box and enter new values for Speed or Feed by touching the activated edit fields and entering new values To adjust the Feed by entering a new Speed value check the Enter New Values check box Touch the activated Speed edit field and enter the new speed value Touch the Update Feedrate button O 4 Q ad A e we 0 The new feedrate will be calculated using this new speed value as will as the other parameters shown e g tool diamenter chip load and number of teeth Touch Use to activate the changes or press Cancel to exit without changing the active feed and speed When the Use button is touched the operator will be prompted to Press Start to run operation or Manual to cancel Press the Start button to execute the change or Touch the Manual button to cancel all changes Manual See Feeds amp Speeds Overview on page 68 ACU RITE 35001 55 When the current tool has no values entered into the Feed and Speed table the Feed and Speed dialogue will be opened Touch the Feed and Speed Location zone The Feed and Speed dialogue opens To adjust the values directly enter a new value in the Feed and or Speed fields
355. own here e a Manual Data Shutdown 1 68pm JO oS l l Jump to the beginning i Simple Font default gt 12 Required parameters 2 Page Up 13 Rapid X 5 Y 40Z 1 14 ArcEngrave Text amp lt 15 Optional parameters Up Arrow 16 ArcEngrave Text 012345678 17 ArcEngrave Text ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPOR 18 ArcEngrave Text abcdefghijklmnopqr Scroll Bar 19 ArcEngrave Text ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPOR 28 Arrow Down 21 Stencil Font 4 22 Required parameters 23 Rapid X 5 Y 25 Z 1 Page Down 24 ArcEngrave Text amp lt 25 Optional parameters Jump to the end 26 ArcEngrave Text 012345678 27 ArcEngrave Text ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPOR 28 ArcEngrave Text abcdefghijklmnopqr Horizontal Bar 29 ArcEngrave Text ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPOR Window Slider Scroll Bar s are used to scroll through the active window Window Slider s are used to resize a window on the screen Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features Scroll bars and or sliders are available in all screens that require navigation assistance 1 2 Visual Display Uni 14 1 Introduction Numeric touch pad An on screen numeric touch keypad will automatically pop up when shutdown Chae you enter a field that requires numeric data input eee ee 0 2900 E When information has been entered using the on screen numeric Y 0 4231 keypad touch the Enter button The next field requiring data input ECM will be highlighted When f
356. p The Acu Rite 3500 uses an intuitive method to aid the user when assistance is desired When assistance is needed with a feature the User Manual can be displayed directly at the point which describes the i E c pertinent feature apanta mee a Hard Keys S p To use Help as the example screen shows the console is in Manual e Y i i Manual Operation a E m Data Input and a Linear Engraving cycle is being programed It is Nanua Data Input A desired to see descriptions of the cycle parameters and the cycle ear Engraving Gonueeserioned Bad gt Programming Canne itself The following steps describe the actions the user needs to take Explaining Basic 5 j Pe organs gt Using Context Sensitive Help gt Poska COULD Y Engraving Cycle Engrave Cycle To progran the Engrave Cycle i E AS py Programming tr i sar assailant gt e To activate the user assistance first press the Help a a Porres N e Off Line Softuare button gt CAM Programming G code Edit Help vv This puts the control into the help selection mode ji E At this time touch the feature on the screen which you would like assistance with This will display a new window containing the section in the User Manual opened directly to the description of the desired feature From there you can also use the tree view on the left or the navigation buttons at the top to navigate and view other sect
357. pable of running and editing g code ISO format programs It is designed for milling and drilling machine tools as well as machining centers with up to four axes You can also change the angular position of the spindle under program control The 35001 has many powerful features that will improve your productivity The touch screen features and screen layout are clearly arranged in such a way that the functions are easy to access fast and user friendly ACU RITE conversational and G code formats The ACU RITE conversational programming format is a method of writing programs g code ISO programming is also supported Preview graphics in the editors illustrate the individual machining steps for programming the contour as well as the corresponding tool path generated If a production drawing is not dimensioned for NC programming the CAM can be used to graphically generate a complete part program Work piece machining can be graphically simulated either during or before actual machining The conversational and g code ISO formats are the same as that used in previous CNC products 3000M 5000M 6000M and 60001 ACU RITE tres ag System Program To Run hinge plate 1 g Showing w 9 G M Showing 9 G M G Free Free 193 8 G8 8 GB Sort by Name 12 Ac user 34 a 9 3135001 iM 35001 is 3500iSlot iM 3500iSlot 3500iTST M AR 3 ls cam test M Chapter 6 is DAN_C_Tool le DAVESDX
358. pdates length and diameter wear registers if specified until a maximum value is exceeded then it alarms out stopping the program This cycle can be used in place of calling up a tool before running it You must know the distance from the top of the probe stylus down that you have to move so that the largest part of the tool diameter is even with the side of the probe stylus for diameter measurement That value is placed in E if different then the default 0 1 2 54 mm To check the tool length and or tool diameter for wear or breakage In place of the usual Tn M6 command use G154 Tn Dn Kn Jn En Un at a tool change according to the instructions above and the control checks the tool prior to using It To activate the new offset wear values you must call that tool with T Tool M6 after this cycle has been run TA lt O gt Q O O Sam A N Spindle Probe Spindle Probe Cycles This section describes operation and an overview of the spindle probing cycles available in 35001 It is designed to assist in part setup Before using the spindle probe or spindle probe cycles you must have the tool number of the spindle probe active with Its tool attribute Type set to Touch Probe instead of the default Milling Cutter Rotation mirroring and scaling is not allowed while running these Spindle Probe Settings Before using your spindle probe for part setup you must set and or verify some settings in the c
359. pens the Mark Filter dialogue Programs selected can be moved copied or deleted Eo Copy copies programs to the clip board Activates the Paste program button and Move program button The number of programs that have been copied is shown in the lower right hand corner Y Paste copies the selected program s on the clip board to the current folder c S or O O om a c d E Q O e hom O hom 0 E LO Move moves the selected program s on the clip board to the current folder and empties the clip board 16 Delete deletes a program or programs that have been selected x 90 5 Program Management Display window arrangement The dialogue window displays can be re sized by dragging the sliders The selected program is displayed in the program window Manual Data Input Program To Run AR 3 M System cla el ACU RITE 35001 Touching the Folders button toggles between showing only the programs and the folders tree ls cam test li Chapter 6 sl DAN_C_Tool sl DAVESDXF Drilling TST is Engraving lsl example 2 ls Example One i g92 test iG Arcs SG Drill GG Mill sl G_Pockets e gSample ll hinge plate 1 ld include li M_Cycles MM Drill M_Mill MM Mill HM Pockets M maybenew I Showing 9 G M Free 194 5 GB Sort by
360. perating Guidelines The following provides the general operating guidelines for the 35001 e a System ee a Sam io E gt O gt N Mode specific function buttons are always located on the left vertical edge of the screen Scroll bars automatically appear when the window information does not completely fit into the current window size The active operating mode is highlighted in blue in the top menu bar The activated key in the side bar will highlight in blue also More than one key may be activated at a time depending on the action being taken Available selection keys for the current activity are highlighted Non available keys are grayed out Use the Context Sensitive Help feature when assistance is desired This is an intuitive feature that aids the user by going directly to the section in the manual in relation to the feature or button that you select to obtain assistance with It is important to understand that this manual is written with the assumption that the user is using the touch screen be used If a device is being used the action of clicking on ascreen key corresponds to the same action as if the user is touching the screen A USB keyboard can also be used gt A USB pointing device e g mouse trackball etc may also Main Operating Modes The ACU RITE 35001 has three main operating modes Manual Data Input MDI Program Management and Program Run These are accessed
361. ple 2 Block O23 TEST G M98 P9 11 1 0000 MILL GO X 6 Y 6 Le M98 P9 12 368 DRILL M98 P9 M30 023 TOOLCHNG G 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features In Example 2 a program named TOOLCHNG G can be called from the main program or from an existing sub program It is made possible by line N52 The program inclusion function is programmed on N52 In this way the same sub program can be used In many programs but you do not need to type It into each program Each program must contain the proper program inclusion block The program to be included must be in the form of a sub program beginning with Onnn and ending with the M99 code The format for program inclusion is FILENAME G It is especially useful for including tool change sub programs zero setting sub programs and macros ACU RITE 35001 431 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q O E EA O om 0 E A lt S gt LL E q q 11 5 Four Axis Programming Axis Type The machine builder sets up the fourth axis as a linear or rotary axis The three basic axes are X Y and Z The additional axis is designated as U on the 3500 console The following formats are for programming the linear or rotary fourth axis Linear Program as Feed Mode G1 or Rapid GO moves Only rapid and linear feed moves can be programmed The U axis can be programmed along
362. pocket Example 1 O 28 3 Deg Drift Pkt G90 G70 GO G17 TO ZO XO YO T1 X 7 7865 Y6 9425 A5 G1 Z 1 F10 F40 101 15 5730 102 13 8850 103 0200 104 103 TAN 3 M98 P100 TO G90 GO Z0 ACU RITE 35001 101 1 102 2 103 3 104 4 119 100 MOVE TO UP LEFT CORNER EEEDTO DEPTH LENGTH X OF POCKET WIDTH OF POCKET DESIRED STEP UP IN Z AXIS CALCULATE STEP OVER IN X Y AXES CALL sub program 100 405 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q O I Sam O O pe A O O gt O lt Y q q XO YO M2 0100 LOOP 1 103 1 SET LOOP NUMBER 1 IN DP 02 STEP 1 G91 SET INCREMENTAL MODAL G1 Y 102 MILL L H SIDE X 101 MILL BOTTOM SIDE Y 102 MILL R H SIDE X 101 MILL TOP SIDE BACK TO START X 104 Y 104 Z 103 101 101 104 2 102 102 104 2 END POS N STEP UP OVER IN X Y AND Z ADD STEPOVER TIMES 2 TO LONG SIDES ADD STEPOVER TIMES 2 TO SHORT SIDES END LOOP M99 The pocket is milled with a side draft angle of three degrees Z is set to a step up increment of 02 in 152 can be set to a desired value perhaps to determine the finish on the sidewalls of the pocket In this example the pocket always has a depth of 1 in and a draft angle of 3 degrees The side lengths and Z step may be changed To make
363. point to the desired destination Required Z Z Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis destination Feed F Feedrate at which to conduct the machining movement CornerRad A Positive arc radius for corner rounding negative X Y distance for chamfering ToolComp T Select the modal tool diameter compensation to activate or select Off to deactivate comp ACU RITE 35001 ne Move Angle and Radius e E e ne Move Angle and gt N g 0 0 EE oe EZE 127 Basic Cycles ining 7 1 Expla Field Y Basic Cycles Angle ining Feed o gt Lu Es N CornerRad ToolComp Code Y Line Move Angle and Y Specify the desired end point coordinate using the angle of the movement and the actual Y Axis position designation Description Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Y Axis destination Required Polar degree angle of the radius trom the start point to the desired destination Required Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis destination Feedrate at which to conduct the machining movement Positive arc radius for corner rounding negative X Y distance for chamfering Select the modal tool diameter compensation to activate or select Off to deactivate comp Line Move Radius and X Specify the desired end point coordinate using the radius of the movement and the actual X Ax
364. prior to programming a pocket cycle Always check that tool to corner radii do not conflict Z and P dimensions are absolute Alarm messages occur if the CNC detects program errors Pocket cycles use built in tool diameter compensation Stock variable is not permitted and is ignored When you cut one pocket inside another make sure to set P above the highest pocket At the end of each pocket the tool rapids to P and then rapids to the start position 0 O gt O O D O N N Pocket Cycle Overview The tool StepOver value must be equal to or less than the tool radius Roughing and Finishing passes are climb mill CCW by default but can be changed to conventional mill CVV using the Direction parameter A finish pass of only side stock will cut the entire ZDepth unless a negative DepthCut is specified which will indicate to finish the side walls in multiple steps down Pocket cycles allow specification of a coarse roughing tool and to allow skipping of a roughing pass The coarse tool allows multiple roughing passes to be taken Mount a smaller tool prior to running the roughing cycle again Subsequent roughing passes only remove material left over by the previous roughing pass Skipping a roughing pass allows the use of just the finish pass Pocket cycles with the exception of Frame allow the use of finish cycles Bottom Finish and Side Finish enable the user to mount another tool and then remov
365. program and the setting of Tool Offsets have been correctly completed Single Step Mode allows you to execute the program block by block After testing the program make any necessary corrections When the finished program is ready for production back it up on a USB memory device ACU RITE 35001 5 1 2 Visual Display Unit Operating Panel with Touch Screen display The ACU RITE 35001 has a 12 1 inch Flat Panel Color Touch Screen Display The following list of items are also located on the front panel ACU RITE See Manual Data Input on page 20 for mapping information of the ce ae start up screen For information regarding the Key pad see Console Key Pad on page 19 The following features are located on the front panel of the ACU RITE 35001 console Touch screen Flat Panel Color Display Numeric key pad and Axis selection keys Arrow keys Axis Jog keys Start Stop and Servo Reset keys Emergency E Stop Feed Rate override Spindle Speed override USB Port 1 2 Visual Display Uni SOON OO AON Screen Navigation The 35001 screens change as different modes are activated Basic procedures and features of the software remain the same regardless gt of the 3500 mode 0 2900 0 4231 0 0222 The 35001 console provides a touch screen operating panel To enter data select a feature or perform an action momentarily touch the corresponding button on the screen Drill Other G code tem
366. provides next step action to gt The prompt display bar located just above the bottom row complete the modification requirement Corner Radius inserting The corner radius tool allows a corner radius to be inserted in place of a sharp corner at the intersecting point between any two pieces of geometry To add a corner radius to existing geometry perform the following Select the Corner Radius button from the Modifying Toolbar Enter the radius required and select Use Select the two separate typically intersecting geometry where the radius is to be inserted The existing geometry is now modified adding the corner radius Additional corner radius modification can be inserted to other geometry or touch in a empty space on the display to exit Chamfer inserting The chamfer tool allows a chamfer to be inserted in place of a sharp corner or radius at the intersecting point between two line segments To add a chamfer to existing geometry perform the following Select the Chamfer button from the Modifying Toolbar Enter the chamfer length required and select Use Select the two separate typically intersecting geometry where the chamfer is to be insert The existing geometry is now modified adding the chamfer Additional chamfer modification can be inserted to other geometry or touch in a empty space on the display to exit 322 10 CAM Programming Trimming Geometry The geometry Trimming tool allows trimmi
367. r 5 Dim Abs 6 Unit Inch 7 Plane XY 8 BlockForm XMax 3 YMax 3 ZMax 0 0000 XMin 3 YMin 3 ZMin 1 9 Tool 1 Diameter 25 Length 2 MCode 6 18 RPM 1000 11 MCode 3 12 MCode 8 13 aaamooo ENTER NEW PROGRAM CODE HERE 14 Islands FirstIsl 1 15 Pocket Sub 2 StartHgt 1 ZDepth 5 RoughFeed 20 16 MCode 9 17 EndMain 18 19 island 28 Sub 1 21 Dim Abs 22 Rapid X 1 23 Line X 0 Y 24 Line X 1 Y 25 Line X 0 Y 1 26 Line X 1 Y 0 27 EndSub 28 29 pocket contour 38 Sub 2 an ToolComp Left 31 Rapid X 2 Y 0 Z 0 ToolComp Right 32 Line X 2 Y 2 Z 0 CornerRad 5 33 Line X 2 Y 2 CornerRad 25 34 Line X 2 Y 2 CornerRad 1 35 Line X 2 Y 2 CornerRad 1 36 Line X 2Y 0 37 EndSub 38 ACU RITE 35001 245 Blocks 1 through 4 are comments Blocks 5 through 7 define common defaults Block 8 defines the blockform or stock size This is only needed for the 3D solid The stock defined is 6x6 with center at 0 0 Blocks 9 through 12 define the tool RPM and turn on the spindle and coolant Block 14 defines an island in sub program 1 The actual island is then defined in blocks 20 through 27 corresponding pocket Also note that the island must specify the machining In this case since the island profile is defined in a clockwise orientation the machining side is to the left see block 22 7 4 Sub programs gt The island must always be programmed before the Block 15 defines an irregular pocket
368. r 0 05664 YCenter 0 02642 you want checked EN 32 Line X 0 10443 Y 0 48650 33 Arc Cw X 0 16109 Y 0 45037 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 oH 5 qo i 34 Arc Ccw X 0 31588 Y 0 44772 XCenter 0 07804 YCenter 0 03631 i i 35 Arc Cw X 0 34324 Y 0 46468 XCenter 0 02764 YCenter 0 01403 EstDiam D This is the rough diameter on the bottom of gt the tool Optional The diameter specified in this parameter should be roughly the diameter on the bottom of the tool that you want to be over the center of the probe stylus If you have a left handed tool you would give a negative value to this diameter so the spindle turns on forward verses reverse When stepping over for checking the diameter of the tool this cycle uses the diameter in the tool table for the tool being checked MaxLen K The maximum length wear value limit The Adj cycle checks to see if the cutter length has changed by more than this amount and triggers the alarm stopping the program if exceeded If not set the cycle does not check the tool length Optional At least one K or J must be set or the cycle alarms MaxDia J The maximum diameter wear value limit Ad The cycle checks to see if the cutter diameter has changed by more than this amount and alarms stopping the program if exceeded If not set the cycle does not check the tool diameter Optional At least one K or J must be set or the cycle alarms 216 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub prog
369. r Table clears all the data from the table Adjust allows adjustment of the currently selected Adjust A single data value in the active table Find provides a way to jump directly to a specific Find location in the active table without the need to scroll through the table aE Copy Tables can be used to copy the contents of the standard machine Tool Table and Fixture Offset Table into the se Draw Tables When Sim Tools is highlighted this copies the Fixture Offset Table data instead Running programs in Draw that have tool or fixture definitions only affect the simulation tool and fixture tables The Sim Tool and Sim Offset tables are only accessible when the feature is enabled in the configuration See Simulation Tool and Offset Tables on page 71 y 264 8 Drawing Programs Running a Program on the Machine E E O hom O e C as m 9 1 Running a program Modes of Programmed Operation A Verify all programs in Draw before you run them Refer to Chapter 8 Viewing Programs on page 256 There are two modes to run a program Automatic Mode Runs a program automatically without pausing Single Step Mode Runs a program one block at a time The display for these modes resemble the Manual screen The 35001 defaults to Auto when Program Run is selected Select a program from the Program Manager Refer to Chapter 5 Selecting a Program To Run on page 98 Wi
370. r touch the Mill Arc button The touch screen displays a graphic of an arc milling operation and the highlight bar is positioned in the first field on the form that is requiring data input The numeric pad is also displayed to enter data into the field The Use button can be touched once all fields have been entered or the data input can be canceled at any time by touching the Cancel button m S sad lt er A C e y Mm When the data has been entered touch the Enter button on the numeric pad The highlight bar will go to the next required field input and the AAA graphic view changes to display graphically the next required data oe pon a ae mma Si eats Sete gas oon NO Input When the data has been entered touch the Enter button again on the numeric pad The above steps repeat for each data entry and the display continues to change showing what is required for the data entry In addition to the required parameters the More button can be touched to show additional data entry inputs when this button is available The More button is not available on all menus The buttons Use View and Cancel are common to all Manual Data Input forms 42 3 Manual Data Input Mill Arc manual data input View op Manual Data ae eos E npu aintenance MDI Preview E 00 00 00 Touch the View button to view the Mill Arc data input graphically 89 90 99 Touch the Exit button
371. rammed before the Block 16 is a 4x5 rectangular pocket with center at 0 0 Block 17 defines the finer roughing tool with a 1 4 diameter Block 18 defines the island for the finer roughing tool Block 19 defines the pocket for the finer roughing tool with the specification of the coarsetool 1 cycle to calculate the material left by the coarse tool and gt Specifying the coarse tool as tool 1 allows the pocket only machine the required material This is the rendering of the program after being ran in Draw The top view is the line draw and the bottom view is the 3D solid model Approximate machining time is 3 minutes as compared to Example 1 of 14 minutes 248 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Pocket Island example 5 Example 5 builds on Example 4 by leaving some stock to then be removed with a finish cycle It s possible to have the pocket cycle remove stock but by using a separate finish cycle the machine is allowed to change tools if needed 1 Basic template conversational 2 Example 5 shows a rectangular pocket with an island in the middle 3 the island is in the form of a diamond Stock will be left to be removed with 4 with a finish cycle The initial roughing tool has a 1 inch diameter 5 A finer tool with 1 4 inch radius will be used for further roughing 6 Dim Abs 7 Unit Inch 8 Plane XY co BlockForm XMax 3 YMax 3 ZMax 0 0000 X in 3 YMin 3 ZMin 1 Tool 1 Diameter 1 5 Length
372. rams Field Code DistDown E Update U ToolLife O OvrMed M Feed ACU RITE 35001 Description The incremental distance from the current Z Retract amount to go down along the side of the probe stylus when doing a diameter pick The maximum E value is 0 55 13 97 mm or the tool may crash into the probe or table If you enter a value larger than 0 55 13 97 mm the control issues an error message If E is not set the cycle uses a default value of 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Default 0 1 Ball nose cutters and special cutters that require a move down more than 0 55 13 97 mm are not supported Z Retract Amount is set in the Tool Probe Parameters If this is undefined or set to 0 the G154 cycle does not update the diameter or length wear register each time It checks a tool If set to one the cycle updates the wear registers In both cases the control alarms when the maximum limit set in K or J has been exceeded Optional Select Yes or No if the Tool Life has been entered into the Tool Table for the tool in use This is the override for the medium feedrate that was set in the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Medium Sometimes there may be a tool that has a large diameter making It necessary to slow it down to prevent the touch probe from being hit too hard This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original feedrate Optional 217 TA lt O gt
373. ran eer ey xX A EEEE EEE TAE ATENE ee X oee Ee TAE Ok OLS P A ETE AE AE E E EEEE xX nn A eee ee xX Sere Ee e a e tdo AA A E A E T xX Introduction 1 1 The 35001 AGU RITE conversational and G code formats iii a 2 Poyernoe Up tHe ENS MICHIN E enredado 3 E Stop DelhVO h set ana ONC SIUC OVW aai ect caine a A a 4 O CI eee A 5 35001 Xi 1 2 Visual Display Unit Operating Panel with TOUCH Sereen display ica 6 SChES MING VIG AMON arder lll lio dasida 6 Menus DIalo ques and FONS a detahias nana side pandora A ANAN 7 General Operating GUI COWS Seini nce aerel tant ciee ans iacasa ER 8 Meat OperaungiMoOdes nestle 8 SUD MODE Starr 9 Upper Menu and Status Information Bal oocccccccnccncccncncncnncnnnonononononnnnnnnnonanoss 10 Machine TUNCUON DURO Seriado 11 LS A ita a lan ta al gate gene saa 12 ACQIIONa BUON Sorted 13 special Character uni ie 13 POOPING IO Si ll lisis 14 NUME tOU CONDS nes 15 CANN SO eat ak carlos 16 Advanced UTC HOMO ULEONS Ad 16 CONTEXT SON SILIVG TED cheer eect dd eat 17 Usmo Context SENSITIVE GID eia cash E E E R 17 CONSE T VE a A A E A A 19 1 3 Main Operating Mode Screens DISA MOVIE IO EEI E E Eo E A E E E E 20 Manak Data INPUT apn shah ceca net E E iat ten sual Pale Diag wales 20 progra Manada Mentalidad 21 AO AA II O O Crem A ore 22 1 4 Accessories QUA OVO SS shes are tat grt ah Sabatini Scan 23 HA electronic nand WINE Sida dadas ll 24 Electronic Edge FNdE radar A ia 24 Machining Fundamentals
374. re than 5 islands need to be defined the Island block can be used to define as many subsequent islands oir Arc Ce X 6 61380 Y 0 86858 XCenter 8 12425 YCenter 0 01279 as desired in multiples of 5 up to as many as needed Prior to calling EJ A a ee the irregular pocket or other compatible pocket command 21a Arc Ccw X 6 11500 Y 0 11850 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 9 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 Programmed by itself with no additional parameters will clear all KI previous island definitions All defined islands are also cleared after the use of any compatible pocket cycle or finish cycle If the islands need to be avoided for multiple pockets and or finish cycles they need to be re defined before each desired pocket finish cycle Islands cannot overlap other actively defined islands or the pocket contour itself or the pocket cycle will generate an error that it cannot calculate the tool path contour correctly The islands need to be a closed contiguous line and or arc movements starting and ending at the same point and starting with a Left G41 or Right G42 as the first line to indicate which side of the contour the cutter needs to be as viewed from the direction of travel No ramp on or off movement is allowed The cycle calculates these moves on and off the islands Activate a tool prior to programming so the cutter diameter is known Program the definitions before each pocket finish cycle
375. red MCode M The number of the desired M Code to activate typically MCode 6 for mounting the tool Diameter D The diameter measurement of the tool to be used overriding the values in the Tool Table Length L The length measurement of the tool to be used overriding the values in the Tool Table Dwear B The amount of wear to compensate for in the diameter of the tool to be used overriding the values in the Tool Table Lwear K The amount of wear to compensate for in the length of the tool to be used overriding the values in the Tool Table Updtable H Select Yes to permanently write overwrite the values specified to the Tool Table 146 Cancel 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Repeat Blocks The Repeat command allows a series of previously programmed blocks to be repeated one time Wherever it is used the repeated blocks will be processed just as if they were written in the program at that point For more advanced features including repeating more than once use the Loop command as an alternative The Loop command requires the use of a sub program whereas the Repeat command does not Refer to Section 7 4 sub programs for information on the Loop command Basic Cycles O Conversational format Repeat ES Field Code Description use D Repeat R The first block number at which to begin the single repetition required Thru T The last block number in the group of LL blocks to be repeated requ
376. red ova oranda deuce O 122 Rapid MOS TED OI ON unid dada 122 Rapid Move Angle and Radius std llenas 123 RIRIA MOVE SANGE RNGA a oa A E A 123 Rapa MOVE s ANIE AN estadia 124 Rapid Moves Radius aNd A aia dia 124 Rapid Moves Radius and Tossa sd iS 125 A A EA A E EST ENA TAS EAN TENTE EET cad A ae cians 125 LNE MOVE eria a E BEE 125 ENSEM E SENA gO Castin R ern a a Vee 126 Line Move Angle and Radius occoocccccccocncccncccnnnnconnconnnncnnnnnnnnonononcnnnnnonononnnoos 127 Line Move Angle and X crne an A A 127 line Move NGS aN Vid 128 Une Moves Rad s AaNd A alee sete ance aa e 128 Lhe Moves Fa CIUS AIAG Tensa dla 129 TAN E PE PEE E APEE E E EE T EAE E E E ee E E E AEA EE T 130 A a aa a aae 130 Arc Move Radius and EndPoint ni d 131 Ate Move Conte NENA A R 132 Arc Move Center and ANQl8l ccooccccccccccccccncncnconcnononcnnonononononcnnnnonononinnnnnnnninnns 133 Using Arc Center and EndPoint to create a circle iia 134 Arc Move Center and Angle Absolute mode oocccoccccccncccncccncnnncconononananonons 134 Arc Move Center and Angle Incremental mode occooccocccnccnnccncccnncnnnnnnnonos 134 BA O A O EE AEE E E ee 135 Pane c ele CU OM eise a E A hte eth ial ae bet 8 ete ate 136 Re Terence FONE RETU wernzscoudscarerecbeasacceadnatskaaieadaaanetandssnteetadeacamaneeaaaaesseacaaecees 137 Fixture Offset Work Coordinate System Select i ooccoonccocccocccconncononononnnnnnonenononos 138 A 139 DIME SIONISMO po eptdea A 139 Moa
377. ring Tool Length Offsets in the Tool Table As described previously see Locating the Tool Table on page 61 the tool table is accessed from the Manual Data Input screen The Tool Length Offset data is placed in the Length column in the tool table ES With the tool table open it can now be edited To activate the tool table touch the Manual Data Input button In the bottom menu bar touch the Tool button to open the tool table Select the tool number that is to be edited Use the scroll bars or arrow keys to highlight the Length column field Press the Enter key to activate the field Use the Back Space or Clear button to delete previously entered data if necessary ACU RITE 35001 L3 L1 L2 System Maintenance Program Management Program Run Shutdown E eq 4 4 ea sali th D Wear L Weal n 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu oO H x x u x H ho 4 mia o un u 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu 0 Milling Cu seas 0 Milling Cu a eee 0 Milling Cu l O Milling Cu Y Fixture Feeds amp a gt an a N 0 2 8 A F a lt 0 eoeeedqedd dd nr qoooooqcoooo oo0 v 000000 Be Pp Exit 73 jad O 8 N vr mar A 8 N JT With the tool in the
378. rogram on the machine S O 2 n Q Button Function 3 o 1 Active program name 4 O 5 2 In Position display Indicates if the machine has reached the current target position or not 6 T 3 Active tool compensation status j as 4 Block number which is currently executing 9 5 The number of loops remaining in the actively 10 O programmed Loop block The number of successful program completions 6 and thus finished parts during the active program run session 7 Timer Inc Indicates the machining time per part Resets to at the end of each program run Timer Abs Indicates the total machining time of all 8 parts machined Resets when Program Run mode is exited 9 Active programmed feedrate 10 Active programmed spindle speed ACU RITE 35001 271 E E O hom O e e as m Parts Counter The 3500i keeps track of how many parts have been machined during the active program run session When first entering into Program Run mode the Parts Counter is initialized to a value of zero Each time the active program completes the Parts Counter value increments by one indicating that one more part has been machined The Parts Counter continues this pattern until Program Run mode is exited which clears the running total Upon re entering Program Run the counter will again be initialized to zero Adjusting the Parts Value The number of machined parts displayed in the
379. rray or possible other applications Before creating the tool paths the shape must be created as described below and previously in this chapter See Creating the shape on page 320 ACU RITE 35001 335 Creating the shape Touch the Select button from the bottom button Select the bottom line between the two arc s Notice that a small circle appears at the end of the line This circle appears on the closest end to where the line was touched on This represents the start point of the shape O Sen O O u A lt O a Select the geometry on the other side of the circle This selects all connected geometry completing the tool path Selecting the path this way eliminates selecting each individual geometry All geometry is now yellow in color and is considered a shape or contour Touch 0k to accept adding a machining side to the shape Exit out of CAM to save the program Re enter CAM 336 Manual Data System O 3 etica Ele i xxx dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 0 362 Y 0 704 00 00 00 Moon y ox z fcr Shape lavers View Adjust ToolPath Create Setu Exit A Edit y Type View Edit Program p 10 CAM Programming Creating the tool paths To create a continuous path the machining material size and tooling requirements must be defined The material size can either be a block large enough to accommodate the tool path or can be the a
380. s A Timed Dwell is a timed stop An Infinite Dwell is a stop that can be canceled only by pressing START With a dwell activated the 3500i halts motions on all axes but other functions coolant on off spindle control remain active Do not program any other commands Basic Cycles The time countdown is displayed in the Machine Status Area of the Manual Data Input and Program Run screens ore ance O iS Select the More Milling button and then Dwell from a e the pop up menu Conversational format Dwell 15 hold for 15 seconds or Dwell 0 hold infinitely G code format G4 T15 hold for 15 seconds or G4 TO hold infinitely LLJ q mN It is recommended that the Programmed Stop M function MOO be used instead of an infinite dwell Field Code Description Dwell T Amount of time in seconds to halt movement and program execution Acceptable range of 0 1 to 9999 9 seconds Enter a value of O for an infinite hold Required ACU RITE 35001 135 Basic Cycles ining x LL N Plane Selection Make plane changes prior to circular interpolation XY is the default plane at power on Circular moves and tool diameter compensation are confined to the plane you select XY XZ or YZ More Milling Conversational format Plane G code formats G17 G18 or G19 Select the More Milling button and then Plane from the pop up menu For determining arc directions the standard rule i
381. s In Position Mode Non Modal Used in a program to call a stored macro Macros can be entered after the main program Sub Program or in another file must use file inclusion to call to active program In non modal macro G67 call the variables can be changed at each call Used in a program to call a macro Macros can be entered after the main program Sub Program or in another file must use file inclusion to call to active program In Modal macro G66 call the variables always contain the same values Cancels a G66 Modal Macro call Axis rotation is modal and remains active until canceled Sets 3500i to Inch measurements t Sets 3500 to MM measurements f Use Axis Scaling to enlarge or reduce patterns commanded by the program Use the draft angle pocket cycle G73 to machine a draft angle on a pocket Frame pocket cycle G75 mills a frame or trough around an island of material Use the hole mill cycle G76 to machine through holes or counter bores Use the circular pocket cycle G77 to mill round pockets Use the rectangular pocket cycle G78 to mill square or rectangular pockets Use the automatic drill bolt hole cycle G79 to drill a partial or full bolt circle Label Fixture Offset Modal Radius Chamfer Cancel Modal Radius or Chamfer Exact Stop Mode Contouring Mode Macro Call Single Macro Call Modal Cancel Modal Macro Rotation Axis Inch MM Scaling Draft Angle Pocket Cycl
382. s a quick and easy way to engrave part numbers legends or any alpha numeric inscription The usual type of cutter is a sharp point or center drill type tool Options are given for engraving on an angle G190 rotating by a certain angle G191 and mirror is Supported for engraving molds When executed the CNC rapids to the start point then to the StartHgt the H parameter It then feeds to the ZDepth the Z parameter specified and begins cutting the Text selected Programming the Engrave Cycle To program the Engrave Cycle In Edit mode touch Other Cycles then touch Linear Engrave cycle to display the Engrave Cycle menu Complete the entry fields and touch USE Field Code Text A Description Text string which is to be engraved All ASCII characters within the range of x032 x126 are allowed which includes Uppercase Lowercase Numbers and Punctuation maximum 80 characters in Text string Required StartHgt H Z absolute start height Must be higher than ZDepth the Z parameter Required ZDepth Z Z absolute depth of engraving Must be below StartHgt the H parameter Required Height E Letter height Width is proportional to height Height is measured at the centerline of the cutter Required Font Q Font type to be used O1 Simple is a standard appearance Q2 Stencil is a stenciled appearance Q3 Stick has no rounded movements only straight moves Default is Simple Required ACU RITE
383. s cycle If X XCenter and Y YCenter are not programmed position tool center of the thread before the Thread Mill Cycle line X and Y rapids to the starting position of the thread Z rapids to the safe height specified in P ZSafePosn The Z axis feeds down to the start cut position H ZStart This could be above or below the Z position specified in the Z ZFinish finish position Depending on what is in the R ArclnRad parameter the tool arcs into the first cut position Spiral up or down depending on the difference between Z and H and go counterclockwise or clockwise depending if D MajorDia is plus or minus Then arc out and feed to the thread center for inside threads or a sate distance away from the thread for outside threads depending on the value in R ArclnRad Then feed back to the H height Then feed X and Y to the next depth of cut The depth of each roughing pass is the thread depth specified in the C ThdDepth parameter minus the stock amount specified in the S StockAmt parameter divided by the number of roughing passes specified in the E Passes parameter The cycle repeats this process until the final finish pass It then cuts the thread at the full thread major diameter T O gt O y D O N N With a cutter diameter of 0 625 this program cuts a 1 8 inside thread at XO YO The tool spirals down the thread pitch of 8 threads per inch finishing at a depth of 1 The starting
384. s in positive direction Manually moves Z axis in negative direction U Manually moves U axis in positive direction U Manually moves U axis in negative direction 274 9 Running a Program on the Machine In Program Axis Jogging While a program is active in Program Run mode It is possible to pause the automated execution and conduct manual axis jogging This should be used with extreme caution and only when absolutely necessary In Program Run mode press the STOP button to pause the running program Touch the Jog button on the bottom menu bar to activate the Jog Menu bar Use the normal methods of Manual Axis Jogging to move the desired axes Axis Jogging is described in detail in Section 2 2 Manual Machine Positioning When manual movements have been completed either return to normal automated program execution or optionally Restart Position before returning to program execution Restarting positions is described next E E O E O C as t ACU RITE 35001 275 E E O hom O e C as m Restart Position After making the manual movements it may be desired to reset the axes back to their original positions from the program execution before any manual movements were made While in the Jog menu touch the Restart Position button to open the position reset menu on the bottom menu bar Touch the button that corresponds to th
385. s optional User needs to decide which of these are actually required for the particular instance The Edit Preview Features menu now includes a button to access the Simulation Tool Table Tool and Offset Tables now support copying in both directions from Simulation to NC and from NC to Simulation The use of the Sim Tool and Sim Offset tables are now configurable See Simulation Tool and Offset Tables on page 71 a 9 jad Da O Ga E e 689 871 01 09 Added a new feature for custom OEMTEMPLATE program template files See To create custom program templates on page 99 ACU RITE 35001 vii 2 nur mn ban am Changed Functions of Software 689 871 01 01 Feed amp Speed Calculator in MDI was changed see page 55 Feeds amp Speeds Table functionality and description was expanded see page 68 Additional information for the Repeat blocks feature is being provided see page 147 689 871 01 02 Linear and Arc Engraving cycles now apply active program rotation Mirroring and scaling are still cancelled at the start of the cycle No rotation mirroring or scaling is active after these cycles have run and would need to be reprogrammed if desired see page 110 Tool Table Teach and Teach Program buttons are now configurable as to their positions on the menu see page 66 The setting to hide or show the on screen keyboard is now persistent across mac
386. s the center of thread at the current tool position Size of radius arcing into start of thread NOTE If R is a positive value or not set and the thread Is inside the cycle always returns to the center between passes If R is a negative value the cutter moves to the start or end point that is closest to the center if inside thread and farthest away from center if outside thread If R is not specified at all and the thread is outside the cutter backs away from the largest diameter by an amount equal to the thread depth Amount to leave for a finish pass after the roughing passes Feedrate for roughing If not set blank the cycle uses the current active feedrate Feedrate for the finish pass If not set blank the cycle uses the current active feedrate Number of roughing cuts to be taken NOTE If Stock is not set or set to zero and Eis 1 or O the cycle makes just one pass at the full depth If Stock is set to greater than zero and E is 1 or O the cycle makes one pass at the stock depth and one pass at full thread depth NOTE If you would like all non cutting positioning moves to be rapid set E toa negative number 165 0 2 O gt O O D Q N N Tool Length Offset is set the same as with any other tool or operation A tool diameter also has to be set In the tool table as tool diameter compensation Is built into this cycle tool diameter compensation is not allowed during the use of thi
387. s to view arc direction for a plane trom the positive toward the negative direction along the unused axis From this viewpoint clockwise Cw and counterclockwise Ccw arc directions can be determined For example in the XY plane you view along the Z axis from Z toward Z to determine Cw Ccw directions The following is a description of the menu field Field Code Description Plane F The desired modal plane to activate for subsequent program execution XY XZ or YZ Required 136 Z YZ Plane y XZ Plane XY Plane X X The three planes are shown V as viewed from the rear of the machine This view is the only one that shows all arcs in their normal orientations Z Cw YZ ARCDIR 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Reference Point Return The Home command returns the specified axes to their respective E a gt A Z and U reference point Machine Home Axes return from the current position to their reference position at the current feedrate Alternatively you can specify a coordinate to rapid to before moving at the feedrate to their reference position permanent reference position The machine returns directly to its X Y vier lt gt e Select the More Milling button and then Home nin from the pop up menu oo Conversational format Home G code format G28 Field Code Description XRef A Select Yes to return the X Axis to its respective Absolute Zero Reference point
388. sational programing Pocket Island example 1 This example shows a rectangular pocket with an island in the center The island is in the form of a diamond The cutting tool is a 14 diameter end mill 1 Basic template conversational 2 Example 1 shows a rectangular pocket with an island in the middle 3 the island is in the form of a diamond 4 The tool has a 1 4 inch diameter 5 Dim Abs 6 Unit Inch 7 Plane XY 8 BlockForm XMax 3 YMax 3 ZMax 0 0000 XMin 3 YMin 3 ZMin 1 9 Tool 1 Diameter 25 Length 2 MCode 6 18 RPH 1000 11 MCode 3 12 MCode 8 13 aaamooo ENTER NEW PROGRAM CODE HERE 14 Islands FirstIsl 1 15 RectPock Length 4 Width 5 StartHgt 1 ZDepth 5 XCenter 0 YCenter RoughFeed 20 16 MCode 9 17 EndMain 18 19 Sub 1 28 amatm ENTER OPTIONAL SUB PROGRAM HERE 21 Dim Abs 22 Rapid X 1 Y 0 Z O ToolComp Left 23 Line X 0 Y1Z 0 24 Line X 1 Y 0 25 Line X 0 Y 1 26 Line X 1 Y 0 27 EndSub 28 ACU RITE 35001 241 YN i O O a Y N Blocks 1 through 4 are comments Blocks 5 through 7 define common defaults Block 8 defines the blockform or stock size This is only needed for the 3D solid The stock defined is 6x6 with center at 0 0 Blocks 9 through 12 define the tool RPM and turn on the spindle and coolant Block 14 defines an island in sub program 1 The actual island is then defined in blocks 19 through 27 Y i O O T Q Y N
389. selected axes Enter the preset position values for each axis that is to be defined Touch Use to enter the data or touch Cancel to exit without making any changes When the Use button has been selected the operator will be prompted to Press Start to run operation or Manual to cancel Press the Start button to execute the change or O 4 ad A nm e y Mm Manual Touch the Manual button to cancel all changes 50 3 Manual Data Input Move to Target Location Touching in the Target location zone opens the Move to Target Move to Target Location Location dialogue allowing the operator to move one or more axes to a specific location Feed Rapid The operator can enter position locations for the active axes feed rate value or Rapid and absolute or incremental positioning If the feed rate is not specified the 3500i will use the last programmed feed rate Abs Incr From Machine Home If the From Machine Home checkbox is checked the positions are moved from the home position of each axes Use Cancel Touch the Target Location zone or select an axis in the zone by touching that axis The Move to Target Location dialogue opens and the axis that was touched is automatically selected The cursor will appear in the data entry field next to the selected axes Enter the position location values for each axis that is to be defined Touch Use to enter the va
390. ses enclose expressions The 3500i displays an error message If the expression is incorrectly entered Expressions follow the standard mathematics order of operations multiplication division addition and subtraction An expression must contain an operator or use a function Operators and Functions Ref Expression gt lt tomm toin tode tonu round fix fup var sin cos tan asin acos ACU RITE 35001 Function Expression function parenthesis Multiplication division modification Addition subtraction Relation greater than less than Relation equal not equal Convert to mm Convert to inch Convert to inch if inch mm if mm Force to current modal Round up or down automatically Discard fraction less than 1 Raise fraction 1 True if defined false otherwise Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine 393 O Sen O O Sen A O O e gt 5 lt O z Sam O O pee A O O gt O lt Y q q Expression atan abs sqrt log exp trun Function Arctangent Absolute value Square root Natural logarithm Logarithm Exponential Truncate Unary logical not positive negative indirection gt Function names are case insensitive 394 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Examples Ref Example a G01 X 100 101 All calculations must be enclosed in parenthes
391. st program the variable after the tool is activated 1030 is ignored for pocket canned cycles The variable must be programmed before programming tool Diameter Compensation LEFT or Tool Diameter Compensation RIGHT and cannot be changed while tool offset is active 80 4 Tool Management Tool Compensation Path Path of Tool During Tool Compensation In linear to linear or linear to circular moves the position at the end of the startup block Compensation LEFT G41 or Compensation RIGHT G42 is perpendicular to the next programmed move in the plane In either case the axes moves to a point perpendicular to the next move during the startup block The length of the XY move that activates compensation must be equal to or greater than the tool radius value Example If tool radius equals 0 3750 the vector length of the XY move that activates compensation must be 0 3750 or greater The same applies to Compensation OFF move G40 During tool compensation the CNC performs offset correctly and automatically Non positioning moves such as dwells except dwell zero or infinite dwells coolant or other auxiliary functions are allowed except Optional Program Stop and Program Stop Mode these are not allowed Moves in the third axis are also allowed during compensation It is recommended to use the previously described Entry and Exit moves ACU RITE 35001 Tool Diameter 4 TOOLPAIH y Left 641 PGM PATH
392. stock A negative value will cause the finish pass to finish the side walls in steps down 190 Manual Data System o PK rregular Pocke ycle Preview 0 0000 0000 se Em EZE 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 286 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 287 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 288 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 il 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 4 gt Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit g Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field FinStock SideStock RampFeed Rough Feed FinFeed RetractHgt Coarse Tool SkipRough SkipFinish Direction G code format G169 Code OQ ACU RITE 35001 Description Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass This amount applies to the sides and bottom unless M SideStock is defined then S FinStock only applies to the bottom Default is no stock left Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass on the sides only This amount overrides the value in S FinStock A value of zero can force stock to be left only on the bottom lf entered as negative stock is left but no finish pass occurs Default is equal to S F
393. t The first line in the input subroutine for outside shape or islands needs a Left G41 or Right G42 to indicate which side of the contour the cutter needs to be as viewed from the direction of travel No ramp on or off movement is allowed The cycle calculates these moves on and off the defined shape Do not include feedrates in the sub program In a closed shape the endpoint of the first rapid to position move and the endpoint of the last move line or arc are the same The CNC automatically calculates the moves necessary to clear out the shape If there are islands to be avoided they must be defined in the line preceding the line using Islands G162 Activate the tool prior to programming so the cutter diameter is known Field Code Description Sub W The number of the sub program that contains the perimeter of the pocket Must be a closed shape Required StartHgt H Z absolute starting height 0 1 or 2 mm above surface Executed in rapid Required ZDepth Z Absolute depth of pocket Required StepOver A The distance the tool steps over width of cut in the X and Y axes as It mills out the pocket Defaults to tool radius which is the max XStart X X Axis rapid to starting point Defaults to current position YStart Y Y Axis rapid to starting point Defaults to current position DepthCut B The depth of each cut per pass Defaults to tool diameter Max is the full ZDepth in parameter Z less bottom finish
394. t entry field Press the Arrows to move the highlight between entry fields without typing values Touch Clear to clear an entry field In the last entry field of the help graphic screen touch Use to add the block to the Program Listing Use A Touch Cancel to exit without making a change ancel There are two types of entry fields Required entry fields contain a default value placeholder A value must be typed in for operation of canned cycle or other command If anew value is not entered for a required field the 35001 writes the block using the 0 0000 default This may generate an error message when the program runs Optional entry fields are blank indicating that a value is only necessary if needed by the specific task Optional entry fields do not require a value When left blank a default value or position is usually assumed Press the key to insert a negative sign Touch the CLEAR key to clear an entry Remember Using the Exit button saves all changes made Quit a program and the changes are not saved ACU RITE 35001 Manual Data System gt 0 ee to 3500iTST G G Code Assist Code Assis 8 Rectangular Pocket Cycle Preview 0006 0 0000 3 4 KA W 0 0000 ZDept 0 0000 MIO MO cs 1 GO G71 G90 XYZ 2 G120 X 220 Y 150 Z100 I 360 J 245 K 200 3 G53 02 X 364 36 Y 146 28 Z5 0 4 G53 02 5 GO X76 2 Y 50 8 6 Ti D8 L 200 8 1000 M3 eee tat ZA AR
395. t reaches the Z Depth It then rapid retracts to the Return Height Drill Cycle Tapping A tapping cycle is used for tapping holes During a tapping cycle the tool feeds from the Start Height to Z depth the spindle stops and reverses the tool feeds to the Return Height and the spindle stops and reverses again Drill Cycle Boring Bidirectional A bidirectional boring cycle is generally used to make a pass in each direction on a bore or to tap with a self reversing tapping head It feeds from the Start Height to Z depth and then feeds back to the Return Height 296 0 ay Ps Example One dxf ystem PRESA el Layer DefaultLayer Y 4 718 00 00 03 Drilling Mi k 0 1 it Basic Setup Bor HIMNO a A Start Height Z Depth 0 000000 Manual Data O o Es Example One dxf System Elle el Layer DefaultLayer Drilling Basic Setup Bolt Hole loo Counterbore S Peck Boring Uni Chip Break Flat Bottom Bore 0 000000 Tapping D Boring Bi Use M Cancel Shape lavera View Adjust ToolPath Create Setu Exit Edit eat Type View Edit Program P 10 CAM Programming Drill Cycle Boring Unidirectional A unidirectional boring cycle is a boring cycle that allows the X axis to back off the bore surface after the spindle has stopped and oriented itself The cycle feeds from the Start Height to Z depth dwell for the specified time stop and orient
396. te Y position of start hole Required Increment between holes in X axis Can be used instead of A Increment between holes in Y axis Can be used instead of D Angle to rotate the hole pattern Default is O degrees 3 o clock position Length of pattern in X axis If used U cannot be given Width of pattern in Y axis If used V cannot be given 285 Line X 0 00100 Y 0 02650 206 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 0 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 207 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 208 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 Manual Data System EN laren 11 Seam el A O Abs Inc Millin More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit g Milling Block Cycles Cycles Cycles Features Features 157 0 O gt O O D Q N N Milling Cycles Mill Cycle The Mill Cycle is intended for contour milling operations Tool diameter compensation Z Pecking Finish Stock RoughFeed and FinishFeed are supported The cycle rapids to the XY start point compensated if ToolComp D parameter is used rapid to the start height and then feed to the ZDepth Z or DepthCut B using the ZFeed Subsequent milling blocks are then executed using the ToolComp D parameter and Feed specified The feedrate can
397. te set by the builder It enables you to run programs through quickly to check for mistakes M107disables Dry Run NOTE Making and saving a change to the Setup Utility cancels M105 ACU RITE 35001 385 O Sen O Q S A O O gt lt Y M Code M106 M107 Order of Execution Function Dry Run No Z Axis M106 in a program or in MDI sets Dry Run No Z Mode All feed moves are executed ata rate set by the builder and all Z moves are ignored during the dry run This enables you to run through a program quickly without Z axis movement M107 disables Dry Run No Z Axis NOTE Making and saving a change to the Setup Utility cancels M106 Dry Run Off Cancel M105 and M106 This returns the 35001 to normal operating mode The order of execution for available codes is as follows T M S F G and XYZ M98 P sub call is the exception gt sub program call M98 Pn always executes last 386 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Programming Non modal Exact Stop With the In Position Mode activated the 35001 approaches target and performs an in position check before it executes the next move The CNC comes to a complete stop at the end of every block This could cause witness marks to display on the work but prevents the CNC from rounding off sharp corners S Rapid moves are always performed in In Position Mode G Code format G9 In Position and Con
398. te to achieve the specified finish chip load Automatically calculated by oe Number of Teeth Spindle Speed and Chip Load Finish Automatic calculation can be Feed Finish overridden Finish Feed Spindle Speed Finish Chip Load Number Of Teeth Field in which the end user may include information related to the use of this tool For instance Comment if the information entered in the table is based on a carbon steel tool machining AISI 1010 steel this information could be included here 326 10 CAM Programming Setting up the Tool Table To setup the Tool Table Select the Setup button The CAM Setup dialogue opens Touch the right arrow key in the CAM Setup dialogue until the Tool Table tab appears Select the Tool Table tab The Tool Table opens in the CAM Setup dialogue Touch inside a parameters field to enter a parameter Enter parameter value Touch the Enter button Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all required parameters are entered Select the Apply button to apply the changes without exiting or the Use button to apply the changes and exit the Tool Table O ve O O Sa A lt O E calculated Calculations can be overridden by entering a new value and touching ENTER gt Parameters highlighted in blue have been automatically Importing a Tool Table To Importa Tool Table Select the Setup button The CAM Setup dialogue opens Touch the right arrow key in the CAM Setup dialogue
399. ter is known Field Code Description T 2 O gt O O Q N N Diameter D Diameter of pocket in X and Y axes eel Required tore gt 1 Simple setup for easy testing a d 2 Dim Abs 3 i z 3 Unit Inch StartHgt H Z absolute starting height 0 1 or 2 mm S Eees E above surface Executed in rapid AAA y Required E AEqQ ZDepth Z Absolute depth of pocket Required StepOver A The distance the tool steps over width of cut in the X and Y axes as It mills out the pocket Defaults to tool radius which is the max XCenter X X coordinate of the pocket center point Defaults to current position YCenter Y Y coordinate of the pocket center point Defaults to current position DepthCut B The depth of each cut per pass Defaults to tool diameter Max is the full ZDepth in parameter Z less bottom finish stock A negative value will cause the finish pass to finish the side walls in steps down FinStock S Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass This amount applies to the sides and bottom unless R SideStock is defined then S FinStock only applies to the bottom Default is no stock left 176 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field Code Description SideStock R Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass on the sides only This amount overrides the value in S FinStock A value of zero can
400. tes mirror image ON for that axis Mirror image reverses the sign of subsequent numbers More than one axis can be mirrored at once G100 XY To cancel mirror image program G100 on a block by itself Used to define a window in relation to the X and Y machine home and the Z part zero Used to remove bottom stock left by a previously programmed pocket cycle Used to remove side stock left by a previously programmed pocket cycle This cycle allows islands in irregular pockets Label Drilling Off Basic Drill Cycle counter bore Drill Cycle Peck Drill Cycle Tapping Cycle Boring Bidirectional Cycle Boring Unidirectional Cycle Chip Break Cycle Flat Bottom Boring Cycle Absolute Incremental Zero Set Mirroring block form Bottom Finish Side Finish Islands 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features G Code G169 G170 G171 G172 G175 G176 G177 G178 G179 G181 G190 G191 G210 G211 ACU RITE 35001 Description Use to mill irregular pockets Facing cycles simplify the programming required to face the surface of a part The Circular Profile Cycle cleans up the inside or outside profile of an existing circle The Rectangular Profile Cycle cleans up the inside or outside protile of a rectangle Start of Mill Cycle The mill cycle is terminated with the end mill block at which point it rapids up to the Start Height and rapids to the X and Y
401. th command If the tool path view was shown the display returns to the 2D geometry view after the tool path is done 10 1 CAM Programming Select YES to save the new tool path Tool Path Verification Touch the Use button to finalize creating a tool path The tool path is Toolpath Error Occured x automatically verified and a 3D tool path view is shown An error exists in one of your toolpaths If there is a problem with the tool path a pop up will appear notifying Save Edit Cancel you that a Tool path error has occurred The specific error will appear in the Messages and Prompts bar Three options are available Save Saves the tool path as defined Edit Returns to tool path dialogue to edit parameters Cancel Cancels tool path 328 10 CAM Programming Tool Path Editing The tool path edit dialogue allows editing and arranging existing tool paths in the program Tool path operations are used to generate the CNC program The program is generated in the order in which the tool paths are created The Tool Path Edit feature can be used to change the order of tool path operations or edit a specific tool path Select the Tool Path Edit button to display the Tool Path Edit dialogue Tool Path buttons Move Up Moves the selected Tool Path up in the programming order Move Down Moves the selected Tool Path down in the programming order Delete Deletes the selected Tool Path Copy Copies the sel
402. th the program selected touch the Program to Run button to activate the selected program as the one to be run Switch to the Program Run mode by pressing the Program Run button in the top menu bar When Program Run is selected whether in Auto or Single Step mode the program will start at the first block in the program A program can be started at any block in the program by using the Block Search feature See Block Search on page 269 Program To Run Auto mode Select the Auto button to run a program in Automatic Mode If already running a program in single step touch the Auto button to switch to Auto mode The Auto Mode is the 35001 s production mode All or any part of a program can be executed in the Auto Mode 266 Manual Data Program System m TEIN s tpn 2 0 2900 0 4231 19 6850 1 Simple setup for easy testing y 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L 1 6 7 Call sub program s 8 Call 1 9 Call 2 18 Call 3 11 Call 4 12 Call 5 13 Call 6 7 gt k ABRIR View Adjust Single Block Parts om eee r E a 9 Running a Program on the Machine Starting a program With a program selected and in Program Run Mode touch the Auto button to put the 35001 in auto mode Select the starting block in the program if necessary A program can be started at the beginning or at a block location within the program Touch the START button to execute the pr
403. that of the 35001 control itself 1 Simple setup for easy tesi 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L 1 7 Call sub program s hm S E O Y o I de O O L 05 a 05 q System Requirements Platform IBM compatible PC Operating System All 32 bit and 64 bit editions of Microsoft Windows XP Windows Vista and Windows 7 are supported Available Drive Space 2GB or higher Memory 1GB or higher Display Resolution 1024x768 XGA or higher Ports One available USB port for protection device Peripherals Keyboard and pointing device Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries 440 13 Off Line Software Installation The software is installed in the usual manner by launching the setup program selecting an installation destination and choosing the desired features to be installed Using the default setting for a Complete feature installation is highly recommended to ensure proper functionality On some systems you may be required to restart the computer after installation before the application will display properly Operation Before using the off line software the USB protection dongle must be inserted into an available USB port on the computer If no USB protection dongle is installed the software will work in demo mode In demo mode the software will allow a certain nu
404. the left side of the part S 90 would start in the upper right side picking in the X negative direction finding the skew of the right side of the part S 180 would start in the lower right front edge of the part picking in the Y positive direction finding the skew of the front edge of the part Default is O Optional The distance from the first pick to the second pick Default is 2 0 50 8 mm Optional If set to 1 the cycle finds the top of the part before finding part skew angle Default is O If H is set to 1 the probe stylus should be pre positioned within 0 1 2 54 mm above the part If H is set to 0 the probe stylus should be positioned at the Z axis depth from which you want to make side picks Optional The distance to go down from the top of part to find part skew angle This is only used if H parameter is set to 1 Without any E value the cycle brings the probe stylus center down past the top of the part after finding the top 0 1 2 54 mm Optional Specifies the distance away from the edge for the probe to fast feed to before trying to find it Default is 0 1 2 54 mm if not set This would be used to make sure that the cycle is picking from far enough away from the edge so that it does not trigger the probe prematurely when stepping over to make the second pick Hint If the S cycle parameter is relatively accurate this parameter is not needed because the default is good enough Optiona
405. ther possible solutions ACU RITE 35001 CAMSample2 dxf REIS X 05 591 Y 0 622 00 00 00 om y 6 BOBS ae Layer DefaultLayer Select CAMSample2 dxf Ok Y MESES ToolPath Edit Create Program View Type Shape Edit Adjust View Layers Setup Exit Layer DefaultLayer X A T33 Y 2 741 00 00 00 ONE El See 9 Delete E PRES RRE ERRE E Select Char Point AS 343 O ve O O Sa A lt O E The screen now has three circles and one tangent line on the two smaller circles O Sen O O Sa A lt O a Finalizing the geometry Unwanted geometry now needs to be trimmed from the final shape Select the Trim button from the Modifying Toolbar E Select the Trim button from the Modifying Toolbar in the main Toolbar The Prompt bar will ask that the objects to be trimmed should be selected Select the two smaller circles The Prompt bar will ask what geometry the objects should be trimmed against Select the large circle and the line The Prompt bar will ask what objects to keep Select the two outside radius arcs of the smaller circles Now touch in an open area in the display Both inside radius will be removed 344 CAMSample2 dxf Layer DefaultLayer X 7 783 Y 4 639 00 00 00 ow s o Bom oa KRAJE View Type Shape Lay
406. this program totally independent the Z depth and draft angle can be set to variables and the additional calculations must then be made This program requires the length and width of a rectangle the cut per side on the rectangle and the number of passes around the rectangle Variables 150 to 199 are read only They can be set only in the main program 406 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Example 2 N10 N20 N30 N40 N50 NGO N70 N80 N90 N100 N110 N120 N130 N140 N160 N170 N180 N190 N200 O 1000 GO G17 G70 G90 F80 TO ZO XO YO START POSITION OF RECTANGLE 151 3 SET READ ONLY VARIABLE X LENGTH OF SIDE 152 3 SET READ ONLY VARIABLE Y LENGTH OF SIDE 153 25 SET READ ONLY VARIABLE CUT PER SIDE 154 5 SET READ ONLY VARIABLE NUMBER OF PASSES M98 P1 CALL sub program BODY TO ZO XO YO M2 O1 G91 G1 X 151 MOVE X AXIS LENGTH OF SIDE Y 152 MOVE Y AXIS LENGTH OF SIDE X 151 MOVE X NEGATIVE Y 152 MOVE Y NEGATIVE ACU RITE 35001 407 O a O O A O O gt O lt Y q q O I Sam O O pe A O O gt O lt Y q q N210 N220 N230 N240 N250 N260 N270 N280 N290 N300 N310 N320 111 0 SET SIDE CUT INCREMENT TO O LOOP 154 LOOP 154 NUMBER OF TIMES X 153 Y 153 SET SIDE CUT 111 111 153 DECREMENT SIDE CUT EACH LOOP
407. tinuous Path Tolerances are defined in the Setup Utility The In Position Tolerance should be closer to target than the Continuous Path Tolerance In Position Mode Exact Stop Check While the In Position Mode is active the 35001 approaches target and performs an in position check before the next move is executed The CNC comes to a stop at the completion of each command This could cause tool dwell marks to display on the work but prevents the CNC from rounding off sharp corners G Code format G61 Contouring Mode Cutting Mode The Contouring Mode also known as Continuous Path Mode or Cutting Mode is active at power on It is used for feed moves With the Contouring Mode activated the 35001 approaches target and comes within the Continuous Path Tolerance of the target position No in position check is made before the next move is executed This enables the smooth contouring of a profile or surface G Code format G64 gt Rapid moves are always performed in In Position Mode The machine builder defines the In Position and Continuous Path Tolerances in the Setup Utility ACU RITE 35001 387 O E E hom O E Q O O c gt Lo lt lt q q O E hom O S 0 O d O c gt Lo lt q q Setting Stroke Limit The software limits feature creates an envelope that limits the tool s range of travel It is also called the Stored Stroke
408. tion of these 1 Program area 2 Help button 3 Preview button 4 Horizontal scroll bar 5 Bottom menu bar with programing buttons 6 Vertical scroll bar page up down jump to beginning end 7 Preview display activated 8 Preview display vertical menu bar buttons 9 View display with rulers activated 10 Preview display ACU RITE 35001 Manual Data System 3 O 3 lead el AR 3 N A imple setup for easy testing Preview 2 Dim Ab 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 2 5 T1 D 01 L 1 17 Call 10 18 Call 11 19 Call 12 28 Call 13 21 End ain Manual Data Input AR 3 N 1 Simple setup for easy testing 2 Dim Abs h Ons ic 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L 1 T 6 7 Call sub program s 8 Call 1 9 tall 2 18 Cali 3 11 Call 4 lt gt 12 Call 5 8 J 13 Call 6 14 Call 7 a Lo 15 Call 8 16 Call 9 17 Call 10 18 Call 11 19 Call 12 28 Call 13 21 End ain 9 22 Sub program definition s dary 103 O e O E 0 o e 2 a Y oes gt c Q m do O E e O hom 0 c me Y ed gt c Q t Program Edit buttons When editing a program these edit buttons are available Button Abs Inc Milling More Milling E Delete Block Drill Cycles Pocket Cycles Other Cycles Edit Features Exit E ls 104 Function Abs Inc
409. to a predetermined point and are described through coordinates The Cartesian coordinate system a rectangular coordinate system is based on the three coordinate axes X Y and Z The axes are mutually perpendicular and intersect at one point called the datum A coordinate identities the distance from the datum In one of these directions A position in a plane is thus described through two coordinates and a position in space through three coordinates Coordinates that are referenced to the datum are referred to as absolute coordinates Relative coordinates are referenced to any other known position reference point you define within the coordinate system Relative coordinate values are also referred to as incremental coordinate values Reference system on milling machines When using a milling machine you orient tool movements to the Cartesian coordinate system The illustration at right shows how the Cartesian coordinate system describes the machine axes The figure illustrates the right hand rule for remembering the three axis directions the middle finger points in the positive direction of the tool axis trom the work piece toward the tool the Z axis the thumb points in the positive X direction and the index finger in the positive Y direction The CNC 35001 can control 3 or 4 axes optionally The 4th axis is designated by the letter U The U axis function depends on the builder ACU RITE 35001 lt 27 Itioning
410. to return to the Mill Arc dialogue The view option is available with all manual data actions HeOo Touch the Use button to run the operation Touch the Start button to execute the machining cycle or touch the Manual button to cancel Adjust Move Blk Form Zoom Rotate Cursor A ad m e E m ACU RITE 35001 43 Manual Data Input Cycles The MDI Cycles are grouped in three categories as described in the g5 EES al ana ca Edda following groups 0 2900 Drill Cycles 2 0222 Basic Pecking CounterBore E Bi Dir Bore Uni Dir Bore E Flat Bottom Bore E Tapping Thread Mill Chip Break Pocket Cycles Rectangular Circular Frame Ring Hole Slot Circular Slot Plunge Rectangular Plunge Circular O 4 ad A C e m Mm Other Cycles E Face Rectangular Profile Circular Profile E Linear Engraving Arc Engraving Tool Probing Length Diameter Length Special Diameter Special Break Wear Probe Calibration E Spindle Probing Edge Find Corner Out Corner In In Out Boss In Out Web Probe Move Skew Compensation Probe Calibration 44 3 Manual Data Input When a Cycles button is touched the available cycles in that category are listed Touch the name of the cycle that is to be executed by the machine to display
411. to take effect A G53 work coordinate call deactivates skew compensation necessitating a re issuance of skew compensation Q2 to activate skew compensation Using Q1 or Q2 defaults the control to G90 Absolute If you are in G91 Incremental you need to switch back after the cycle has been run Optional 232 Manual Data System 3 Jo CED el Lk i jg nnn Skew Compensation Preview If Find Cw Find FindActive Activate 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 38 Arc Ccw X 0 16113 Y 0 45042 XCenter 0 08062 YCenter 0 03126 31 Arc Cw X 0 10449 Y 0 48650 XCenter 0 05664 YCenter 0 02642 32 Line X 0 10443 Y 0 48650 33 Arc Cw X 0 16109 Y 0 45037 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 34 Arc Ccw X 0 31588 Y 0 44772 XCenter 0 07804 YCenter 0 03631 l 35 Arc Cw X 0 34324 Y 0 46468 XCenter 0 02764 YCenter 0 01403 Ls Peers More Delete Drill Pocket Other Edit Preview f 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field Code EstAngle S DistPicks D Top H DistDown E DistBack V ACU RITE 35001 Description Estimated amount of angle from 3 O clock Default is O which causes the cycle to find the angle of the back edge of the part starting Its first pick in the upper left corner and making the second pick to the left of that as you are facing the surface being picked Examples S 90 would start in the lower left side picking in the X positive direction finding the skew of
412. ton Function Select Corner Radius to add a corner radius gt al Select Chamfer to add a chamfer iS Select Trim to trim geometry x Select Delete to delete geometry Select Properties to display geometry properties ACU RITE 35001 309 O ve O O Sa A lt O E O Sen O O u A lt O a Viewing Tools Viewing Tools allow you to toggle and switch between viewing options Viewing Tool Buttons Button ot E 310 Function Select 2D Wire frame to view 2D Wire frame for geometry creation and edits Select 3D Tool Path to view 3D tool paths Buttons for View Type and View Adjust are enabled only applies to tool paths Select View Rulers to toggle viewing of rulers Select Zoom In to zoom in to view geometry included in a dialogue created by touching and dragging the mouse in the graphics area Select View A11 to fit all geometry and shapes into the graphics area Select Grid to toggle viewing of grid display Select View Geometry to toggle viewing of geometry Select View Shapes to toggle viewing of shapes 10 CAM Programming CAM Mode buttons The CAM mode screen has 10 standard buttons Touch Next Menu button to locate the QUIT button on the second menu Manual Data Progran System E O anagement ic 1 36pm El 3500i dxf Layer DefaultLayer Y 1 064 00 00 03 Moon x CAM Tool B
413. tt pe ttt maa the first block to be deleted Touch the Mark Block AAA eap button and use the Arrow keys to mark additional els B0B blocks from the cursor location Touch the Cut button to delete the block or blocks selected Cut anual Data example 2 0 at example 2 g 6 T1 DO 3750 L 1 0000 H 7 G120 X6 0000 YO 0000 Z0 0000 10 0000 J 6 0000 K 1 0000 8 G169 W1 Z 0 5000 A0 0900 HO 1000 S 0 1250 P0 1000 9 T2 DO 3750 L 1 0000 H 18 T2 11 G133 12 G120 X6 0000 Y1 0000 Z0 0000 I 2 0000 J 7 0000 K 1 0000 13 14 End program 15 M2 16 17 Shape 1 subprogram 18 O1 19 G41 28 GO X4 7762 Y 3 5199 21 G1 X2 7683 Y 1 1099 22 G3 X1 8482 Y 2 7384 R 1 0000 23 G2 X3 4758 Y 4 1951 R2 0000 24 G3 X4 7762 Y 3 5199 R 0 7500 25 M99 358 11 G Code Edit Help amp Advanced Features Inserting a program block To insert a program block or blocks in an existing program follow these steps In Edit Mode touch on the Edit Features button Place the cursor at the beginning of a block where a new block is to be inserted a Touch the Insert Block button Anew line is inserted and the remaining program shifts down The new program block can now be inserted Repeat these steps to insert a block at any location Copy Paste Blocks in a program Multiple blocks can be copied and inserted in the same way Highlight the selected blocks to copy and touch the ili Copy button Place the cursor at the beginning
414. tterns in a sub program Enter sub programs in the program after the end of the main program Call sub programs from the main program A sub program can use any code or move type For example to cut a contour twice one rough pass and one finish pass program It as a sub program You can call the sub program from the main program as many times as required but you enter the parameters only once sub program s must be stored in the same file as the main program that calls them You can store sub programs anywhere in the program after the main program They do not have to be entered In numerical order or begin on any specific block number It is possible to nest Calls to sub programs within other sub programs not just from the main program Loop repeat sub programs moving along any axis in increments each time the loop runs Rotate Mirror and or Scale sub programs Ending the Main Program The main program should always be defined in every program with the EndMain command although this is absolutely required when using a sub program The EndMain command must come before any sub program definitions Select Sub Programs and then EndMain from the pop up menu Conversational tormat EndMain G code format M2 236 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Defining a sub program To define and enter the blocks for a sub program use the Sub command to designate the start of the sub program along with a number to ide
415. tual coordinates of the desired end point and the coordinates of the arc center point Field Code Description Direction E Specifies a clockwise CVV or counterclockwise CCW arc direction Required Basic Cycles Xcenter Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired X Axis arc center point Required ining Ycenter J Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Y Axis arc center point Required X X Absolute position of or incremental o gt Lu Es N Y Y Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Y Axis destination Z Z Absolute position of or incremental distance to the desired Z Axis destination Feed F Feedrate at which to conduct the machining movement CornerRad A Positive arc radius for corner rounding negative X Y distance for chamfering Revs L Number of revolutions from start position to end point 132 distance to the desired X Axis destination Cow Cw 0 0000 Ccw O O a 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Arc Move Center and Angle Specify the arc movement using the coordinates of the arc center point and the included polar angle Basic Cycles Field Code Description Direction E Specifies a clockwise CVV or counterclockwise CCW arc direction Required Xcenter Absolute position of or incremental O distance to the desired X Axis arc center G int Required p point Require
416. tylus and over to the center Remove the calibration standard You are now ready to start running the G151 to set your tool length offsets or tool diameter registers 7 3 Probing Cycles Tool Length and Diameter Offset Preset Updates length and diameter tool registers siti ol If the tool has a hole on the bottom so that the probe Preview would fall between the tool teeth do not use this cycle Damage to the probe could result In this case use G152 for manual length preset or G153 for manual diameter preset ool Len and Diam Calibration Each tool must have the length set once before trying to set the diameter Call this cycle up the first time using Q2 because it automatically sets the length first then the diameter 29 Arc Cw X 0 32012 Y 0 45571 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 03100 38 Arc Ccw X 0 16113 Y 0 45042 XCenter 0 08062 YCenter 0 03126 31 Arc Cw X 0 10449 Y 0 48650 XCenter 0 05664 YCenter 0 02642 32 Line X 0 10443 Y 0 48650 33 Arc Cw X 0 16109 Y 0 45037 XCenter 0 00000 YCenter 0 06250 34 Arc Ccw X 0 31588 Y 0 44772 XCenter 0 07804 YCenter 0 03631 Calibrate the tool probe at least once before trying to automatically A e preset a tool This is done initially but if the stylus is ever changed or the probe Is moved then you must again calibrate the tool probe This tool preset G151 can be run from within a program or from the Manual Data Input Mode with G code MDI selected ACU RITE 35001 203 Y
417. uching Use ACU RITE 35001 289 Some tool paths generate tool motion such as a Pocket Cycle ora Milling Cycle Others tool paths specify additional information needed to have a complete CNC program Many tool paths are used typically during a program and each operation is represented by a button in the Tool Path Edit dialogue A program is generated in the order of the list of tool paths in the Tool Path Edit dialogue To change the order of tool paths select Tool Path Edit button y Quick Coordinate Entry Entries that require X and Y coordinates can use an existing point circle or circle center to specify these values This eliminates the need to re type data or prevent possible errors Pocket Cycle 10 1 CAM Programming Basic Setup Comment Select the Quick Coordinate button A prompt will appear 1 SRD aa asking for a point circle or arc to be selected in the graphics area Start Height 0 000000 0 000000 A selected point will have its X and Y coordinates automatically entered into their respective parameters fields A selected circle or circle center point X and Y coordinates are automatically entered into their respective parameters fields CEM CAPI ee H AAA ED EA AD S S e i AUD TE 19 09 181 001 8 f a O AS 109 EA 0000 590 ae ee eee PRA 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LS Shape E View Adjust ToolPath Create Eleke oe TN ee 290 10 CAM Programming Job Setup Basic ta
418. uential reverse order 113 O a E Sen O S 0 z e m Y S b gt e Oo Q Sa do O E de O 0 z c m Y Su ed gt a Q NR do Restore edits to a program block Using the redo button to reverse edits made to a program and restore the block s to Its edited form Touch the Redo button to redo one or more recent dd actions taken in sequential reverse order Continuing to touch the Redo button will continue to redo recent actions taken in sequential reverse order Editing an existing block Move the cursor to the desired block and press enter or Touch the block number in the left margin See Program Editing on page 111 Inserting program blocks using keypad hotkeys The hard keypad on the front of the control has keys that can be used as hotkeys within the Conversational Editor Pressing the key will open the corresponding cycle form for quick access to inserting the program block into the program at the current cursor location The following table outlines the correlation between the keys and cycles Key Cycle 0 COMMENT will toggle comment on off at current line 1 RAPID 2 LINE 3 ARC 4 FEED 5 TOOL 6 MCODE 7 UNIT 8 DWELL 9 PLANE RPM X MODAL XYZ focus in X field Y MODAL XYZ focus in Y field Z MODAL XYZ focus in Z field U MODAL XYZU focus in U field 114 6 Conversational Editing Program Text
419. uld be at the side picking depth Type G143 On Wr If this is run from inside a program this line needs to be repeated for every corner you wish to find or whose position you want to reestablish When positioning the probe from within the program you should always use the G146 Protected Probe Positioning cycle see G146 instructions later in this document or use the I J or K cycle parameters for the same purpose Execute the line in Manual Data Inout Mode by touching Start 226 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Inside Outside Boss Hole Finding Calibrate the work probe at least once before trying to use this cycle A preliminary tool length offset must be set by eye for the work probe The tool offset and work coordinate must be active before using this cycle in a program See Section 4 Tool Length Offsets on page 73 The Inside Outside Boss Hole Finding Cycle can be run from within a program or from the Manual Data Input Mode Field Code Side Q Length X Width Y Top H DistDown E DistBack V DistInxX A ACU RITE 35001 Description Inside or Outside O Inside Hole 1 Outside Boss Required Estimated length of boss hole if rectangular or the Diameter if round Required Estimated width of boss hole Y is only specified if boss or hole is rectangular in shape Optional If set to 1 the cycle finds the top of the part before finding center of hole or boss If O parameter is set
420. ulers Available with 2D and 3D Solid Views je lol mu a ak 116 o Jol Manual Data System z platai 11 33am ol 1 Simple setup for easy testing 2 Dim Abs 3 Unit Inch 4 Feed 80 50 T1 D 01 L 1 6 7 Call sub program s 8 Call 1 9 Call 2 18 Call 3 11 Call 4 12 Call 5 13 Call 6 14 Call 7 15 Call 8 16 Call 9 17 Call 10 18 Call 11 19 Call 12 28 Call 13 21 EndMain 22 23 Sub program definition s 24 Los More Delete Drill gt Ls we gt Pocket Other Edit Preview Exit Cycles Cycles Features Features 6 Conversational Editing Preview Featur es Menu For a complete description of the pan and rotate buttons see Rotate Drawing View o Preview Features Zoom E 4 Rotate E JO Re Start Preview Clear Preview Sim Tools The S when Simu ACU RITE 35001 n page 261 also see Pan Drawing View on page 261 On screen preview buttons are available in the Preview Features menu From the Edit screen touch the Preview Features button To zoom in or out touch the zoom button The Zoom In and Zoom Qut buttons are now available When using a mouse to zoom in or out in the preview window place the cursor over the area to be viewed and rotate the wheel on the mouse To rotate the view touch the Rotate button Four directional rotate keys are now available Each key will incrementally rotate the view in the dire
421. um Sometimes there may be a tool that has a large diameter making it necessary to slow it down to prevent the touch probe from being hit too hard This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original feedrate Optional 210 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Field Code OvrSlw S Feed OvrRPM R ACU RITE 35001 Description This is the override for the slow feedrate that was set In the machine setup parameter ZFirstPickFeedRate_Slow This is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original feedrate Optional This is the override for the RPM that was set in the machine setup parameter callbAndToolMeasurementRPM This Is used for the same reason as the M cycle parameter This can only be set slower Trying to set this higher will result in the software using the original RPM If you would like the cycle to run without the spindle turning enter a negative value in the R parameter Optional 211 TA lt O gt Q O O Sam A N teedrate is set too fast For this reason the cycle parameters M S and R have been added to enable the programmer operator to override the values in the machine setup parameters for the specific tool being checked or set A Large tools can result in probe damage if the touch You must have the tool positione
422. um number of tools is Tool Number a configuration item Refer to the CNC s Tool Table for more information Must be entered by user Tool Diameter Diameter of the tool Must be entered by user Tool Length Length of the tool Number of Teeth Number of flutes or cutting edges teeth of the tool Must be entered by user Surface Speed Recommended surface speed This value is obtained from the tool manufacturer and is based p on the tool material and the material being machined Must be entered by user Calculated spindle speed to achieve the specified surface speed Automatically calculated by Spindle Speed Tool Diameter and Surface Speed Calculation can be overridden Spindle Speed Surface Speed Tool Diameter O en O O pe A lt O HR Recommended chip load during roughing operation This value is obtained from the tool Chip Load Rough manufacturer and is based on tool and part materials Must be entered by user Must be entered by user Calculated feed rate to achieve the specified roughing chip load Automatically calculated by Number of Teeth Spindle Speed and Chip Load Rough Automatic calculation can be Feed Rough overridden Rough Feed Spindle Speed Rough Chip Load Number Of Teeth Chip Load Finish Recommended chip load during finish operation This value is obtained from the tool p manufacturer and is based on tool and part materials Must be entered by user Calculated feed ra
423. unctions are described in more detail a gt Select the More Milling button and then MCode from the pop up menu Conversational format MCode G code format M n Pyora a ORLA Description MCode M The number of the desired miscellaneous machine code to be activated Required First Parameter optional Second Parameter optional Third Parameter optional CINI lt X CINI lt X Fourth Parameter optional ACU RITE 35001 MO ME E 145 Basic Cycles ining o gt Lu q N Basic Cycles ining a xx LL N Tool Definition and Activation Use the Tool command to define and or use a tool in the program On a machine with a fixed bin tool changer a Tool call will always mount the tool with no need for the MCode 6 On a machine with a random bin tool changer the MCode 6 is required in order to mount the tool On a random type system a Tool call without the MCode 6 will define the tool using the specified parameters and pre fetch the tool by indexing the random bin magazine to that tool s bin but will not mount the tool Refer to chapter 4 Tool Management on page 59 for additional information regarding tools tool diameter and length offsets tool life management tool radius compensation and the Tool Table Conversational format Tool G code format T n Tool T The number of the desired miscellaneous machine code to be activated Requi
424. und the end of the point on the work The CNC applies the arc where there are angles of 15 degrees or less This can be set in the Setup Utility or in the program To change the angle via program set 1031 Example to change an angle to 10 degrees program 1031 10 Re program this value to 15 degrees default when finished The CNC will automatically round the compensated intersection The work remains a sharp corner 82 e INTERSECTING POINT Left G41 e r Tool Diameter at i g Left G41 a M Ni 1 TOOL PATH L ee ees TOOL PATH gt BGM PATH PGM PATH Tool Path dl Program Path Tool Diameter Right G42 Actual Compensated Intersection Intersection Automatically Rounded 4 Tool Management General Precautions When you program tool path instead of part edge a negative diameter in the Tool Table effectively changes the moves during compensation Third axis moves not in the active plane are permitted during compensation The CNC automatically rounds off the compensated intersection of acute angles of 15 degrees or less To change this value program 1031 It is possible to change the tool diameter currently in use with stock variable 1030 Startup Ramp On and cancellation Ramp Off blocks must be at least the tool radius in length You must enter proper diameter value in the Tool Table before y
425. until the Tool Table tab appears Select the Tool Table tab The Tool Table opens in the CAM Setup dialogue Select the Import button The Import Tool Table File pop up dialogue opens Browse to the location where the file you would like to import is located and select it Select the 0k button Exporting a Tool Table To export a Tool Table Select the Setup button The CAM Setup dialogue opens Touch the right arrow key in the CAM Setup dialogue until the Tool Table tab appears Select the Tool Table tab The Tool Table opens in the CAM Setup dialogue Select the Export button The Export Tool Table File pop up dialogue opens Browse to the location where the file is to be saved Type the name of the file to save in the File Name field Select the 0k button ACU RITE 35001 327 Tool Paths Creating a Tool Path in CAM Mode Tool paths are created from shapes that have been defined To create a tool path in CAM Mode Select the Tool Path button from the main Toolbar Select the button for the tool path that is to be created from the Side Toolbar A tool path dialogue will open Fill in all parameters that apply Required parameters have default entries Select the Use button to complete the tool path creation or the Cancel button to exit without saving the tool path If possible the results of the tool path are shown on the graphic screen in tool path view A prompt appears asking to Save the new tool pa
426. us oolPa reate N pu e OA 5 TST The CAM Mode screen Displays three groups of icons and one Toolbar on the left yY O11 PR WD N O ve O O Sa A lt O E Geometry Toolbar menu 2 Modifying Toolbar menu 3 Viewing Toolbar menu 4 Vertical button bar example 5 The Side tool bar changes depending on the geometry tool selected Ld Activating CAM Mode oea RAEE CAM must be used with a program This can be an Program To Run AR 3 n Hee ene eae uma existing program or a new program Care must be taken example 2 9 o 6 a cam tes when using an existing program CAM will overwrite the PN mera p Chapter 6 0 0000 Z 0 0000 J program P 000 Z00000 T0 0909 5022 AS 1 0000 le DAN_C_Tool wie ONES 130 0000 Y1 0000 Z0 0000 I 2 0000 J 7 0000 K 1 0000 To activate CAM Mode a IS ty 1 Shape 1 subprogram Program In Manual Data Input Mode select the Program Engraving Management Management button to activate the Program Directory o button e Example One le g92 test Touch the New Program button to create a new Program program _ Mamamia nE rs CAM Program USB Bin The CAM screen activates ACU RITE 35001 281 O Sen O O u A lt O a Creating a New Program CAM Mode buttons Geometry and Tool Path tools are used to create geometry that will be converted into s
427. utions appear The Prompt Menu bar will ask that only the lines to be kept should now be selected Select the top and bottom tangent lines The lines that will be kept will appear as dashed yellow lines Touch on an empty area in the graphics area to accept the ole Jg E selection s i y The path will now appear as two circles with two outside tangent lines between them Shape View Adjust ToolPath Create 334 10 CAM Programming Finalizing the geometry Unwanted lines now need to be trimmed from the final shape J Select the Trim button from the Modifying Toolbar to complete the y E ia x geometry See Moditying Tools Buttons on page 309 Select the Trim button from the Modifying Toolbar in E the main Toolbar The Prompt bar will ask that the objects to be trimmed should be selected Select the two circles The Prompt bar will ask what geometry the objects should be trimmed against Select the two lines The Prompt bar will ask what objects to keep Select the two outside radius arcs Now touch in an open area in the display Both inside radius arcs will be removed O ve O O Sa A lt O E The geometry will now appear as one continuous line radius at each Ole J a E end _ This geometry will now be used to create a shape which can then be used for a tool path for milling a pocket Once defined this can be copied used as a pattern a
428. uttons Select Shape Edit Layers UY gt View Function Use Select to select geometry for creating shapes Quit On menu two Use to quit the program without saving Shape Edit activates the Shape Edit pop up dialogue Use this pop up dialogue to edit and import shapes Use Layers to create delete and toggle layers View Type activates the View Type buttons Use ee these buttons to switch between view types This is only active when viewing tool paths Adjust Adjust View activates the Adjust View buttons Use View 4 ToolPath Edit co a Create Program Setup 2002022020 DODODR Exit B ACU RITE 35001 these buttons to adjust the view of the tool path s in your program This is only active when viewing tool paths Tool Path Edit activates the Tool Path Edit dialogue Use this to edit and arrange existing tool paths in the program Create Program activates the New Program dialogue or creates the existing program and shows it in a dialogue Setup activates the CAM setup dialogue Next Menu toggles to the next menu bar to view additional buttons Exit exits and saves the program returning to the Program Manager MR a al 2 3 4 5 6 E 8 9 19 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 Ls Shape Layers View Adjust ToolPath Create Setu Si Edit y Type View Edit Program P A 311 O ve O O Sa A lt O E The Next M
429. ve and Line Arc Tangent Entry Move mar A 8 N JT Line Tangent Entry Move In a line tangent entry move the tool approaches the contour in a line move tangent to the first move of the contour The tool feeds from the current position to a calculated point based on the Length L parameter then feeds to the compensated starting point of the contour in a line move tangent to the first move of the contour The direction of the entry move can be reversed by programming a negative Length L All programmed Z movements occur during the entry move G41 Xx Yy Zz G36 Q1 LI The line tangent exit move Is executed the same as the entry but in y reverse order G37 Q1 LI i Contour Start Point Contour End Point S K Calculated Point Programmed Path es Compensated Tool Path Current Tool Entry Move Position O Tool Compensation with Line Tangent Entry Move Line Perpendicular Entry Move In a line perpendicular entry move the tool approaches the contour in a line move perpendicular to the first move of the contour The tool feeds from the current position to a calculated point based on the Length L parameter then feeds to the compensated starting point of the contour in a line move perpendicular to the first move of the contour The direction of the entry move can be reversed by programming a negative Length L All programmed Z movements occur during the entry move G41 Xx Yy
430. versational format The Conversational format in a canned cycle allow you to customize the cycle to include the necessary dimensions feedrates etc Canned cycles greatly reduce program blocks Use them whenever applicable Canned cycles are usually entered into the part program from the Program Edit Help Menu Refer to chapter 11 Activating Edit Help on page 372 for G code format Conversational format contains graphics and labeled entry fields to make programming canned cycles quick and easy ACU RITE 35001 149 Ye O gt Q O D Q N N Drilling Cycles Drilling Tapping and Boring When you activate a drilling cycle it executes after each programmed OE ia ol position until you cancel it AR 3 0 0000 to provide It If you do not specify P the CNC sets it to R If P is provided it must be greater than R or an alarm is given gt The P entry return height is optional and you do not need Y O gt O O D O N N The following reminders are for drill cycles 1 Simple setup for easy testing F feedrate is optional If it is not given the current feedrate is used Hs Unit Treh 4 Feed 80 5 T1 D 01 L 1 6 7 All start heights R and finish heights P as well as Z dimensions are absolute dimensions For all peck drill cycles R start height must be 0 1 or 2 mm above the work surface Tapping uses S word for Spindle Yes No Your machin
431. w 9 G M Showin 3 G M Free VA Free 194 5 68 5 GB Sort by Name Ll 3 Av user 34 A ll set easy 33500 m 35001 e 3500iSlot M 3500iSlot e 3500173 EE l cam test M Chapter 6 le DAN_C_Tool l DAVESDXF e Drillina TST New Unplug Recycle 5 Program Management Program Manager Menu Bar In the Program screen the horizontal menu bar displays the following Utility buttons Manual Data System 3 EE el Program To Run AR 3 g Showing 9Q GM Free 159 1 GB Sort by Name 14 Ac acu rite cnc3500i user 38 Button Program Unplug USB LE Lele ACU RITE 35001 Function Use Navigation Arrow Back to go to the previous folder Use Navigation Arrow Forward to go to the next folder This is only active if the Back button has been used New Program opens dialogue to create a new part program Use Unplug USB to properly eject the current USB memory device i Use CAM to enter CAM with the highlighted part Ll program a Use Draw to enter Simulation Draw with the LL highlighted part program e Use Edit to edit the highlighted part program Recycle Use Recycle Bin to display the dialogue showing the Bin contents of the Recycle Bin 135001 M 35001 is 3500iSlot M 3500iSlot S AR 3 M Chapter 6 ll cam test DAN_C_Tool ll example 2 le Example One
432. w available To rotate the view touch the Rotate button Four directional rotate keys are now available Each key will incrementally rotate the view in the direction indicated on the rotational key To reset the view to Its original state touch the Reset Rotate button To pan the preview touch the Pan button Directional arrow buttons become available A x10 toggle button is also available Activating this key will allow a times ten panning in the direction selected To reset the view to Its original state touch the Reset Pan button To activate the grid touch the Grid button Manual Data System y e ral a ad ol 3500iTST G 1 GO G71 G90 XYZ 2 G120 X 220 Y 150 Z100 I 360 J 2 3 G53 02 X 364 36 Y 146 28 Z5 0 4 G53 02 5 GO X76 2 Y 50 8 6 T1 D8 L 200 7 GO 22 0 8 1000 M3 9 G1 ZO F200 18 T2 D8 0 L 351 757 11 GO 22 0 12 M3 13 G75 N76 2 W50 8 H2 Z 2 1100 14 T3 D9 5 L 359 160 15 GO X76 2 Y 50 8 16 GO 22 0 17 M3 18 G78 M50 W24 6 H2 Z 2 U7 110 19 T6 D6 35 L 360 750 28 GO X76 2 Y 50 8 21 GO 22 0 22 M3 23 G77 H2 Z 5 D19 1500 K500 P 24 T9 D8 L 250 Delete Find a Edit Preview Mee Else 1 60 G71 G90 XYZ 2 G120 X 220 Y 150 Z100 I 36 3 G53 02 X 364 36 Y 146 28 Z 4 G53 02 5 GO X76 2 Y 50 8 6 T1 D8 L 200 7 GO 22 0 8 1000 M3 0 J 2 5 0 9 G1 Z0 F200 18 T2 D8 0 L 351 757 11 GO 22 0 12 M3 13 G75 N76 2 W50 8 H2 Z 2 1100 14 T3 D
433. with the large rectangular buttons at the top of the screen Manual Data Input allows data input for simple machining operations Manual operation single step operation and single commands can be entered See Manual Data Inout Menu Bar on page 40 for a complete description 135001 Program To Run AR 3 m I Showing w 9 G M Free 194 6GB Sort by Name 14 2 civ user 34 li 3500i is 3500iSlot M 3500iSlot 3500i TST iM AR 3 e cam test M Chapt g 6 is DAN_C_Tool le DAVESDXF le Drilling_TST Engraving sl example 2 Example One is g92 test l G_Arcs iG Drill G_Mi11 8 G_Pockets e gSample ll hinae plate 1 sl include 9 00 01 01 New Unplug Recycle A A A A Drill Pocket Other G code Mill Line Mill Arc Manual Cycles Cycles Cycles MDI 8 1 Introduction Program Management provides access to existing programs for running simulating or editing New programs can be created here with access to the CAM and Draw features Programs can also be copied to or from a USB memory device like a memory stick or thumb drive or network See Accessing Program Management on page 88 for a complete description Program Run allows a selected program to either auto run without pausing or single step through a program as It is running See chapter 9 1 Running a program on page 266 for a complete des
434. y moves Y axis in positive aD direction e Q E Potentiometer for feed rate and spindle speed override Manually moves Y axis in negative direction Feed rate Spindle speed Manually moves Z axis in positive direction Manually moves Z axis in negative direction Manually moves U axis in positive direction Manually moves U axis in negative direction ife e e ACU RITE 35001 iii O Keyboard Installation Keyboard Equivalent Key Strokes The machine builder determines whether the system Ke A LO supports a keyboard option If this option is supported plug y a USB keyboard into the 35001 CLEAR Mpa There is no keyboard equivalent for the E STOP so emergency shutdowns cannot be performed ARROWS 00060 Arrows 5 through the keyboard A ENTER Enter om Peripherals Supported 9 USB memory devices e g a memory stick X X 2 a X e USB pointing devices e g a mouse 3 USB Keyboards y Y y START po Alt s HOLD po Alt h Manual Information Message symbols Fonts Used in this manual 35001 reference to the console KEYS 3500 reference to the touch screen Buttons Changes errors HEIDENHAIN Corporation is continuously striving to improve Please help HEIDENHAIN Corporation by sending your request to the following e mail address sales heidenhain com Visit www acu rite com for latest version of this manual ACU RITE 35001 c S pur oe O t C am
435. y toggling the Record button on the second set of menu bar MDI buttons This block history can be cleared by touching the Clear History button on the second set of menu bar buttons or saved into a part program by touching the Save History button When saving the history the operator is given the option to save It as a G code ISO program or Conversational 4 ot as w Select l Delete To view the current history touch the Block History button on the second set of menu bar MDI buttons From within this dialog individual cycles can be deleted by highlighting the cycle in the list and touching the Delete button The cycle form can A A Tesch Remote X also be opened again for re edit Select a cycle and or re run a cycle oc oe ttm YO aS by touching the Select button Once the cycle form is brought back up the operator can then follow the same procedure as the previous section for running the cycle Touch Close to exit the Block History dialogue O 4 Q ad A o e we 0 ACU RITE 35001 47 m S sad lt er A C e y Mm G code MDI The ACU RITE 35001 also has G code Manual Data Input mode and allows you to command moves without creating a part program MDI also is a quick way to program one move or a series of moves that are used only one time Refer to chapter 11 G Code Program Editing on page 352 To enter G code MDI mode use the
436. ycle Do not use the tapping 3 A dad 0 0000 cycle if the machine does not have spindle commands available The tapping canned cycle is used for tapping holes During a tapping cycle the tool feeds from the R plane to Z depth The spindle stops and reverses the tool feeds to the retract plane and the spindle stops and then reverses again 240 Arc Cw X 0 01300 Y 6 06850 XCenter 0 12425 YCenter 0 01279 287 Arc Cw X 0 07250 Y 0 10050 XCenter 0 05506 YCenter 0 03106 288 Arc Cw X 0 12900 Y 0 05550 XCenter 0 00132 YCenter 0 05632 F TPlorLead Enter Threads per Inch when in Inch mode Enter 289 Line X 0 15700 Y 0 06250 218 Arc Ccw X 0 11500 Y 0 11550 XCenter 0 07913 YCenter 0 01956 Lead when in MM mode Lead is the distance from one thread to 211 Arc Ccw X 0 06200 Y 0 12450 XCenter 0 04519 YCenter 0 10558 the next You must program a spindle RPM The Feedrate is K Mil a calculated based on the spindle RPM and the TPI or Lead specified a es ee re ee de eee S Spindle sync To enable Spindle sync enter a value of 1 The l l l machine must have direct spindle control to use this feature The spindle rotation and Z axis movement is synched together as in a threading cycle T 2 O gt O O Q N N D Dwell A dwell time value in seconds can be entered You may require this feature because of the time required to stop and reverse the spindle The Dwell occurs before the top entry to the hole and before
437. ycles sub programs Field FinStock SideStock RampFeed Rough Feed FinFeed ReturnHgt Coarse Tool SkipRough SkipFinish Direction G code format G178 Code Q ACU RITE 35001 Description Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass This amount applies to the sides and bottom unless R SideStock is defined then S FinStock only applies to the bottom Default is no stock left Amount of stock left by the roughing passes for a finish pass on the sides only This amount overrides the value in S FinStock A value of zero can force stock to be left only on the bottom Default is equal to S FinStock The feedrate at which the tool will amp into the pocket in all three axes Default Is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during roughing passes Default is last programmed feedrate Feedrate used during finish passes Default is last programmed feedrate Z axis absolute start and finish height must be equal to or above H used as a safety clearance Z position before making X Y moves Executed in rapid at start and end of cycle Defaults to current Z position at beginning of cycle Number of tool used for previous roughing cycle Yes Roughing pass is skipped only finish pass is performed No Roughing pass is performed Default Yes Finish pass is skipped only rough pass is performed No Finish pass is performed Default Select Cw or Cow 179
438. ying the increment amount for one or more axes Select Other Cycles and then Loop from the pop up Cycles menu Conversational format Loop G code format G65 Pn Ln Field Code Description Sub P The uniquely identifying number of the sub program to be called and repeated Required Loops M The number of times the sub program should be repeated before returning required XIncr X Distance the X Axis increments after each loop cycle of the sub program YIncr Y Distance the Y Axis increments after each loop cycle of the sub program ZIncr Z Distance the Z Axis increments after each loop cycle of the sub program ZFeed The feedrate to be used in the Z Axis when conducting the ZIncr movement 238 cs os EE 7 Programming Canned Cycles sub programs Rotate Mirror and or Scale a sub program Use RMS blocks to Rotate Mirror and or Scale sub programs These functions turn off when the sub program ends Select Other Cycles and then RMS from the pop up Cycles menu Conversational format RMS Patterns commanded by the program can be rotated using polar coordinates Any angle can be described as positive or negative depending on how it is referenced CCW from O degrees is positive CW from O degrees is negative ss O G code formats G68 YN O O a Y N Mirroring reverses the sign of subsequent numbers and G code Description movements resulting in a refl

3500i User Manual - Acu-Rite

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents